Teamcenter Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide. Publication Number PLM00011 J

Transcription

1 Teamcenter 10.1 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide Publication Number PLM00011 J

2 Proprietary and restricted rights notice This software and related documentation are proprietary to Siemens Product Lifecycle Management Software Inc Siemens Product Lifecycle Management Software Inc. All Rights Reserved. Siemens and the Siemens logo are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. Teamcenter is a trademark or registered trademark of Siemens Product Lifecycle Management Software Inc. or its subsidiaries in the United States and in other countries. All other trademarks, registered trademarks, or service marks belong to their respective holders. 2 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

3 Contents Proprietary and restricted rights notice Part I: Getting started with Teamcenter server installation Getting started Getting started System requirements Enabling Teamcenter installation Configuring Teamcenter installation Starting Teamcenter installation Interfaces: Teamcenter installation tools Basic concepts about Teamcenter installation Site planning Site planning Installation and deployment overview Other considerations Part II: Database server installation IBM DB2 installation and configuration IBM DB2 installation and configuration Install IBM DB Create a DB2 sample database Verify connectivity with the sample database Creating a DB2 database for Teamcenter Oracle installation and configuration Preparing the Oracle server Set shell limits and parameters Upgrade an Oracle server and database Install Oracle server Configure Oracle software Create an Oracle database Part III: Teamcenter server installation Teamcenter preinstallation tasks Obtain a Teamcenter license file Install the licensing server Select destination directories Verify required character set Ensure correct mode on Linux PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 3

4 Contents Install a volume server Install NX and Teamcenter Integration for NX or NX Integration Best installation practices Teamcenter server installation Before you start Install a Teamcenter corporate server Teamcenter postinstallation tasks Teamcenter postinstallation tasks Run the postinstallation tasks script Start Teamcenter database daemons Configure Multi-Site Collaboration Configure heterogeneous operating system environment Back up new installations Part IV: Web tier installation J2EE Web tier installation J2EE Web tier installation J2EE Web tier prerequisites Install the Web Application Manager Installing thin client Web applications Installing rich client Web applications Part V: Adding features Installing the server manager Gather required information Install the J2EE server manager Start the server manager Install the Business Modeler IDE Install the Business Modeler IDE Install the Business Modeler IDE as a stand-alone application Install the Business Modeler IDE to an existing Eclipse environment Allocate memory to the Business Modeler IDE Start the Business Modeler IDE Installing a custom solution or third-party template Installing a custom solution or third-party template Install a template using TEM Update the database using TEM Manufacturing Manufacturing Install the Manufacturing Resource Library Planning data migration from Genius4000 to Resource Manager Installing Teamcenter reporting and analytics Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

5 Contents Installing Teamcenter reporting and analytics Before you begin Create the Reporting and Analytics database Configure the Reporting and Analytics license file Install Reporting and Analytics Install Remote Reporting and Analytics Deploy Reporting and Analytics Complete Reporting and Analytics installation Installing Render Management Installing Render Management Prerequisites for rendering Install Render Management Complete Render Management installation Installing Teamcenter online help Installing Teamcenter online help Install online help Configure online help access for Teamcenter clients Part VI: Additional configuration and maintenance Managing installations and configurations Managing installations and configurations Create a configuration Modify a configuration Add an existing Teamcenter database Add or configure a database Change the Oracle password Configure multiple databases for a four-tier rich client Migrate Teamcenter to a different JRE Deploying localized versions of Teamcenter Deploying localized versions of Teamcenter Configuring client display language Environment settings for non-english locales Deploying localizations Creating a custom distribution Overview of custom distributions Create a silent distribution Create a compact distribution Installing Teamcenter patches Installing Teamcenter patches Distribution of Teamcenter updates Downloading Teamcenter patches Patch Teamcenter Environment Manager Install patches on the corporate server Patching the rich client Patch the Web tier PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 5

6 Contents Review the README file Uninstalling Teamcenter Uninstalling Teamcenter Uninstall Teamcenter configurations and installations Uninstall TCCS Uninstalling DB Uninstall Oracle Part VII: Appendixes Troubleshooting A-1 Troubleshooting A-1 Troubleshooting Teamcenter server installation A-1 Troubleshooting four-tier architecture deployment A-6 Troubleshooting Oracle A-11 Troubleshooting document rendering A-11 Troubleshooting Teamcenter Integration for NX A-14 Recovering from a corrupted database A-14 Distribution media B-1 Distribution media B-1 Teamcenter software distribution image B-2 Teamcenter documentation distribution image B-3 Solutions and features reference C-1 Solutions and features reference C-1 Teamcenter solutions C-1 Teamcenter features C-1 Rich client solutions C-16 Web tier context parameters D-1 Glossary E-1 Index Index-1 Figures Teamcenter Environment Manager Web Application Manager Two-tier architecture Two-tier deployment Four-tier architecture Four-tier deployment (enterprise and Web tiers on same host) Four-tier deployment (enterprise and Web tiers on separate hosts with HTTP server) Four-tier deployment (multiple enterprise tier hosts and Web tier hosts) Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

7 Contents Tables Four-tier deployment (load balancing) Two-tier architecture installation Four-tier architecture installation Rich client installation Basic File Management System deployment Install plug-ins Browsing for the template files Selecting the new feature Viewing the templates to be installed Starting a full model update Selecting the template for update Teamcenter HTML online help collection Teamcenter PDF online help collection Multiple databases (four-tier rich client) Unicode homogeneous server platform configuration Sample silent installation configuration file Platform support for Teamcenter servers and clients Required hard disk space for Teamcenter configurations Rich client optional parameter values Lifecycle Visualization (embedded viewer) parameter and table values Lifecycle Visualization (stand-alone application viewer) parameter and table values Teamcenter Integration for NX parameter and table values Content Management System for Rich Client 4-Tier values Environment settings on UNIX and Linux systems (UTF-8) Environment settings on UNIX and Linux systems (non-utf-8) Teamcenter features C-2 Web tier required parameters D-1 Web tier optional parameters D-5 Global Services context parameters D-7 PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 7

8

9 Part I Getting started with Teamcenter server installation This guide describes how to install Teamcenter 10.1 on UNIX and Linux servers. This includes installation of Teamcenter servers using Teamcenter Environment Manager and the Teamcenter Web tier using the Web Application Manager. This guide assumes you have a thorough working knowledge of your operating system and general knowledge of Teamcenter use. Getting started Site planning PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide

10

11 Chapter 1 Getting started Getting started System requirements Where to find system requirements Platforms System hardware Database Java Runtime Environment Web browser Web tier support Software integrations Enabling Teamcenter installation Locate Teamcenter distribution images Configuring Teamcenter installation Starting Teamcenter installation Interfaces: Teamcenter installation tools Teamcenter Environment Manager Web Application Manager Basic concepts about Teamcenter installation Database server Teamcenter servers Corporate server Additional servers Teamcenter clients Rich client Thin client Teamcenter network architectures Two-tier architecture Four-tier architecture Selecting and configuring features Basic tasks in Teamcenter installation Installing a database server Installing a Teamcenter server Installing the Web tier Installing Teamcenter clients PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide

12

13 Chapter 1 Getting started Getting started Verify you have installed supported versions of all prerequisite software and plan your Teamcenter network before you begin installing servers. System requirements Where to find system requirements For information about versions of operating systems, third-party software, Teamcenter software, and system hardware certified for your platform, see the Siemens PLM Software Certification Database: certification/teamcenter.shtml Note Some software requirements differ for non-english locales. When viewing the certification database, make sure you note any exceptions for your locale. Platforms Determine from the following table which Teamcenter 10.1 servers and clients are supported on your operating system. Bullet characters ( ) denote supported servers and clients. Platform support for Teamcenter servers and clients PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 1-1

14 Chapter 1 Getting started Operating System Corporate server Web tier Rich client Thin client Business Modeler IDE client TCCS 1 Microsoft Windows (desktop platforms) 2 Microsoft Windows (server platforms) 3 Sun Solaris Hewlett-Packard HP-UX 4 IBM AIX SUSE Linux Red Hat Linux 5 Apple Macintosh Mac OS Notes about platform support General notes For information about versions of operating systems certified for Teamcenter 10.1, see the Siemens PLM Software Certification Database. For information about installing Teamcenter on Windows servers, see the Installation on Windows Servers Guide. For information about installing Teamcenter on Linux clients, see the Installation on Linux Clients Guide. If your Teamcenter database server is IBM DB2, all Teamcenter servers and two-tier rich clients in your network must run operating systems supported for Teamcenter with IBM DB2. IBM DB2 databases are supported only with Teamcenter servers running on Microsoft Windows, IBM AIX, or SUSE Linux platforms. Teamcenter installation tools (Teamcenter Environment Manager and Web Application Manager) require the ISO character set. Make sure this character set is available on your host. If you are uncertain or want to verify this character set, see Verify required character set. Sun Solaris 1. Teamcenter client communication system (TCCS) is installed with the rich client. This column refers to the stand-alone TCCS application. 2. Microsoft Windows desktop platforms include Windows XP and Windows 7.For information about installing Teamcenter on Windows clients, see the Installation on Windows Clients Guide. 3. Microsoft Windows server platforms include Windows Server Itanium platforms only. PA-RISC hardware is not supported. 5. Only 64-bit Red Hat Linux is supported. 1-2 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

15 Getting started Teamcenter executables are 64-bit applications. Teamcenter 10.1 is supported only on 64-bit Solaris. Hewlett-Packard HP-UX Teamcenter is supported on HP-UX on Itanium platforms only. No Teamcenter servers or clients are supported on HP-UX PA-RISC platforms. Hewlett-Packard HP-UX systems require special configuration to support Java. You must perform these steps to enable Teamcenter clients and installation tools on HP-UX systems. For more information, see the Hewlett-Packard guidelines at the following URL: IBM AIX The 64-bit IBM AIX platform is supported for Teamcenter server processes. Linux Make sure Linux host names do not exceed 31 characters in length. Host names longer than 31 characters cause Teamcenter corporate server installation to fail during saving of the POM schema file in the TC_DATA directory. Note Teamcenter installation tools do not require fully qualified domain names for host names. If your fully qualified domain name exceeds 31 characters, use the server short host name instead. For more information, see the GTAC solutions document on GTAC. On Linux systems, make sure your system is set to use the ISO character set rather than the default UTF-8 character set. Teamcenter installation tools require this setting. System hardware Make sure your Teamcenter host has the required amount of disk space available. Required hard disk space for Teamcenter configurations shows the required disk space for the following common Teamcenter configurations: Corporate server The corporate server contains the features included in the Corporate Server solution in Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM). Additional features may require additional disk space. For more information, see Install a Teamcenter corporate server. Two-tier rich client PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 1-3

16 Chapter 1 Getting started The two-tier rich client contains the features included in the Rich Client 2-tier solution in Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM). Additional features may require additional disk space. For more information, see the appropriate Teamcenter client installation guide (for Windows or Linux). Web tier The Web tier includes the Web Application Manager, a distribution server, and a distribution server instance that contains the Over-the-Web installer and Rich Client 4-tier solutions. Additional solutions may require additional disk space. For more information, see J2EE Web tier installation. Required hard disk space for Teamcenter configurations Platform Corporate server Two-tier rich client Web tier Hewlett-Packard HP-UX GB Not supported 3 GB IBM AIX 2.0 GB Not supported 3 GB SUSE Linux 2.0 GB 300 MB 3 GB Red Hat Linux 2.0 GB 300 MB 3 GB Sun Solaris 2.5 GB Not supported 3 GB Microsoft Windows 1.5 GB 450 MB 4.5 GB Database Teamcenter requires a relational database management system (RDBMS) for storing Teamcenter data. Before you install a Teamcenter, you must install an IBM DB2 or Oracle database server and make sure your Teamcenter corporate server host has access to the server. For information about supported database server versions, see the certification database: certification/teamcenter.shtml Choose a database management system that suits the platforms of your Teamcenter servers and clients. When planning your network, consider the following limitations: Teamcenter servers and two-tier rich clients on UNIX or Linux hosts cannot connect to Microsoft SQL Server database servers. If your Teamcenter database server is IBM DB2, all Teamcenter servers and two-tier rich clients in your network must run operating systems supported for Teamcenter with IBM DB2. IBM DB2 databases are supported only with 6. Itanium platforms only. PA-RISC hardware is not supported. 1-4 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

17 Getting started Teamcenter servers running on Microsoft Windows, IBM AIX, or SUSE Linux platforms. For information about installing a database server for Teamcenter, see Oracle installation and configuration or IBM DB2 installation and configuration. Java Runtime Environment Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM) requires a supported Java Runtime Environment (JRE). You must download and install the required JRE before you install Teamcenter. For information about required versions of the JRE for Teamcenter, see the Siemens PLM Software certification database: certification/teamcenter.shtml TEM verifies the required version of Java is available on the host. If the required version is not present, TEM does not launch. Before you launch TEM to install Teamcenter, specify the location of the JRE by one of the following methods: Set the appropriate environment variable on your host: o 32-bit Java Set the JRE_HOME environment variable to the location of the 32-bit Java JRE. o 64-bit Java Set the JRE64_HOME environment variable to the location of the 64-bit Java JRE. Note You must use the appropriate Teamcenter software distribution image (32-bit or 64-bit) for the JRE you use. Use the -jre argument to specify the JRE location when you launch TEM from a command prompt: tem jre JRE-path For example: tem jre c:\apps\jre1.7 TEM stores the JRE location during Teamcenter installation. After installation is complete, TEM no longer requires the JRE_HOME or JRE64_HOME environment variable or the -jre argument. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 1-5

18 Chapter 1 Getting started Web browser The Teamcenter thin client and Over-the-Web Installer 7 require a Web browser. Teamcenter 10.1 supports the following Web browsers: Windows systems: Microsoft Internet Explorer and Mozilla Firefox Linux systems: Mozilla Firefox Macintosh systems: Apple Safari For information about versions supported, see the Siemens PLM Software Certification Database. Web tier support If you use the Teamcenter J2EE Web tier, install the following software: Java Runtime Environment (JRE) Install a supported JRE on the host where you build Teamcenter Web applications. J2EE application server Install a supported J2EE application server on the host where you deploy Teamcenter Web applications. For supported versions of these products, see the certification database: certification/teamcenter.shtml Note Some Web application servers require special configuration for use with Teamcenter. For more information, see the Web Application Deployment Guide. Software integrations If you use Teamcenter 10.1 integrations to other Siemens PLM Software products or third-party software, install those products before you install Teamcenter Some Siemens PLM Software products require separate licenses from your Siemens PLM Software representative. Siemens PLM Software products are licensed using the Siemens PLM Software Common Licensing Server. For more information about the Common Licensing Server, see Install the licensing server. 7. The Over-the-Web Installer installs the four-tier Teamcenter rich client and Teamcenter Microsoft Office interfaces. 1-6 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

19 Getting started Enabling Teamcenter installation Locate Teamcenter distribution images Locate the Teamcenter software and documentation distribution images and make sure they are accessible to your client host. For descriptions of Teamcenter distribution images, see Distribution media. Note Teamcenter software distribution images can contain multiple ZIP files. For example, the software distribution image for Windows consists of two files named Tcn_win_1_of_2.zip and Tcn_win_2_of_2.zip. If you download software distribution images for Teamcenter, you must download all files in the set to obtain the complete image. After you download files, extract all ZIP files to a common directory to assemble the image before you begin installation. If you mount the Teamcenter software distribution image on a remote NFS server, you must launch Teamcenter Environment Manager on the local server node. Configuring Teamcenter installation Before you install Teamcenter, create an operating system logon account for Teamcenter. Teamcenter services run on the server as this user account. Log on using this account when you install the Teamcenter corporate server and when you perform maintenance such as upgrading or installing updates using Teamcenter Environment Manager. Starting Teamcenter installation To begin installing Teamcenter installation, launch the appropriate Teamcenter installation tool: Teamcenter Environment Manager To install the Teamcenter corporate server, launch Teamcenter Environment Manager using the tem.sh command from the Teamcenter software distribution image. Web Application Manager To begin installing the Teamcenter J2EE Web tier, launch the Web Application Manager using the insweb command from the install directory in the WEB_ROOT directory You create this directory when you install the Web Application Manager as described in J2EE Web tier installation. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 1-7

20 Chapter 1 Getting started Interfaces: Teamcenter installation tools Teamcenter installation tools (Teamcenter Environment Manager and the Web Application Manager) enable you to build and manage your Teamcenter installation. Teamcenter Environment Manager Teamcenter Environment Manager is a tool that installs Teamcenter servers and two-tier and four-tier rich clients. Teamcenter Environment Manager Teamcenter Environment Manager also performs maintenance operations, such as upgrading servers, applying maintenance packs, and installing patches. You launch Teamcenter Environment Manager using the tem.sh command. Web Application Manager The Web Application Manager is a tool that installs thin client and rich client solutions and builds Teamcenter J2EE Web applications. 1-8 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

21 Getting started Web Application Manager You launch the Web Application Manager by entering the insweb command. The Web Application Manager allows you to create multiple Web applications that contain different sets of Teamcenter solutions. This enables you to create Web applications for different groups of users in your network. Your Web applications can access the same Teamcenter corporate server, but provide different subsets of Teamcenter functionality. The Web Application Manager creates separate staging locations and separate deployable files 9 for each Web application. Some Teamcenter solutions require other solutions and some solutions may not be combined with other solutions in the same Web application. For more information about using the Web Application Manager, see J2EE Web tier installation. Basic concepts about Teamcenter installation Determine the Teamcenter servers and network architectures suit your needs and which features you want to install. Database server A Teamcenter network requires access to a database server. Before you install Teamcenter, you or your database administrator must install and configure a database server to store Teamcenter data. The Teamcenter corporate 9. A deployable file is a Web archive (WAR) or enterprise archive (EAR) file, depending on the solutions it contains. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 1-9

22 Chapter 1 Getting started server must have access to a database server or a database client. Teamcenter supports IBM DB2, Oracle, and Microsoft SQL Server databases. For information about installing a database server for Teamcenter, see Oracle installation and configuration or IBM DB2 installation and configuration. For Oracle configuration settings and tuning methods to optimize Teamcenter performance, see the Teamcenter Deployment Guide, available in the documentation section of Siemens PLM Software s support site. The Teamcenter Deployment Guide also provides an in-depth review of Oracle database performance issues and diagnosis, and configuration and tuning guidelines. For Microsoft SQL Server configuration settings and tuning methods to optimize Teamcenter performance, see the Teamcenter Deployment Guide, available in the documentation section of Siemens PLM Software s support site. The Teamcenter Deployment Guide also provides an in-depth review of Microsoft SQL database performance issues and diagnosis, and configuration and tuning guidelines. Note Teamcenter servers and two-tier rich clients on Linux hosts cannot connect to Microsoft SQL Server database servers. Teamcenter servers You can install different types of Teamcenter servers according to the features you use and your load distribution needs. Corporate server A Teamcenter corporate server installation includes the following components: Teamcenter shared binary executables and files Teamcenter shared data subdirectories and files Database connection Teamcenter volume Additional optional Teamcenter features such as File Management System (FMS) Additional servers A Teamcenter network requires one corporate server configuration. Additional servers are optional, but can help balance network loads and facilitate heterogeneous networks (networks with hosts running different operating systems). Teamcenter clients Teamcenter provides clients suited to various uses and network configurations. These clients include the rich client, the thin client, and specialized clients such as Teamcenter Client for Microsoft Office and Teamcenter Extensions for Microsoft Office. Rich client The rich client is a platform-independent client implementation (Java application) for users who interact with Teamcenter frequently. It is extendable and able to run both Teamcenter and customer-written applications. Customers can also extend the standard user interface Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

23 Getting started The rich client application is deployed on each user workstation using Teamcenter Environment Manager or the Over-the-Web Installer, depending on which Teamcenter network architecture you use. The rich client is supported in both architectural models described in Two-tier architecture and Four-tier architecture. Thin client The thin client provides access to Teamcenter through a standard commercial Web browser, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer or Mozilla Firefox. The user interface provides a streamlined browser-based view of product information stored in a Teamcenter database. The thin client is supported only in the four-tier architectural model described in Four-tier architecture. Teamcenter network architectures Teamcenter provides two architecture models for deployment: two-tier and four-tier. Two-tier architecture The two-tier architectural model comprises the following tiers: Client tier The client tier comprises the Teamcenter rich clients. In a deployment of the two-tier architecture, the Teamcenter server runs on the client workstation. Note The two-tier rich client is installed only through TEM. Over-the-Web installation is supported only for the four-tier rich client. Some Teamcenter client features, such as Teamcenter Integration for NX, Lifecycle Visualization, and Teamcenter Client for Microsoft Office, require the Web tier, a component of the four-tier architecture. To enable these features for a two-tier rich client, you can connect the two-tier rich client to a deployment of the Web tier. For information about functionality you can add to a rich client and which add-ons require the Web tier, see Rich client installation. Resource tier The resource tier comprises a database server, database, volumes, and file servers. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 1-11

24 Chapter 1 Getting started Two-tier architecture In the two-tier model, you deploy the Teamcenter rich client, which includes the local server, and the optional applications that integrate with the rich client on the client workstation. Typically, the database server, volumes, and file servers are installed on one or more separate hosts. Teamcenter File Management System (FMS) manages the rich client access to volumes: The FMS server cache (FSC) process run on the server hosting the volume. The FMS client cache (FCC) process runs on the rich client host. For more information about FMS and two-tier rich client architecture, see File Management System installation Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

25 Getting started Two-tier deployment Four-tier architecture The four-tier architecture model comprises the following tiers: Client tier The client tier comprises the Teamcenter rich client, thin client, and other clients such as Teamcenter Client for Microsoft Office. Note The rich client can be deployed with additional functionality, such as Lifecycle Visualization, Teamcenter Client for Microsoft Office, and Teamcenter Integration for NX or NX Integration (Teamcenter Integration for NX/NX Integration 3 is not supported.) For information about the functionality you can add, see Rich client installation. J2EE Web tier The J2EE Web tier is a Java application that runs in a Java 2 Enterprise Edition (J2EE) application server, such as Oracle WebLogic, and is responsible for communication between the client tier and enterprise tier. For information about supported application servers, see the Siemens PLM Software Certification Database: certification/teamcenter.shtml PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 1-13

26 Chapter 1 Getting started Enterprise tier The enterprise tier comprises a configurable pool of Teamcenter C++ server processes and a server manager. The enterprise tier retrieves data from and stores data in the database. A server manager manages a pool of Teamcenter server processes. You must install a server manager whenever you deploy the Web tier. Note Teamcenter provides server managers based on the J2EE and the Microsoft.NET platforms. The.NET Web tier is supported only on Windows platforms. Resource tier The resource tier comprises a database server, database, volumes, and file servers Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

27 Getting started Four-tier architecture You can design deployments that host the Web tier, resource tier, and enterprise tiers on the same computer or on separate computers: Smaller sites can run the pool of servers and the server manager on the same host as the Web tier. Larger sites can distribute the pool of server processes across multiple hosts and optionally include an HTTP server to serve static files or multiple HTTP servers to support load balancing. For a multihost configuration, the server pool consists of multiple subpools, one or more for each host. Each subpool is managed by one server manager process. The Web tier balances the load across the server pools. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 1-15

28 Chapter 1 Getting started The Teamcenter J2EE based server manager and Web tier application both employ the JBoss cache, a tree-structured cache, to provide replication and transaction context. You must configure the JBoss cache (called TreeCache in Teamcenter) in both the J2EE based server manager and the Web tier application. To ensure communication between the Web tier and the server manager, you must coordinate the values you specify for each component. For some values, you must provide the identical value when configuring the Web tier application. If you are setting up multiple Web tier environments with separate domains, you must configure: A minimum of one server manager for each Web tier deployment. A separate TreeCache cluster for each environment. To configure a separate TreeCache cluster, Siemens PLM Software recommends configuring a different port (multicast) or set of ports (TCP) for each cluster. The JMX HTTP adapter allows you to view the status of the server pool and dynamically alter the pool configuration values (the values are not persistent). Access this functionality from the following URL: Replace host-name with the name of the host running the server manager. Replace jmx-port with the number of the port running the JMX HTTP adapter. This port number is defined when you install the J2EE based server manager. The first time you log on to the adapter, use manager for both the user name and the password. You can change the user name and password to unique values using the adapter. Teamcenter File Management System (FMS) manages the rich client access to volumes: The FMS client cache (FCC) process runs on the rich client host. The FMS server cache (FSC) process runs on each server hosting a volume and each server hosting a pool of Teamcenter servers (TcServer). Note If you install File Management System, the FMS server cache (FSC) and the server manager must run on the same host server, with the same user ID Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

29 Getting started Four-tier deployment (enterprise and Web tiers on same host) PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 1-17

30 Chapter 1 Getting started Four-tier deployment (enterprise and Web tiers on separate hosts with HTTP server) 1-18 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

31 Getting started Four-tier deployment (multiple enterprise tier hosts and Web tier hosts) PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 1-19

32 Chapter 1 Getting started Four-tier deployment (load balancing) 1-20 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

33 Getting started Selecting and configuring features The Features panel in Teamcenter Environment Manager provides many features you can include in your Teamcenter server. For a complete list of available features, see Teamcenter features. Some Teamcenter features require additional configuration after Teamcenter installation is complete. For information about additional configuration steps, see Teamcenter postinstallation tasks. Basic tasks in Teamcenter installation Installing a Teamcenter network generally consists of installing a database server, a Teamcenter server, an optional Web tier, and Teamcenter clients. Installing a database server Install a database server (IBM DB2 or Oracle) according to the vendor s documentation and the Teamcenter guidelines provided in IBM DB2 installation and configuration or Oracle installation and configuration. Installing a Teamcenter server Install one or more Teamcenter servers as described in Teamcenter server installation. Installing the Web tier Install the J2EE Web tier as described in J2EE Web tier installation. Installing Teamcenter clients Install Teamcenter clients as described in the appropriate client installation guide (for Windows, Linux, or Macintosh). PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 1-21

34

35 Chapter 2 Site planning Site planning Installation and deployment overview Planning the Teamcenter network Installing Teamcenter components Two-tier architecture installation Four-tier architecture installation Rich client installation Thin client installation File Management System installation Installing File Management System Creating volumes Lifecycle Visualization installation Global Services installation Remote workflow installation Security Services installation Teamcenter online help installation Other considerations Oracle server considerations Network environment considerations Homogeneous network environment Heterogeneous network environment Required operating system and user accounts PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide

36

37 Chapter 2 Site planning Site planning Plan your Teamcenter network and identify software issues that may affect your installation. Installation and deployment overview Determine the network architecture you want to use and the components you want to install. Planning the Teamcenter network A Teamcenter network can include server and client hosts from more than one vendor with each host running one of several supported operating systems. The roles described in the following table are not restricted to one host on the Teamcenter network. A host often performs more than one of these roles. A role can be performed by more than one host in the network. Network node Database server Role Database service node that contains an installation of RDBMS software and services queries from several Teamcenter servers. For large-scale installations, the database server is typically a dedicated high-performance server system that is optimized specifically for running database server software. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 2-1

38 Chapter 2 Site planning Network node Corporate server Role Teamcenter service node at the center of a Teamcenter network. The corporate server contains installations of the following Teamcenter components: The Teamcenter shared binary executables. This installation directory is referred to as the Teamcenter application root directory. The TC_ROOT environment variable points to this location. A Teamcenter application root directory can be NFS/CIFS-mounted to more than one application client. The Teamcenter shared data subdirectories and files. This installation directory is referred to as the Teamcenter data directory. The TC_DATA environment variable defines this location. Each data directory is associated with a single database instance, but multiple data directories can point to a single database instance. The data directory is exported with full write access and mounted via NFS/CIFS by other Teamcenter nodes. A minimum of one Teamcenter volume and File Management System (FMS). To install volumes on multiple hosts for the same database, install a server that points to the database and install FMS on any system that services a volume. The server manager process required when the Teamcenter network includes the Web tier. 1 The server manager starts and stops Teamcenter servers, informing a server assigner of its actions so that the assigner can assign available servers to user sessions. Web-tier application server Teamcenter clients Multiple application clients can map to or mount the corporate server. Teamcenter service node that contains an installation of the Teamcenter Web tier application deployed in a third-party application server. Hosts containing an installation of the Teamcenter rich client executables and connected to a Teamcenter corporate server or application server. Hosts accessing the Teamcenter thin client over the Web. 1. Teamcenter provides server managers based on the J2EE and the Microsoft.NET platforms. The.NET Web tier is supported only on Windows platforms. 2-2 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

39 Site planning The following table describes additional network nodes you can include in your network. Network node Multi-Site Collaboration ODS server Multi-Site Collaboration ODS proxy server Multi-Site Collaboration IDSM server Multi-Site Collaboration IDSM proxy server Role Network node that runs a daemon process to publish data objects within a Multi-Site Collaboration environment. Configuration of Multi-Site Collaboration is optional. Publication of a data object makes the object visible to other databases. At least one Teamcenter database on the network must be designated as an ODS database: this database stores publication records for the data objects. One ODS server node must be designated for each ODS database, and each server node can only act for one database. Network node running daemon processes that perform proxy services for ODS servers within a Multi-Site Collaboration environment. Configuration of Multi-Site Collaboration is optional. Typically, the proxy server node is connected between a firewall and the ODS server nodes. ODS requests originating from external sites go through the firewall directly into the proxy server node, which relays the ODS requests to the ODS servers. In this way, the proxy server protects the ODS servers from direct access from external sites. It also simplifies firewall management because the firewall manages only one TCP/IP port for all external ODS requests. Note A node can act both as an ODS proxy server and IDSM proxy server at the same time. Network node running a daemon process that transfers data objects among databases (sites) in a Multi-Site Collaboration environment. You must designate one IDSM server node for each Teamcenter database from which objects are published. Each server node can act only for one database. Network node running daemon processes that perform proxy services for IDSM servers. Typically, the IDSM proxy server node is connected between a firewall and the IDSM server nodes. IDSM requests originating from external sites go through the firewall directly into the proxy server node, which relays the IDSM requests to the IDSM servers. In this way, the proxy server protects the IDSM servers from direct access from external sites. It also simplifies firewall management because the firewall manages only one TCP/IP port for all external IDSM requests. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 2-3

40 Chapter 2 Site planning Network node Quick part locator (QPL) server Role Component of Repeatable Digital Validation (RDV). The QPL server provides a qpl daemon used with DesignContext. This daemon coexists with all other Teamcenter daemons. For QPL-based DesignContext, QPL server setup is required. For Appearance-based DesignContext, QPL server setup is not required. Installing Teamcenter components Your installation process depends on the network architecture and Teamcenter features you use. Two-tier architecture installation The primary components of a two-tier installation require three general installation tasks: 1. Install the database and database server using IBM DB2 or Oracle tools. For the installation procedures, see Database server installation. 2. Install Teamcenter executables and files, create and/or populate the database, and configure a volume using Teamcenter Environment Manager. For the installation procedures, see Teamcenter server installation. 3. Install the rich client on a client workstation using Teamcenter Environment Manager. For the installation procedures, see either the Installation on Windows Clients Guide or Installation on Linux Clients Guide. 2-4 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

41 Site planning Tier Rich Client Exe - portal Installed by TEM Implementation Repository Exe - start_imr 2 Teamcenter Server Exe - start_tcserver1 Teamcenter Files Installed at TC_ROOT Corporate server installation using Teamcenter Environment Manager. Database Server 1 Database Two-tier architecture installation Four-tier architecture installation A four-tier installation involves installation tasks for each tier: 1. Install the resource tier using the third-party database server software, either Oracle or MS SQL Server. Install the resource tier using the third-party database server software (IBM DB2 or Oracle). For the installation procedures, see Database server installation. 2. Install the enterprise tier using Teamcenter Environment Manager, being sure to choose the server manager component. Teamcenter Environment Manager installs the pool of Teamcenter servers and the server manager, creates and or populates the database, and configures a volume. 2 For the installation procedures, see Teamcenter server installation. 2. Teamcenter provides server managers based on the J2EE and the Microsoft.NET platforms. The.NET Web tier is supported only on Windows platforms. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 2-5

42 Chapter 2 Site planning 3. Generate the J2EE Web tier as an enterprise archive (EAR) file using the Web Application Manager and deploy the EAR file in a J2EE application server. Note The thin client is installed as part of the Web tier for access by clients. For the installation procedures, see J2EE Web tier installation. 4. Install a third-party application server and deploy the Teamcenter EAR file. 5. If you are deploying the rich client, deploy the Over-the-Web Installer and configure a rich client for installation. For an overview, see Rich client installation. For the installation procedures, see Installing rich client Web applications. 6. Install the rich client on a client workstation using the Over-the-Web Installer. For the installation procedures, see either the Installation on Windows Clients Guide or Installation on Linux Clients Guide. Note The automatic logon feature is not supported in four-tier Teamcenter deployments. For more information about the automatic logon feature, see the Preferences and Environment Variables Reference. 2-6 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

43 Site planning 6 5 Thin Client Exe - Uses - Installed as part of the Web tier. 4-Tier Rich Client Exe - portal starts otwportal Uses - Installed on Client Host Over the Web 4 3 Third-Party Application Server tc.ear EAR File Generated Using Web Application Manager (insweb) Deployed in Third-Party Application Server Software Port number used by clients TC Server n+2 Exe - tcserver TC Server n+1 Exe - tcserver Teamcenter Servers and Server Manager installed using Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM) 2 TC Server n Exe - tcserver Starts server processes for multiple users. Server Manager Exe - mgrstart Uses - tc_root tc_data 1 Database Database Server Four-tier architecture installation PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 2-7

44 Chapter 2 Site planning Rich client installation The Teamcenter rich client is a Java application that runs on client hosts. The two-tier rich client is installed on each client host using a stand-alone instance of Teamcenter Environment Manager. The four-tier rich client is installed using a distributed instance of the Over-the-Web Installer. To install the two-tier rich client, you launch Teamcenter Environment Manager on your client host, select the client components you want to install, and then proceed with installation. To install the four-tier rich client, you use a Web browser open the URL of a Web application server that serves the Over-the-Web Installer. The four-tier rich client installs silently, with no prompts. Teamcenter administrators configure all installation options and provide all the information necessary to complete installation using Web Application Manager. To enable over-the-web installation for the four-tier rich client, you install the following components on a server host. A rich client distribution server. The distribution server software manages the connection between a rich client distribution instance and the Over-the-Web Installer. The Over-the-Web Installer contacts the distribution server for the rich client files to download to the user s workstation. Only one rich client distribution server is required to manage multiple rich client distribution instances. A rich client distribution instance or instances. A rich client distribution instance contains the Over-the-Web Installer and the rich client software to be installed on user workstations. To enable different users to install different configurations of rich client software, you must create a distribution instance for each unique configuration. A third-party Web server. You deploy rich client distribution instances in a third-party Web application server. After you install and deploy a rich client distribution server and distribution instances, you can change the distribution server contents, add components to a distribution instance, and patch components in a distribution instance using Web Application Manager. The next time users start a rich client installed from that distribution instance, the rich client startup process checks for updates and downloads them to the client hosts. 2-8 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

45 Site planning Open Web page Created by Web application manager using 'Distribution Server' instance otw.html otw_installer.jar installing.html Uses - instance = "web application name" server_name = "hostname:rmi port" Example - instance = "Teamcenter 2 Tier OTW server_name = "hostname:12001" Check that client installed is current and install or update. Distribution Server Exe - start_server Uses - webapps.dat Created by Web application manager using 'Distribution Server' RMI Exe - start_rmi Rich client installation When configuring a rich client distribution instance (for a four-tier rich client) or a local rich client instance (for a two-tier rich client), you can add the functionality to the rich client, such as the following features: Teamcenter Integration for NX or NX Integration When you choose this option, the rich client is enabled to use NX with Teamcenter. Users must separately install NX executable files on the client hosts. All client hosts installing from a particular distribution instance must have NX installed in the same location. Note Configuring Teamcenter Integration for NX requires additional manual steps to be performed by the user as prompted by the Over-the-Web Installer. Teamcenter lifecycle visualization (embedded viewer) When you choose this option, Teamcenter lifecycle visualization executable files are included in the distribution instance. Teamcenter lifecycle visualization (stand-alone application viewer) PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 2-9

46 Chapter 2 Site planning When you choose this option, the rich client is enabled to launch Teamcenter lifecycle visualization. Users must independently install Teamcenter lifecycle visualization executable files on the client hosts. All client hosts installing a distribution instance must have Teamcenter lifecycle visualization installed in the same location. Note The Teamcenter lifecycle visualization integration requires the presentation tier application, a component of the four-tier architecture. To enable Teamcenter lifecycle visualization for a two-tier rich client, you can connect the two-tier rich client either to a deployment of the Web tier or to a deployment of the presentation tier application. Teamcenter Automotive Edition GM Overlay When you choose this option, the Teamcenter Automotive Edition GM Overlay executable files are included in the distribution instance. Remote workflow When you choose this option, the rich client is enabled to support the linking of objects between Teamcenter and other applications such as Teamcenter portfolio, program and project management. Separate installation of remote workflow components and Teamcenter Application Registry are required. Teamcenter EDA When you choose this option, the rich client is configured for use with Teamcenter EDA. SCM ClearCase When you choose this option, the executable files are included in the distribution instance for the integration between Teamcenter and the IBM Rational ClearCase software configuration management (SCM) tool. For a complete list of available Teamcenter features for the rich client, see Solutions and features reference. For information about creating, deploying, and updating the rich client distribution server and rich client distribution instances, see Installing rich client Web applications. Instructions for installing the rich client over the Web on a client host are in the Installation on Linux Clients Guide and the Installation on Windows Clients Guide. Thin client installation The Teamcenter thin client is a Web browser-based application. You install the thin client as part of the Web tier application. To install the Web tier, you use the Web Application Manager to create and install an enterprise archive (EAR) file that you then deploy in a third-party application server on the Web tier host. Users access the thin client from the Web tier host using a third-party Web browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer, Mozilla Firefox, and Safari. No aspect of the thin client is installed on a user workstation other than the required third-party Web browser Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

47 Site planning File Management System installation File Management System (FMS) downloads and uploads file data for the rich client, embedded viewer, and the thin client configured with Lifecycle Visualization. Multi-Site Collaboration also uses FMS servers to transfer data. Note If you install File Management System, the FMS server cache (FSC) and the server manager must run on the same host server, with the same user ID. If the FSC does not manage any volumes, that is, if it is purely a cache server, it can run as any user that is convenient. Installing File Management System FMS provides the following functions: Volume server for file management Shared server-level performance cache for shared data access between multiple users Client-based private user cache for rich clients Transient data store mechanism for transporting reports, PLM XML, and other nonvolume data between the Web and client tiers in the four-tier architecture FMS caching enables placing the data close to the user, while maintaining a central file volume and database store. FMS requires the installation of FMS server cache (FSC) and FMS client cache (FCC) components: The FSC component provides a server process and file caches for Teamcenter server hosts. The FCC component provides a client process and file caches for rich clients on user workstations. Rich Client FCC LAN SYSTEMS Vol 1 Rich Client FCC TC Server FSC Server Vol 2 Visualization Client FCC Vol 3 Basic File Management System deployment PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 2-11

48 Chapter 2 Site planning Installing the FMS server cache You can configure the FMS server cache (FSC) server to perform any combination of the following functions: Volume server or performance cache server When running on a host where a volume is located or directly mounted on the computer hosting the FSC, the FSC acts as a volume server. When running on a host where a volume is not located or directly mounted, the FSC acts as a performance cache server. As a volume or cache server, the FSC checks all file access requests for a ticket that Teamcenter generates to authorize file access. As a cache server, it manages two segment caches, one for downloading files and one for uploading files. Configuration server As a configuration server, the FSC provides FMS configuration information to the FMS client caches and other FSCs. Transient server (in a deployment of the four-tier architecture only) As a transient server, the FSC delivers PLM XML and other transient files to clients. Any deployment of Teamcenter requires a minimum of one FSC server. You can deploy multiple FSC servers, each performing a multiple roles or each performing a designated purpose as either a volume, a cache, or a configuration server. When you install multiple volumes on different hosts for the same database, the multiple FSC servers are linked through a common master FSC. (You can manually configure more than one master FSC.) You must install an FSC server on: Each host running a Teamcenter server manager. Each host that will contain a Teamcenter volume. FSC servers and caches are configured using XML-based files, in a hierarchical structure: FMS master configuration file (fmsmaster_fsc_id.xml) The master configuration file describes the File Management System network and defines FSC groups. It is the highest file in the hierarchy and can define default values for FSCs and FCCs, such as the maximum sizes of the caches. Each installation of Teamcenter requires one FMS master configuration file. At least one FSC server reads this file and is called the master FSC. Other FSC servers in the network download FMS configuration information from the master FSC server. If you install only one FSC server in a Teamcenter network, it is the master. FSC configuration file (fscfsc_id.xml) The FSC configuration file configures an individual FSC in a network. It specifies the address of the master FSC (for downloading FMS network information) and 2-12 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

49 Site planning defines such values as the maximum sizes of the server segment file caches and the upload timeout value. This file can either inherit values from the master file or override them. It can also define default values for FCCs. The FCC configuration file defines values for the FCC on client hosts, such as the maximum sizes of the caches. It can either inherit values from the FSC configuration file or override them. The Teamcenter installation program, Teamcenter Environment Manager, installs and initially configures the FSC servers, segment file caches, master configuration file, and FSC configuration file or files. For small deployments of Teamcenter, this may be the only installation and configuration required. For large deployments, you can take advantage of FMS flexibility by manually configuring the FMS network. For detailed information, see the System Administration Guide. Installing the FMS client cache The FMS client cache (FCC) process runs on a client host and performs the following functions: Uploads files to an FSC server Requests files from an FSC server Caches files on the client host The FCC process manages three file caches: A write cache containing whole files uploaded to a Teamcenter volume A read cache containing whole files downloaded from a Teamcenter volume A segment cache for Teamcenter lifecycle visualization Installation of the FCC depends on whether the client workstation hosts the rich client or thin client: The rich client requires an FCC, and the Over-the-Web Installer automatically installs an FCC with each rich client. The rich client uploads files to the Teamcenter volume and downloads files from the Teamcenter volume using the FCC. If Teamcenter lifecycle visualization 6.0 or later is installed on the workstation and used with the rich client, it optionally uses the FCC. When you create the rich client instance to be installed on user workstations, you configure the location of the cache on the workstation and the maximum size of files downloaded from the volume or uploaded to the volume. Installing the rich client instance on a workstation simultaneously installs the FCC process and caches. No additional configuration steps are required. For information on configuring the FCC while creating the rich client instance, see Installing rich client Web applications. Configuring the FCC this way may be the only configuration you require, but you can take advantage of PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 2-13

50 Chapter 2 Site planning additional configuration options by manually configuring the FCC. For manual configuration information, see the System Administration Guide. The thin client does not use the FCC. Workstations that access the thin client do not require its installation. However, if you install the FCC, Teamcenter lifecycle visualization 6.0 and NX use it to upload files to and download files from the Teamcenter volume. Installing the FCC enables users to take advantage of FMS features: o Improved file transfer performance FMS is a high-performance file transfer solution that gives client applications direct access to files over a high-performance network connection. o o o File streaming Teamcenter lifecycle visualization uses proprietary file streaming technology to download appropriate portions of the JT files over the network as they are needed. FMS supports segment file transfer to keep network loads down and support this high-performance file streaming technology. Built-in caching infrastructure The FCC is dedicated to a specific user on the client. The FSC server can be shared by groups of users. Deployment flexibility FMS components support a multitude of deployment configurations. This enables administrators to geographically locate volumes and shared FSC servers close to client workstations, providing the ability to tune the system for optimal file transfer performance. For information on installing an FCC for use with the thin client and Teamcenter lifecycle visualization, see the appropriate Teamcenter client installation guide (for Windows, Linux, or Macintosh). Creating volumes Using Teamcenter Environment Manager installation program, you create two types of Teamcenter volumes: Standard volumes Standard volumes are UNIX directories Teamcenter uses to store files managed by Teamcenter. Users cannot directly access the files in these volumes; they must do so via a Teamcenter session. One standard Teamcenter volume is required per database. You can optionally create multiple volumes for a database. You create a standard volume when installing Teamcenter and populating a Teamcenter database. Volumes require the installation of File Management System (FMS). FMS provides the volume services after the volume is created. Transient volumes A transient volume is a UNIX directory that Teamcenter uses to store temporary data for transport of reports, PLM XML, and other data between the Web tier 2-14 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

51 Site planning and client tier in a deployment of the four-tier architecture. One transient volume is required per Teamcenter server host. You can create a transient volume directory on a server host when installing Teamcenter and populating a Teamcenter database (the installation program adds the definition to the fmsmaster_fsc_id.xml configuration file). For examples of manually configuring transient volumes that cannot be accomplished using the installation program, see the Preferences and Environment Variables Reference. Note Teamcenter uses transient volumes only in a deployment of the four-tier architecture. For a deployment of the two-tier architecture, Teamcenter stores this data into a temporary directory on the rich client host, rather than in a defined transient volume. The temporary directory is defined either by the start_server script or by the Transient_Volume_RootDir on the client host. Teamcenter administrators can also create volumes using the rich client Organization application. For information about creating volumes after installation of Teamcenter, see the Organization Guide. Lifecycle Visualization installation For enterprise-wide product visualization capability, you can install Teamcenter lifecycle visualization and add a Lifecycle Visualization viewer to your Teamcenter configuration. Siemens PLM Software provides two Lifecycle Visualization viewers for use with Teamcenter: Lifecycle Visualization embedded viewer (rich client only) The Lifecycle Visualization embedded viewer is embedded in the rich client user interface. The embedded viewer provides full 2D visualization capabilities and 3D viewing and is available to all Teamcenter users. The embedded viewer is installed on user workstations over the Web as part of a rich client distribution instance. The license level is configured as part of the rich client distribution image. All users installing a rich client distribution image that includes Lifecycle Visualization must have administration privileges on the workstation. Lifecycle Visualization stand-alone application viewer (rich client and thin client) The Lifecycle Visualization stand-alone application viewer is launched from either the Teamcenter rich client user interface or the thin client user interface. Users can also run it as a stand-alone application. The suite includes the embedded viewer and Teamcenter lifecycle visualization mockup. The stand-alone application viewer is individually installed on each client workstation using the Teamcenter lifecycle visualization distribution images. The rich client distribution instance can be configured with the information required to enable the rich client to integrate with Lifecycle Visualization applications already installed on client workstations. Lifecycle Visualization uses Teamcenter client communication system (TCCS). PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 2-15

52 Chapter 2 Site planning If your Teamcenter configuration includes a rich client and a Lifecycle Visualization viewer, Lifecycle Visualization uses Teamcenter volumes and FMS, including the FMS server cache (FSC) and FMS client cache (FCC). (FCC is a component of TCCS.) When installed as a stand-alone application, Lifecycle Visualization can use Teamcenter volumes and FMS if you install TCCS on the client host. When configured with the thin client, Lifecycle Visualization uses Teamcenter volumes and the FSC if you install TCCS. For information about installing TCCS, see the appropriate Teamcenter client installation guide (for Windows, Linux, or Macintosh). For information about installing Lifecycle Visualization, see the Teamcenter lifecycle visualization Installation Guide in the Lifecycle Visualization online help library. For information about installing Lifecycle Visualization viewers provided with Teamcenter, see Teamcenter features and Rich client solutions and Teamcenter Environment Manager Help. For information about patching Lifecycle Visualization viewers provided with Teamcenter, see Patch Lifecycle Visualization. Note You can configure both Lifecycle Visualization viewers for use with a rich client. If you configure both products, you must install the embedded viewer in a separate directory from the stand-alone application viewer. The embedded viewer and the stand-alone application viewer require separate license files. Global Services installation Global Services provides the additional components that enable a Teamcenter site to exchange BOM data with a Teamcenter Enterprise site: The Teamcenter connector extracts BOM data from Teamcenter. The Teamcenter Enterprise Connector extracts BOM data from Teamcenter Enterprise. To enable users to exchange data between Teamcenter and Teamcenter Enterprise, you must install and configure Global Services, the Teamcenter and Teamcenter Enterprise connectors. Global Services is available in the Web_tier/tcgs directory on the Teamcenter software distribution image. For installation information, see Install Global Services. Remote workflow installation Remote workflow enables users to create links between Teamcenter objects and objects in Teamcenter portfolio, program and project management. Users can launch the linked Teamcenter product from within the Teamcenter rich client. Security Services installation Security Services eliminates the need for multiple authentication challenges as users move from one Teamcenter application to another. Authentication is performed by an external identity service provider, such as lightweight directory access protocol (LDAP) Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

53 Site planning Security Services is an optional feature and is installed separately from Teamcenter. Installation and initial configuration involve the following steps: 1. Install Security Services, noting the following information for configuring Teamcenter: Application ID for this instance of Teamcenter in the Security Services application registry Complete URL of the Security Services Login Service Web application Complete URL of the Security Services Identity Service Web application For more information, see the Security Services Installation/Customization manual provided in PDF format on the Teamcenter documentation distribution image. 2. If you are deploying the two-tier architecture: a. Install Security Services on the Teamcenter corporate server, specifying the Teamcenter application ID and the URLs of the Security Services Login Service Web and Identity Service Web applications as determined in step 1. For information, see Teamcenter server installation. b. Create a two-tier Teamcenter rich client distribution instance, configuring Security Services for the client by specifying the same Teamcenter application ID, Security Services Login Service URL, and Identity Service Web URL as specified when configuring Security Services on the corporate server. For information, see Install rich client distribution instances. 3. If you are deploying the four-tier architecture: a. Configure the Web tier application to enable Security Services, specifying the Teamcenter application ID and the URLs of the Security Services Login Service and Identity Service Web applications as determined in step 1. When you configure the Web tier application to enable Security Services, the Teamcenter thin client is automatically configured to use Security Services. For information, see J2EE Web tier installation. b. If you are deploying the Teamcenter rich client, create a four-tier rich client distribution instance, configuring Security Services for the client by specifying the same Teamcenter application ID, Security Services logon Service URL, and Identity Service Web URL as specified when configuring Security Services for the Web tier. For information, see Install rich client distribution instances. Teamcenter online help installation You can install Teamcenter online help on a Web server or in a directory on a network file system to provide online help to Teamcenter rich client and thin client hosts. For more information, see Installing Teamcenter online help. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 2-17

54 Chapter 2 Site planning Other considerations Certain issues regarding distribution of database and license servers can affect planning of your Teamcenter network. Oracle server considerations Determine whether to create a new Oracle database and/or upgrade existing Oracle databases. You must install Oracle Server if a certified version is not installed on the system. For certified versions of Oracle, see the Siemens PLM Software Certification Database: certification/teamcenter.shtml You must also: Identify the systems to be Oracle database servers. Usually, such systems are dedicated high-capacity servers, specifically tuned for Oracle. An Oracle database server must be directly accessible on the network by each workstation running Teamcenter. Install Oracle on each database server or NFS-mount Oracle to each database server. Create databases locally on servers. You can install Oracle from either of the following sources: Oracle CD-ROM supplied by Siemens PLM Software Oracle CD-ROM supplied by Oracle Corporation You must create a database instance if one does not exist or if an additional database instance is required (for example, to support testing, training, or RDV). If you are installing RDV services, Siemens PLM Software recommends strongly that you create a new database instance on an Oracle server with database partitions on a separate disk drive. RDV requires extensive data warehousing with large uploads and simple queries. Such a configuration also makes the fine-tuning of the database easier. For information about installing Oracle Server, creating Oracle database instances, and upgrading Oracle databases, see Oracle installation and configuration. Note QPL and a separate RDV database are not required if you use cacheless search. Network environment considerations You can implement Teamcenter in a homogeneous network environment or a heterogeneous network environment. Homogeneous network environment In a homogeneous environment, all hosts run the same platform, for example, a corporate server, Web tier, and Teamcenter clients all running on Microsoft Windows or all running on SUSE Linux Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

55 Site planning When deploying the two-tier architecture, you can install Teamcenter application executable files on a single application server host, export the Teamcenter application root directory structure from the Teamcenter application server, and mount it using NFS on client workstations to run Teamcenter locally. Typically, the Teamcenter application server is also the Teamcenter data server. Similarly, you can export the data directory structure and mount it using NFS to other Teamcenter clients to provide access to the database-specific information. Heterogeneous network environment In a heterogeneous environment, hosts do not all run the same platform, for example, a corporate server may run on a UNIX host, a Web application server on a Linux host, and workstations on Microsoft Windows. Installation considerations for a heterogeneous environment are the same as for a homogeneous environment, except that you must install Teamcenter for each type of workstation on the network, resulting in a Teamcenter application directory structure for each different type of workstation. You can configure one Teamcenter application server to serve many Teamcenter directory structures for different platforms. Teamcenter volume data must be accessible by all Teamcenter clients in a heterogeneous network. Configure File Management System for volume access for all clients. For more information, see File Management System installation. Make sure your Windows and UNIX server configurations contain identical sets of Teamcenter features. For example, if you install features or custom templates on a UNIX server, you must install the same features and templates on your Windows server. Note The Teamcenter root directory is platform-specific. The files within it can be shared only between systems of the same platform type. For heterogeneous Teamcenter environments that include Windows clients or Windows volume servers, configure File Management System to allow all clients to communicate with all volume servers. The Teamcenter root directory is specific to Windows or UNIX systems (endian-specific). Maintain separate Teamcenter data directories on Windows and UNIX systems. Teamcenter servers and two-tier rich clients on UNIX or Linux hosts cannot connect to Microsoft SQL Server database servers. Keep this in mind when planning database access in a heterogeneous network. Required operating system and user accounts Teamcenter uses the following user accounts for installation and maintenance: Operating system logon account You must create a logon account for the operating system before installation. This account can have any name. This account does not represent a person: it is a responsibility logon. log on with this account name to install or upgrade Teamcenter or install patches. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 2-19

56 Chapter 2 Site planning Teamcenter administrative user account Teamcenter requires an administrative user account named infodba. Teamcenter Environment Manager automatically creates this account when you install Teamcenter on a server host. This account is used by the Teamcenter administrator to access the Teamcenter system administration functions to perform setup and maintenance tasks, such as creating Teamcenter users and logons. When you are populating a database during installation, you must use a password of infodba for this account. After installation, change the infodba password immediately. Caution o Never use the infodba user to create working data or initiate workflow processes. This user ID has special behavior in the system: using it to create data or initiate workflow processes can cause unpredictable and undesirable behaviors. If you require a user with high-level privileges to create data, create a new user ID and add that user to the DBA group and other groups as appropriate. The infodba user is to be used only for the specific tasks and activities described in the technical documentation for administrators. o Make sure the password does not contain space characters or any of the following $ % " : ;. < > ( ) { } In addition, Teamcenter requires a database user to be the owner of Teamcenter-created tables and to perform tasks required by Teamcenter. You create this database user either using the templates provided for Oracle databases or using Teamcenter Environment Manager to install Teamcenter and populate a database. Teamcenter Environment Manager refers to this user as DB user. Note If Oracle and Teamcenter applications or files are shared using NFS/CIFS, you must standardize the user and group IDs of the Teamcenter and Oracle accounts to give them the same access privileges on all systems. Each user and group is identified by an alphanumeric name and an ID number. The ID number is retained with the file information when a file is exported across a network. If the ID numbers do not match for a user or group, file access privileges may be unintentionally granted to the wrong user, or not granted at all, on an NFS/CIFS client Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

57 Part II Database server installation Install and configure a supported relational database management system (RDBMS) for storing Teamcenter data. IBM DB2 installation and configuration Oracle installation and configuration PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide

58

59 Chapter 3 IBM DB2 installation and configuration IBM DB2 installation and configuration Install IBM DB Install the DB2 server Register the DB2 server license Set DB2 profile variables for Teamcenter Create a DB2 sample database Create a sample database using default sample tables Create a sample database using your own parameters and tables Verify connectivity with the sample database Creating a DB2 database for Teamcenter Create a DB2 database for Teamcenter Create a DB2 Teamcenter database Create a DB2 Teamcenter database user Set DB2 database configuration parameters Archive DB2 database log files PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide

60

61 Chapter 3 IBM DB2 installation and configuration IBM DB2 installation and configuration Install IBM DB2, verify installation and connectivity with a sample database, and then configure a database for Teamcenter. Before you begin installing DB2, make sure your host meets or exceeds the system software and hardware requirements for DB2 servers and IBM data server clients for your platform: For information about the IBM DB2 versions that Siemens PLM Software certifies for use with Teamcenter, see the Siemens PLM Software Certification Database: certification/teamcenter.shtml Note If your Teamcenter database server is IBM DB2, all Teamcenter servers and two-tier rich clients in your network must run operating systems supported for Teamcenter with IBM DB2. IBM DB2 databases are supported only with Teamcenter servers running on Microsoft Windows, IBM AIX, or SUSE Linux platforms. After you prepare your DB2 server host, install a Teamcenter-supported version of IBM DB2. Note For more information about installing and using DB2 software, including the DB2 Control Center, see the IBM DB2 Information Center: Install IBM DB2 Install the DB2 server and configure it for Teamcenter. Install the DB2 server 1. Create the following groups and users for DB2: Groups: db2insgp, db2fengp, db2dasgp PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 3-1

62 Chapter 3 IBM DB2 installation and configuration Users: db2inst1, db2fenc1, db2das1 DB2 uses the operating system s native user authentication. Note User names and group names must not exceed 8 characters. 2. Prepare the software installation media: If you use an IBM DB2 software CD or DVD, insert the disc and mount if necessary. If you use downloaded images, download the appropriate DB2 image for your platform from an IBM partner site such as the following: Extract the image to an authorized directory on the Linux/UNIX file system. Note The IBM DB2 server can be installed from the root user account or a nonroot user account. Root installation offers full functionality of the DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows (LUW) edition. Root installation also permits multiple versions of the DB2 server to be installed on the same host, where nonroot installation allows only one instance, image, and version on a single system. 3. Change to the directory in which you extracted the DB2 installation image. 4. In the IBM DB2 installation image, launch the db2set shell script to launch the IBM DB2 installation program. 5. In the DB2 Setup Launchpad dialog box, click Install a Product. 6. Under DB2 Enterprise Server Edition Version version, click Install New. This launches the DB2 Setup - DB2 Enterprise Server Edition installation wizard. 7. Proceed to the Software License Agreement dialog box. After you accept the license terms, click Next. 8. In the Select the installation type dialog box, select the type of installation you want to perform. The Typical option is sufficient for the Teamcenter server s needs. 9. In the Select the installation, response file creation, or both dialog box, select the appropriate option. If you do not want to save your installation settings in a response file, select the first option in the list (Install DB2 Enterprise Server Edition on this computer). 10. In the Select the installation folder dialog box, enter an installation directory or accept the default directory shown. 11. In the Set the DB2 copy name dialog box, accept the default value for DB2 copy name and make sure Set this as the default DB2 copy on my computer is selected. 3-2 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

63 IBM DB2 installation and configuration 12. In the Set up a DB2 instance dialog box, click Create the default DB2 instance. 13. In the Set up partitioning options for the default DB2 instance dialog box, click Single partition instance. 14. In the Configure DB2 instances dialog box, accept the existing values shown. 15. In the Set user information for the default DB2 instance dialog box, type and confirm the password for the database user account. Accept the default database user name shown. If multiple domains are available, select the appropriate domain in the Domain list. Otherwise, accept the default setting. Make sure Use the same user name and password for the remaining DB2 instances is selected. 16. In the Prepare the DB2 tools catalog dialog box, clear the Prepare the DB2 tools catalog check box. 17. In the Set up notifications dialog box, clear the Set up your DB2 server to send notifications check box. 18. In the Enable operating system security for DB2 objects dialog box, accept the default values shown. If multiple domains are available, select the appropriate domain for the DB2 users group. Otherwise, accept the default setting. 19. In the Start copying files dialog box, click Install to begin installing the DB2 server. 20. When the DB2 installation program displays the Setup is complete dialog box, click Next. 21. In the Install additional products dialog box, click Finish. Register the DB2 server license 1. Register your DB2 license key by typing the following command: DB2 home/sqllib/adm/db2licm a license-file Replace DB2-home with the home directory of the DB2 instance owner. Replace license-file with the path to your DB2 license file. The default license file is DB2-image/db2/license/db2ese.lic. Replace DB2-image with the path to your IBM DB2 installation media. 2. To verify the license registration, enter the following command: db2licm l Set DB2 profile variables for Teamcenter 1. Change to the sqllib/adm directory and type the following command: db2set DB2_SNAPSHOT_NOAUTH=on PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 3-3

64 Chapter 3 IBM DB2 installation and configuration Note This command is necessary to enable TEM to install Teamcenter with a DB2 database. 2. Restart the DB2 server. For more information, see the System Administration Guide. Create a DB2 sample database To verify the installation of the DB2 server, create a sample database you can use to verify database connectivity. Note The sample database is for testing and verification only. It cannot be used by Teamcenter. Using the DB2 First Steps application, create the sample database by one of the following methods: Using default sample tables Using your own parameters and tables Create a sample database using default sample tables 1. Launch the DB2 First Steps application: Note db2fs The DB2 First Steps application requires a Web browser. Make sure a Teamcenter-supported version of Mozilla Firefox or Microsoft Internet Explorer is installed on the DB2 server host. 2. In the DB2 First Steps application, in the options on the left side, click Database Creation. 3. In the Database Creation dialog box, click Create SAMPLE Database. This launches the Create SAMPLE Database wizard. 4. In the Create SAMPLE Database dialog box, click SQL objects and data only. (This is the default option.) Click OK. The wizard creates the sample database. 5. When database creation is complete, click OK to close the wizard. Create a sample database using your own parameters and tables 1. In the DB2 First Steps application, in the options on the left side, click Database Creation. 2. In the Database Creation dialog box, click Create your own Database. This launches the Create Your Own Database wizard. 3-4 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

65 IBM DB2 installation and configuration 3. In the Specify a name for your new database dialog box, click option. 4. In the Specify where to store your data dialog box, enter one or more storage paths for the database, or accept the default location shown. 5. In the Select your maintenance strategy dialog box, choose whether you want to specify a time period for database maintenance. This is optional and does not directly affect Teamcenter operation. 6. In the Provide a valid SMTP server dialog box, click Next. No options in this dialog box are required for Teamcenter. 7. In the Review the actions that will take place when you click Finish dialog box, click Finish. The wizard creates the database. Verify connectivity with the sample database 1. In the DB2 First Steps application, click Database Administration, and then click Basic administration tasks. 2. In the Basic administration tasks dialog window, click Start DB2 Control Center. This launches the DB2 Control Center. 3. When the Control Center prompts you to choose a view, click Advanced. 4. In the Control Center tree (under Object View), expand All Databases. 5. In the All Databases branch, expand SAMPLE. If DB2 displays database objects, access to the database is verified. 6. Close the DB2 Control Center. 7. Close the DB2 First Steps application. After you verify DB2 database connectivity, you can remove the sample database to free disk space. However, if you use the sample applications, keep the sample database. Creating a DB2 database for Teamcenter Create a DB2 database for Teamcenter Before you install the Teamcenter server, create a DB2 database for Teamcenter using the CREATE DB command. Create a DB2 Teamcenter database 1. Open a DB2 command prompt: db2cmd PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 3-5

66 Chapter 3 IBM DB2 installation and configuration 2. Launch the DB2 command line tool: db2 3. Start the DB2 server: start database manager 4. Exit the command line tool: quit 5. Enter the following command to create a database: CREATE DB db-name AUTOMATIC STORAGE YES ON path USING CODESET UTF-8 TERRITORY US PAGESIZE 32 K Replace db-name with the name or alias of the database to be created. Replace path with the path or drive on which to create the database. This is also the storage path or drive associated with the database. For example: CREATE DB tcdb2 AUTOMATIC STORAGE YES ON D: USING CODESET UTF-8 TERRITORY US PAGESIZE 32 K Create a DB2 Teamcenter database user DB2 uses the underlying operating system security to manage user IDs and passwords. The Teamcenter database user and password must be established at the operating system level. For information about creating a DB2 user, see the DB2 documentation from IBM. Set DB2 database configuration parameters Optionally, set DB2 database configuration parameters for Teamcenter. Siemens PLM Software recommends setting the following parameters for each database in the instance on which you run your Teamcenter application. For other parameters, accept the default settings. Parameter Description Value STMTHEAP Statement heap APPLHEAPSZ Default application heap LOGBUFSZ Log buffer size 512 LOGPRIMARY Number of primary log files 20 LOGSECOND Number of secondary log files 5 LOGFILSIZ Log file size 4096 UTIL_HEAP_SZ Maximum memory for utilities Database configuration parameters can be set using the DB2 Control Center or the update database configuration command in the DB2 command line processor. For example: UPDATE DB CFG FOR db-name USING STMTHEAP Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

67 IBM DB2 installation and configuration After you change database configuration parameters, enter a DB2 TERMINATE command to ensure the changes take effect. For more information on modifying configuration parameters, see the IBM DB2 technical documentation. Archive DB2 database log files Optionally, you may archive DB2 database log files by setting the LOGRETAIN and USEREXIT database parameters. The LOGRETAIN database parameter is not enabled by default, and its behavior is affected by the value of the USEREXIT parameter. Set USEREXIT to one of the following values: ON OFF Enables the user exit program to archive log files when they are full, and also to retrieve log files when roll forward operations are used to restore a database. Disables archiving via the user exit program. Set LOGRETAIN to one of the following values: NO RECOVERY Specifies log files are not retained. The database manager deletes log files in the log path directory and creates new log files. If USEREXIT is set to OFF, you can perform only backup (restore) recovery, not roll forward recovery. This may affect your data recovery process for your production environment database. The default value is NO. Specifies all log files are kept on the system for the database administrator to archive or delete. Make sure your database administrator reviews the settings for the LOGRETAIN and USEREXIT parameters. For more information about these parameters, see the IBM documentation. After you complete configuring your database, you can install a Teamcenter server using Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM). During installation, TEM creates database objects and populates Teamcenter data. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 3-7

68

69 Chapter 4 Oracle installation and configuration Preparing the Oracle server Set shell limits and parameters Overview of shell limits and parameters Set AIX shell limits Set AIX system parameters Set AIX kernel parameters Set HP-UX kernel parameters Set Solaris kernel parameters Set SUSE Linux shell limits Upgrade an Oracle server and database Export an Oracle database Terminate Oracle sessions Back up an Oracle installation Upgrading the Oracle server Upgrade using the Oracle installer Upgrade by uninstalling/reinstalling Oracle Install Oracle server Configure Oracle software Configure Oracle Net Configure Oracle server Create an Oracle database PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide

70

71 Chapter 4 Oracle installation and configuration Preparing the Oracle server Your Oracle database server must be a version certified for Teamcenter For information about the Oracle versions that Siemens PLM Software certifies for use with Teamcenter 10.1, Oracle disk space requirements, and operating system and service patch requirements, see the Siemens PLM Software Certification Database: certification/teamcenter.shtml Perform the following tasks to prepare an Oracle database server and configure an Oracle database for Teamcenter: 1. Choose a name for the Teamcenter user account. Teamcenter uses this account as the owner of all Teamcenter-created tables. This account is used by the database administrator to perform tasks required by Teamcenter. Tip If you use the Siemens PLM Software-supplied templates to create the Teamcenter database, the name and password of the account is infodba. 2. Set shell limits and parameters on the Oracle server host. For more information, see Set shell limits and parameters. 3. If you do not have a certified version of Oracle, install or upgrade Oracle: If you do not have an Oracle server installed, install a certified version of Oracle. For more information, see Install Oracle server. If you have an Oracle server installed, but it is not a version certified for Teamcenter 10.1, upgrade your Oracle server. For more information, see Upgrade an Oracle server and database. 4. Configure Oracle software for Teamcenter. For more information, see Configure Oracle software. 5. Create a database for Teamcenter. For more information, see Create an Oracle database. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 4-1

72 Chapter 4 Oracle installation and configuration Set shell limits and parameters Overview of shell limits and parameters Oracle RDBMS extensively uses UNIX resources such as shared memory, swap memory, and semaphore for interprocess communication. Insufficient parameter settings cause problems during installation and instance startup. The greater the amount of data stored in memory, the faster a database operates. In addition, by maintaining data in memory, the UNIX kernel reduces disk I/O activity. On all UNIX and Linux platforms supported for Teamcenter 10.1, set the process memory size (the ulimit user environment parameter) to unlimited before installing Oracle. To avoid errors during installation, or operation errors after installation, review kernel parameter settings to ensure that they meet the recommended Oracle settings described in the following sections. The recommended kernel parameter settings are for a typical Oracle database environment. If you previously tuned kernel parameters to levels that meet other application needs, continue to use those values. Initially, you can set kernel parameters as described in the Oracle documentation. For some operating systems, kernel parameters may need adjustment according to available system memory. The Oracle installation program issues warnings if kernel parameters do not meet minimum requirements. Note The recommended values are minimum values. For production database systems, Oracle recommends that you tune the values to optimize system performance. For more information, see the operating system documentation. Set AIX shell limits 1. Type the following command: # smit chuser 2. In the User NAME box, type the user name of the Oracle software owner, for example, oracle. 3. Scroll down the list and ensure that the values shown in the following table are set to the minimum values. Caution 4. Press F10 to exit. Do not change the shell limit values if they were set for another program and the values are greater than the levels Oracle requires. AIX shell limit Soft FILE size Soft CPU time Soft DATA segment Soft STACK size Minimum value 1 (unlimited) 1 (unlimited) This is the default value. 1 (unlimited) 1 (unlimited) 4-2 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

73 Oracle installation and configuration Set AIX system parameters 1. Type the following command: # smit chgsys 2. Ensure that the value shown for Maximum number of PROCESSES allowed per user is greater than or equal to Note For production systems, this value should be at least 128 plus the sum of the PROCESSES and PARALLEL_MAX_SERVERS initialization parameters for each database running on the system. 3. Press F10 to exit. Set AIX kernel parameters Siemens PLM Software recommends setting kernel parameters to meet or exceed the recommended Oracle settings. Set HP-UX kernel parameters Set kernel parameters as described in the following table. Set parameters using the method described in your HP-UX documentation. Caution Note Do not change the kernel parameter settings if the parameters were set for another program and the values are greater than the levels Oracle requires. You can view kernel parameters using the kctune command. HP-UX kernel parameter Minimum value or formula Purpose executable_stack 0 Defines whether program stacks are executable by default. ksi_alloc_max Defines the system-wide limit of queued signals that can be allocated. max_thread_proc 3000 Defines the maximum number of kernel threads allowed per process. You may need to increase the value if required by your application. Setting it to a default or low value may lead to an out of memory error for certain applications. maxdsiz Defines the maximum data segment size in bytes for 32-bit systems. Setting this value too low may cause the processes to run out of memory. maxdsiz_64bit Defines the maximum data segment size in bytes for 64-bit systems. Setting this value too low may cause the processes to run out of memory. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 4-3

74 Chapter 4 Oracle installation and configuration HP-UX kernel parameter Minimum value or formula Purpose maxssiz Defines the maximum stack segment size in bytes for 32-bit systems. maxssiz_64bit (1 GB) Defines the maximum stack segment size in bytes for 64-bit systems. maxswapchunks Defines the maximum number of swap chunks where SWCHUNK is the swap chunk size (1 KB blocks). SWCHUNK is 2048 by default. It specifies the maximum amount of configurable swap space on the system. Note This parameter does not exist in HP-UX or later. maxuprc ((nproc*9)/10) Defines the maximum number of user processes. msgmap (msgtql + 2) Defines the maximum number of message map entries. msgmni (nproc) Defines the number of message queue identifiers. msgseg Defines the number of segments available for messages. msgtql (nproc) Defines the number of message headers. ncsize (ninode ) Defines the directory name lookup cache (DNLC) space needed for inodes. nfile Defines the maximum number of open files. This parameter is managed automatically by the system. nflocks 4096 Defines the maximum number of file locks available on the system. This parameter is managed automatically by the system. ninode (8 * nproc ) Defines the maximum number of open inodes. nkthread (((nproc * 7) / 4) + 16) Defines the maximum number of kernel threads supported by the system. nproc 4200 Defines the maximum number of processes. semmap (semmni + 2) Defines the maximum number of semaphore map entries. Note This parameter does not exist in HP-UX or later. semmni 4200 Defines the maximum number of semaphore sets in the entire system. 4-4 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

75 Oracle installation and configuration HP-UX kernel parameter Minimum value or formula Purpose semmns (semmni * 2) Defines the maximum number of semaphores in the system. The default value of semmns is 128, which is, in most cases, too low for Oracle software. semmnu (nproc 4) Defines the number of semaphore undo structures. semvmx Defines the maximum value of a semaphore. shmmax Physical memory size Defines the maximum allowable size of one shared memory segment. To avoid performance degradation, the shmmax setting must be greater than or equal to the size of the SGA. shmmni 512 Defines the maximum number of shared memory segments in the entire system. shmseg 512 Defines the maximum number of shared memory segments one process can attach. vps_ceiling 64 Defines the maximum system-selected page size in kilobytes. Set Solaris kernel parameters On Solaris 9 or earlier, set kernel parameters to meet or exceed the recommended Oracle settings. Use the procedure provided in your Solaris documentation to set kernel parameters. On Solaris 10, set kernel parameters using the Solaris resource control facility. The following table describes Solaris 10 resource control values for a single database instance. Solaris 10 resource control process.max-sem-ids project.max-shm-memory project.max-shm-ids Description Oracle recommends setting this resource control to 100, but the Solaris default value (128) is adequate, so it is not necessary to change this setting. Defines the maximum shared memory (shm) for the Oracle server. Oracle recommends a value of 4 GB, but for Teamcenter servers, set this resource control to a value greater than the total SGA + PGA memory size of all instances on the system. Oracle recommends setting this resource control to 100, but the Solaris default value (200) is adequate, so it is not necessary to change this setting. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 4-5

76 Chapter 4 Oracle installation and configuration Set parameters for the project user.oracle account (oracle) instead of the project user.root recommended by Oracle documentation. To work with Solaris resource control, use the following CLI command: prtctl n control name i project user.oracle For example: sun2:(root)# prctl -n project.max-sem-ids -i project user.oracle project: 100: user.oracle NAME PRIVILEGE VALUE FLAG ACTION RECIPIENT project.max-sem-ids privileged deny - system 16.8M max deny - sun2:(root)# prctl -n project.max-shm-memory -i project user.oracle project: 100: user.oracle NAME PRIVILEGE VALUE FLAG ACTION RECIPIENT project.max-shm-memory privileged 3.92GB - deny - system 16.0EB max deny - sun2:(root)# prctl -n project.max-sem-ids -i project user.oracle project: 100: user.oracle NAME PRIVILEGE VALUE FLAG ACTION RECIPIENT project.max-sem-ids privileged deny - system 16.8M max deny Set SUSE Linux shell limits 1. Increase shell limits for the oracle user to the minimum values listed in the following table by adding the following lines to the /etc/security/limits.conf file: oracle soft nproc 2047 oracle hard nproc oracle soft nofile 1024 oracle hard nofile SUSE Linux shell limit Item in limits.conf Minimum hard limit Maximum number of open file descriptors nofile Maximum number of processes available to a single user nproc Caution Do not change the shell limit values if they were set for another program and the values are greater than the levels Oracle requires. 2. Add or edit the following line in the /etc/pam.d/login file: session required /lib/security/pam_limits.so 3. Change the oracle user default shell startup file: For the Bourne, Bash, or Korn shell, add the following lines to the /etc/profile.local file: if [ $USER = "oracle" ]; then if [ $SHELL = "/bin/ksh" ]; then ulimit -u ulimit -n else ulimit -u n fi 4-6 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

77 Oracle installation and configuration fi For the C shell (csh or tcsh), add the following lines to the /etc/csh.logon.local file: if ( $USER == "oracle" ) then limit maxproc limit descriptors endif Upgrade an Oracle server and database Export an Oracle database 1. Either log on to the Oracle server as oracle or switch the user to oracle: su - oracle 2. Set the PATH environment variable to include the Oracle bin directory: export PATH=$PATH:ORACLE_HOME/bin 3. Manually set the shared library path: IBM AIX: export LIBPATH=${LIBPATH}:${ORACLE_HOME}/lib Hewlett-Packard HP-UX: export SHLIB_PATH=${SHLIB_PATH}:${ORACLE_HOME}/lib Sun Solaris: export LD_LIBRARY_PATH=${LD_LIBRARY_PATH}:${ORACLE_HOME}/lib SUSE Linux: export LD_LIBRARY_PATH=${LD_LIBRARY_PATH}:${ORACLE_HOME}/lib 4. Export the contents of the Teamcenter Oracle database to the dump file: ORACLE_HOME/bin/exp db-user/password full=y file=file-name.dmp log=export.log Replace db-user with the Teamcenter database user account name; replace password with the database user account password; replace file-name with the name of the dump file to contain the exported data; replace export with the name of the log file to contain export output. 5. Store the dump file in a safe place. If you have multiple databases, repeat this procedure for each database. Caution Siemens PLM Software strongly recommends backing up the dump file on tape or another disk. If the dump file becomes corrupted or lost, all data from the existing database is lost. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 4-7

78 Chapter 4 Oracle installation and configuration Terminate Oracle sessions Before installing Oracle, you must terminate all Oracle sessions and Oracle processes. 1. Either log on to the Oracle server as oracle or switch the user to oracle as follows: su - oracle 2. Set the ORACLE_HOME environment variable to point to the location of the Oracle files. For example: export ORACLE_HOME=/u01/app/oracle/product/oracle-version Replace the path with the system path to the Oracle files. 3. Define ORACLE_HOME/bin in the PATH variable: export PATH=${PATH}:${ORACLE_HOME}/bin 4. Manually set the shared library path: IBM AIX: export LIBPATH=${LIBPATH}:${ORACLE_HOME}/lib Hewlett-Packard HP-UX: export SHLIB_PATH=${SHLIB_PATH}:${ORACLE_HOME}/lib Sun Solaris: export LD_LIBRARY_PATH=${LD_LIBRARY_PATH}:${ORACLE_HOME}/lib SUSE Linux: export LD_LIBRARY_PATH=${LD_LIBRARY_PATH}:${ORACLE_HOME}/lib 5. If a tnslsnr listener process is running, terminate it. For example: $ORACLE_HOME/bin/lsnrctl stop listener-name Replace listener-name with the name of the listener process. 6. Shut down all Oracle database instances using the dbshut utility. Shut down database instances listed in the oratab file: $ORACLE_HOME/bin/dbshut Back up an Oracle installation If you are upgrading to the certified Oracle version, back up the existing Oracle installation. Back up the following files and directories: The Oracle home directory on each installed workstation. The directories containing database files for each configured database. The oratab file in either the /var/opt/oracle directory (Sun Solaris systems) or the /etc directory (all other platforms). 4-8 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

79 Oracle installation and configuration The Oracle Net listener.ora and tnsnames.ora configuration filesin either the /var/opt/oracle directory (Sun Solaris system) or the /etc directory (all other platforms). Note These are the only Teamcenter directories affected by Oracle installation. If you created other directories containing data used by Oracle, such as an administration script directory, Siemens PLM Software recommends that you also back up these directories. Upgrading the Oracle server You can upgrade your Oracle server and databases two ways: Upgrade using the Oracle installer Upgrade by uninstalling/reinstalling Oracle Upgrade using the Oracle installer 1. Launch the Oracle installer to install a certified version of Oracle server. 2. When the Oracle installer prompts you to upgrade existing databases, enter the required information about the databases you want to upgrade. For more information, see Install Oracle server. Upgrade by uninstalling/reinstalling Oracle 1. Remove existing Oracle databases. 2. Uninstall all existing Oracle server software. 3. Install a certified version of Oracle server. For more information, see the following topics: Install Oracle server Configure Oracle software Create an Oracle database 4. After Oracle installation is complete, import your Teamcenter database from the Oracle dump file into the new Oracle database. Enter the following command on a single line: ORACLE_HOME\bin\imp db-user/password fromuser=db-user touser=db-user file=file-name.dmp log=import.log Replace db-user with the Teamcenter database user account name, password with the database user account password, file-name with the full path and name of the dump file that contains the exported data, and import with the name of the log file. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 4-9

80 Chapter 4 Oracle installation and configuration Install Oracle server You can install Oracle from the Oracle software distribution images supplied by Siemens PLM Software or Oracle Corporation. If you install Oracle from a hard disk, copy the entire contents of the Oracle DVD to the hard disk. You can install Oracle application files on NFS file systems. However, Oracle Corporation does not support Oracle database files on an NFS-mounted file system. To ensure data integrity, create database files on local disk drives. If you install Oracle from an NFS-mounted directory from a remote NFS server, you must execute the installation program on the local server node. Caution Do not run Oracle Universal Installer as the root user. Oracle Universal Installer automatically installs the Oracle-supplied version of Java Runtime Environment (JRE). This version is required to run Oracle Universal Installer and several Oracle assistants. Do not modify the JRE except by using a patch provided by Oracle Support Services. 1. Log on to the server host as the oracle user. 2. Record the name of the Oracle database server host. Teamcenter Environment Manager requires this name during corporate server installation. 3. If Oracle was previously installed on the host, search for the following Oracle Net configuration files in the etc and var/opt/oracle directories and either remove them or relocate them to the corresponding network/admin directory in the Oracle home directory: listener.ora tnsnames.ora sqlnet.ora This step is required for compliance with the standard of storing Oracle Net configuration files in the network/admin directory. 4. If you use 64-bit Hewlett-Packard HP-UX, create the following symbolic links before you begin Oracle installation: # cd /usr/lib # ln -s libx11.3 libx11.sl # ln -s libxie.2 libxie.sl # ln -s libxext.3 libxext.sl # ln -s libxhp11.3 libxhp11.sl # ln -s libxi.3 libxi.sl # ln -s libxm.4 libxm.sl # ln -s libxp.2 libxp.sl # ln -s libxt.3 libxt.sl # ln -s libxtst.2 libxtst.sl 5. Insert the Oracle RDBMS component CD-ROM and mount it if required: IBM AIX: /usr/sbin/mount -rv cdrfs device name /cdrom 4-10 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

81 Oracle installation and configuration Replace device-name with the name of the CD-ROM device, for example, dev/cd0; replace /cdrom with the CD-ROM mount-point directory. Hewlett-Packard HP-UX: /usr/sbin/mount -F cdfs -o rr device name /cdrom Note Replace device-name with the name of the CD-ROM device, for example, dev/dsk/c0t0d0; replace cdrom with the CD-ROM mount-point directory. Sun Solaris: /usr/sbin/mount -r -F hsfs device name /cdrom Note Use the preceding command if Solaris does not mount the CD-ROM automatically. Replace device-name with the name of the CD-ROM device, for example, dev/dsk/c0t6d0s2; replace /cdrom with the CD-ROM mount point directory. SUSE Linux: mount -t iso9660 device name mount-directory Note Use the preceding command if SUSE Linux does not mount the CD-ROM automatically. Replace device-name with the name of the CD-ROM device, for example, dev/cdrom; replace mount-directory with the CD-ROM mount-point directory, for example, media/cdrom. 6. On IBM AIX only, run the rootpre.sh script as root user in a shell window. Copy the rootpre directory from the CD-ROM to a directory on a local hard disk and run rootpre.sh from disk. Enter the following commands: cp r /CDROM/rootpre /tmp cd /tmp/rootpre chmod 755 *./rootpre.sh Replace CDROM with your CD-ROM mount point. The rootpre.sh script configures the AIX Asynchronous I/O and Oracle Post-Wait Kernel Extension. Note If you do not perform this step, Oracle or Teamcenter programs can fail with unresolved symbols. For more information about this issue, see SFB-TC_Engineering-1111 available on the Siemens PLM Software GTAC Web site: This SFB is applies only to previous releases of Oracle. 7. If the /tmp directory does not have at least 400 MB of free space, set the TEMP and TMPDIR environment variables to a directory that meets this requirement: $ export TEMP=directory-path $ export TMPDIR=directory-path PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 4-11

82 Chapter 4 Oracle installation and configuration Replace directory-path with the path to the directory with sufficient space, for example, disk/tmp 8. Start Oracle Universal Installer from the CD-ROM mount-point directory as the oracle user: $ umask 022 $ unset TNS_ADMIN $ unset ORACLE_HOME $ export ORACLE_BASE=/disk1/oracle $ cd $HOME $ /mount-directory/runinstaller Replace mount-directory with the CD-ROM mount-point directory. This example sets the ORACLE_BASE variable to the top level of the Oracle installation. 9. In the Welcome window, click Next. 10. If Oracle Universal Installer displays the Specify Inventory Directory and Credentials window, enter the directory where you want to install inventory files and the operating system group name for the group that owns the inventory directory; click Next. Note Siemens PLM Software recommends: Use the default directory (orainventory) in the Oracle base directory. Use the default of the group the oracle account belongs to (dba). 11. If Oracle Universal Installer prompts you to run the orainstroot.sh script, run it in a separate terminal window as the root user and then click Continue: $ORACLE_BASE/oraInventory/orainstRoot.sh 12. In the Select Installation Type dialog box, select Enterprise Edition and click Next. 13. In the Specify Home Details dialog box, enter the directory path in which to install the Oracle products in the Destination box and click Next. Note Do not install Oracle 11g or later into an existing Oracle home that contains Oracle 10g or earlier software. 14. In the Product-Specific Prerequisite Checks dialog box, verify that all the prerequisite checks succeeded and click Next. Note If a check fails, review the displayed cause of the failure for that check, correct the problem, and rerun the check. A check occasionally fails erroneously, for example, when you install a later patch that obsoletes a listed patch. When you are satisfied that the system meets a requirement, manually verify the requirement by selecting the check box for the failed check. 15. In the Select Configuration Option dialog box, select Install database software only and click Next Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

83 Oracle installation and configuration 16. In the Summary dialog box, review the information to ensure you have sufficient disk space and click Install. Oracle Universal Installer displays a progress meter that adjusts at the completion of each installation and relinking phase. If you are installing from CD-ROM, Oracle Universal Installer prompts you to insert subsequent CD-ROMs when they are required. If you encounter errors, see the Oracle Database Installation Guide for UNIX Systems for troubleshooting information. When Oracle Universal Installer completes installing Oracle products, it creates the root.sh script in the Oracle home directory and prompts you to run the script. 17. Log on as the root user and run the root.sh script in the Oracle home directory. The root.sh script sets the necessary file permissions for Oracle products and performs other related root-related configuration activities. 18. After the root.sh script completes successfully, click OK in the Oracle Universal Installer Setup Privileges dialog box. Configure Oracle software Configure Oracle Net Teamcenter uses Oracle Net protocols to communicate with an Oracle database. These protocols require that a listener process (tnslsnr) run on the Oracle server to listen for remote connect requests and that all clients can translate the service alias identifying the server and database. If your site uses Oracle Net Assistant for other databases, Siemens PLM Software recommends that you copy the listener.ora and tnsnames.ora files containing entries for your designated Teamcenter database and install these copies on the Oracle server. Reload or restart the listener process so that it listens for connect requests to the new database. Teamcenter Environment Manager copies the tnsnames.ora file and stores it in the Teamcenter data directory. Teamcenter uses the Oracle TNS_ADMIN environment variable to locate the tnsnames.ora file. However, if the system uses the TNS_ADMIN variable to locate configuration files created by Oracle Net Assistant, this setting overrides Teamcenter settings. In this case, you must use Oracle Net Assistant to add entries for Teamcenter databases to existing Oracle Net configuration files. For more information, see the System Administration Guide. Configure Oracle server 1. In the window in which you started Oracle Universal Installer, start Oracle Net Manager: export ORACLE_HOME=/disk1/oracle/OraHome_1 $ORACLE_HOME/bin/netmgr PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 4-13

84 Chapter 4 Oracle installation and configuration 2. Create the listener.ora file: a. Expand the Local icon. b. Select the Listeners folder and choose EditfiCreate. c. Accept the default listener name (LISTENER) and click OK. d. Click the Add Address button. e. Specify the port number. Note Tip For the first listener, Siemens PLM Software recommends accepting the default port number (1521). Record the number of the port used by the Oracle database server listener for entry during corporate server installation. Teamcenter Environment Manager requires this port number. f. In the Local tree, click Profile. g. In the Naming list (to the right of the Oracle Net Configuration tree), choose General. h. Click the Advanced tab. i. In the TNS Time Out Value box, type 10. Note This step sets the Oracle server-side SQLNET.EXPIRE_TIME parameter. This value determines how often the Oracle server checks for aborted client connections. Teamcenter requires that this parameter be set to a nonzero value, and the recommended value is 10 (10 minutes). j. Save the listener information, choose FilefiSave Network Configuration. Oracle Net Manager saves the listener information and creates the network/admin/listener.ora and network/admin/sqlnet.ora files in the Oracle home directory. 3. Exit Oracle Net Manager, choose FilefiExit. 4. In the same window in which you started Oracle Net Manager, start the listener service: $ORACLE_HOME/bin/lsnrctl start LISTENER Create an Oracle database Create an Oracle database instance using Siemens PLM Software-provided templates with Oracle DBCA. The templates populate the database with the required Oracle user accounts and tablespaces. The templates create a single database user (infodba) per Oracle system identifier (SID) Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

85 Oracle installation and configuration Note For best performance and reliability, database parameters set by Teamcenter templates should be customized to suit your installation. This can be performed by your Oracle administrator after Teamcenter installation is complete. Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM) verifies your Oracle version during installation. If your Oracle server does not meet the minimum required version, TEM does not allow installation to proceed. For information about supported database servers for Teamcenter 10.1, see the Siemens PLM Software Certification Database: certification/teamcenter.shtml 1. Make sure you have access to the Teamcenter software distribution image. 2. Log on to the Oracle server host as the oracle user. 3. Copy the Siemens PLM Software-supplied Oracle database template files: a. Access the Teamcenter software distribution image. b. Copy all files in the tc/dbscripts/oracle directory on the Teamcenter software distribution image to the templates directory of the Oracle installation. For example: cp /cdrom/tc/db_scripts/oracle/* ORACLE_HOME/assistants/dbca/templates 4. Open a shell window and set the ORACLE_BASE environment variable. For example: export ORACLE_BASE=/disk1/oracle Note By default, Oracle creates database files in the oradata directory in the directory pointed to by the ORACLE_BASE environment variable. Before running Oracle Database Configuration Assistant (DBCA), you can set the ORACLE_BASE environment variable to the directory where you want database files to reside. 5. Start Oracle Database Configuration Assistant (DBCA): ORACLE_HOME/bin/dbca 6. In the Welcome dialog box, click Next. 7. In the Operations dialog box, select Create a database and click Next. 8. In the Database Templates dialog box, select the appropriate template (for Oracle 11g) and click Next. 9. In the Database Identification dialog box, either accept the default database name in the Global Database Name box or type a different name and click Next. Note The SID box is automatically filled in with the name you enter in the Global Database Name box. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 4-15

86 Chapter 4 Oracle installation and configuration Tip Record the SID of the Oracle instance for entry during corporate server installation. Teamcenter Environment Manager requires this name. 10. In the Management Options dialog box, click Next. 11. In the Database Credentials dialog box, select Use the Same Password for All Accounts, enter and confirm the password for the SYS, SYSTEM, DBSMNP, and SYSMAN accounts, and click Next. 12. In the Storage Options dialog box, select File System and click Next. 13. In the Database File Locations dialog box, select Use Database File Locations from Template and click Next. 14. In the Recovery Configuration dialog box, select Specify Flash Recovery Area and click Next. 15. In the Database Content dialog box, click Next. 16. In the Initialization Parameters dialog box, click Next. 17. In the Database Storage dialog box, click Next. 18. In the Create Options dialog box, select Create Database and click Finish. 19. In the Confirmation dialog box, click OK to start creating the database. When the database is created, DBCA displays a window containing information about the created database. 20. Click Exit. Note Review the customscripts.log file carefully. This log file is the output from running the custom Teamcenter steps. The database creation process creates Teamcenter objects (for example, the database user account, default tablespaces, and create log tables/indexes) by executing the Siemens PLM Software-supplied script in the Oracle home directory: /assistants/dbca/templates/tc_create_user_ilog.sql If this script did not execute successfully, execute it again using the Oracle SQL*Plus utility. Log on to SQL*Plus as sysdba. The first time Oracle Universal Installer runs, it creates the ORACLE_BASE/oraInventory/logs directory, containing an inventory of installed components and performed actions. The most recent log file is named installactions.log. Names of previous installation sessions are in the form installactionsdate-time.log. For example: installactions _ am.log You can also view a list of installed components by choosing Installed Products on any Oracle Universal Installer window. Do not delete or manually alter the Inventory directory or its contents. Doing so can 4-16 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

87 Oracle installation and configuration prevent Oracle Universal Installer from locating products you installed on the system. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 4-17

88

89 Part III Teamcenter server installation Prepare the Teamcenter server host, install the corporate server, then perform any required postinstallation tasks. Teamcenter preinstallation tasks Teamcenter server installation Teamcenter postinstallation tasks PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide

90

91 Chapter 5 Teamcenter preinstallation tasks Obtain a Teamcenter license file Install the licensing server Select destination directories Verify required character set Ensure correct mode on Linux Install a volume server Install NX and Teamcenter Integration for NX or NX Integration Best installation practices PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide

92

93 Chapter 5 Teamcenter preinstallation tasks Obtain a Teamcenter license file To obtain a Teamcenter license file, you must provide the composite host ID of your Teamcenter license server host. A composite host ID (CID) is a unique identifier used as the host ID on the SERVER line of the license file. It is distinguished from the default FlexNet host ID by the COMPOSITE keyword. It is the host ID that associates a permanent license file with a specific server. When the CID is used as the license server host ID, the SERVER line reads as follows: SERVER servera COMPOSITE=37B5ED1AC61D To obtain a composite host ID for your license server, run the getcid utility on your license server host. Download this utility from GTAC: 1. Open the GTAC Web site: 2. Click License ManagementfiDownload CID Utility. 3. On the Download CID Utility page, click NX and Other Products. 4. On the FTP site, click the directory corresponding to the platform type of your license server, for example,. 5. On the resulting page, download the getcid utility. Run the getcid utility on the target license server (or on all three servers in a redundant configuration). The utility provides the CID for license server as a 12-digit hexadecimal number. For example: $ getcid.exe The Siemens PLM Software licensing composite hostid is: COMPOSITE=37B5ED1AC61D After you obtain the CID, enter it into your customer record to generate a permanent license file. You can enter your CID using either your WebKey account or by calling your customer services representative. After the CID is entered into your customer record, you are sent a permanent license file to install on your license server. For more information about installing the Siemens PLM License Server, see Install the licensing server. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 5-1

94 Chapter 5 Teamcenter preinstallation tasks Install the licensing server Before you install Teamcenter, you must install the Siemens PLM License Server to distribute licenses to Teamcenter hosts. Teamcenter employs named user licensing, which ties each user in the system to an available license and ensures the total number of active licenses of each type in the system is always less than or equal to the number of licenses purchased. For descriptions of the available license types, see your license agreement documentation. This procedure assumes you have obtained a Teamcenter license file as described in Obtain a Teamcenter license file. Install the ugslmd license daemon: 1. Obtain a Teamcenter 10.1 license file from Siemens PLM Software. Save the license file in a directory accessible to the license server host. This procedure assumes the license file is named tc.lic, but you may give the license file any name you choose. Note If you choose to install Teamcenter using a temporary license file, edit the temporary license file to reflect your designated Teamcenter corporate server host. a. Open the license file in a plain text editor and locate the following line in the file: SERVER YourHostname ANY b. Replace YourHostname with the host name of the designated license server host. Update your Siemens PLM Software customer service representative with your license server host information. c. Save the changes to the license file. Siemens PLM Software recommends you do not change the license server port from its default value ( ) unless it is necessary to resolve a port conflict. Record the host name and port for the license server. Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM) prompts you for these values during Teamcenter server installation. 2. Set the SPLM_LICENSE_SERVER environment variable to the following value on the designated Teamcenter corporate server host: port@host Replace port with the port number and host with the host name of the license server, for example, 28000@tchost. The port and host values must match those you specified in the SERVER line of the Teamcenter license file. 1. Port is registered for the Siemens PLM License Server with the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA). For more information, see Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

95 Teamcenter preinstallation tasks 3. Set the TCP_NODELAY environment variable to 1 on the licensing server host. This helps optimize logon time when launching Teamcenter. 4. Change to the additional_applications directory in the Teamcenter software distribution image. 5. Copy the Siemens PLM License Server installation program (SPLMLicenseServer_version_setup.bin) to a temporary directory on your local hard drive. 6. Launch the Siemens PLM License Server installation program: a. Launch the SPLMLicenseServer_version_setup.bin program. b. Open the ugslicensing_install.ans file and edit the contents to specify the destination directory and path to the Teamcenter license file. c. Execute the ugslicensing_install command. Caution The Siemens PLM License Server must be running and two or more seats must be available on that license server during Teamcenter server installation. Otherwise, database creation fails because the make_user utility cannot create the required users in the database. For more information, see the Installing Siemens PLM Software Licensing for UNIX, Installing Siemens PLM Software Licensing for Windows, and Siemens PLM Common Licensing User Guide documents in the additional_documentation directory on the Teamcenter 10.1 documentation distribution image. Select destination directories Select destination directories for Teamcenter using the following guidelines: Ensure that all directories and files are owned and writable by the operating system user installing Teamcenter over an existing installation. The Teamcenter installation directory must be in a location excluded from real-time virus scanning. Real-time virus scanning prevents Teamcenter from updating the persistent object manager (POM) schema during installation, causing installation errors. Install Teamcenter on a local disk to configure File Management System file caches and/or Multi-Site Collaboration services You can select automounted NFS directories, but you must supply the automount link name for the Teamcenter application root directory. Do not supply the automounted directory (for example, /tmp/mnt/node-name). PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 5-3

96 Chapter 5 Teamcenter preinstallation tasks Verify required character set Teamcenter installation tools require the ISO character set. To verify that this character set is loaded, run the locale a command in a shell. If the output does not list ISO8859-1, you must add this character set before you install Teamcenter. 1. Set or export the LC_ALL environment variable by typing LC_ALL=en_US.ISO or the equivalent command for your platform. Caution On IBM AIX systems, in locales that use commas for decimal points (for example, French), do not set the LC_ALL environment variable. Instead, make sure the LC_NUMERIC environment variable is set to a value of C. Setting LC_ALL on IBM AIX systems overrides the LC_NUMERIC setting and causes input string errors in the rich client. For more information about this issue, see software field bulletin SFB-Teamcenter-5972 on GTAC: 2. Verify the setting using the echo command or equivalent. Make sure the correct value for LC_ALL is displayed. 3. Run the locale command and make sure the LANG variable and all the LC_x variables are set the same as LC_ALL. 4. If LANG is still set to C, manually export LANG to be the same value as LC_ALL. 5. Launch Teamcenter Environment Manager (tem.sh) from the current shell. Alternatively, your system administrator may modify the date file (named TIMEZONE in the etc directory), which can preset this environment, so every time you log on and launch a shell, the environment is preset. The recommended method, however, is to log on to the system using the Common Desktop Environment (CDE) with the minimum required locale (ISO8859-1) by choosing Option Language en_us.iso during logon. If the ISO character set is not loaded on your machine, contact your system administrator to have it installed before you install the GM Overlay. This requirement is due to changes in the installation process for Teamcenter 10.1, which uses XML files rather than.dat files and associated scripts. Because of this, GM Overlay data is transformed from.dat files into XML files. To read and parse the XML files correctly, the system must be able to process non-english (non-ascii) locale characters. To facilitate this, the system must be first loaded with the fonts for that locale. Note Ensure the ISO character set is loaded before you add any Teamcenter features to your configuration that contains the GM Overlay. If the ISO character set is not loaded, lists of values (LOVs) for GM Overlay are corrupted during feature installation. Upgrade of the GM Overlay feature fails if the ISO character set is not loaded. 5-4 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

97 Teamcenter preinstallation tasks Ensure correct mode on Linux Before installing Teamcenter on the Linux operating system, ensure that the system is operating in the ISO mode, rather than the default UTF-8 mode. Install a volume server By default, you can create volumes only on local disks, but if you want to write files to volumes residing on remote disks (shared across the network), you can create a stand-alone volume server. 1. Log on to the operating system with the user account you want to own the volume. 2. Start Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM): a. Change to the root directory of the Teamcenter software distribution image. b. Run the tem.sh script. Teamcenter Environment Manager starts and displays the Choose Install Language dialog box. c. Select a language for the installation program and click OK. The language you select is used only for the installation program. Teamcenter Environment Manager displays the Welcome to Teamcenter panel. 3. Click Install. 4. Proceed to the Configuration panel. 5. Enter a unique ID and description for the new Teamcenter configuration. 6. Proceed to the Solutions panel. Select the Volume Server solution. Note For descriptions of solutions, point to the solution in the list or click Help or see Solutions and features reference. 7. Proceed to the Features panel. This panel shows the FMS Server Cache feature preselected by the Volume Server solution. 8. In the Installation Directory box, enter the absolute path to the directory where you want to install the volume server. 9. Proceed to the Operating System User panel. Type the password for the operating system account to which you logged on to install the volume server. 10. Proceed to the FSC Service panel. Enter required values for the FMS server cache (FSC) service. For information about required values, click Help. 11. Proceed through the remaining panels, entering required values for the volume server. For information about these panels, click Help. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 5-5

98 Chapter 5 Teamcenter preinstallation tasks 12. Proceed to the Confirmation panel. Verify the information you entered. If you want to change any values, click Back to return to the panels you want to change. Otherwise, click Next to begin installing the volume server. 13. When installation is complete, close TEM. Install NX and Teamcenter Integration for NX or NX Integration Installing NX is not a prerequisite for installing or using Teamcenter. However, if this is a new installation of both Teamcenter and NX, Siemens PLM Software strongly recommends installing NX prior to installing Teamcenter. When installing NX for use with Teamcenter, you must install the Teamcenter Integration for NX or NX Integration executables. Although installed independently, Teamcenter Integration for NX and NX Integration cannot be used until Teamcenter is configured. When installing NX, allow the installation to modify system files so that it can create an installed_programs.dat file under the ugs directory. You can use this installed installed_programs.dat file as a sample for use on other UNIX workstations of the same type to access NX using Teamcenter Integration for NX or NX Integration from a local server environment. NX can be installed on a mount point. Teamcenter Integration for NX and NX Integration provide the same NX user interface and are both installed with NX. For more information, see the NX Remote Manager Guide and also the installation guides distributed with NX. Installing Teamcenter varies depending on whether you have a license for NX Integration or Teamcenter Integration for NX. Best installation practices A Teamcenter network requires one corporate server configuration. Additional servers are optional, but can help balance network loads and facilitate heterogeneous networks (networks with hosts running different operating systems). If you install the optional servers, Siemens PLM Software recommends installing in the following order: 1. Perform a full installation of Teamcenter on a corporate server host. The corporate server is a network node used as an application file server (from the Teamcenter application root directory) and database-specific configuration file server (from the Teamcenter data directory). Run Teamcenter Environment Manager and install the Teamcenter executables and the directory containing the database-specific configuration files. Teamcenter can also run locally on this network node. 2. Optionally install additional Teamcenter servers to provide the following capabilities: Run Teamcenter executables and point to the existing data directory on the corporate server host or a another Teamcenter server. This server can contain a Teamcenter application root directory structure on a network node that may be configured to run Teamcenter in the future. 5-6 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

99 Teamcenter preinstallation tasks Run Teamcenter Environment Manager and point to an existing database. This server can contain a Teamcenter network node to be used as a database-specific configuration file (Teamcenter data directory) server when the Teamcenter application root directory is mapped from a Teamcenter application server. Teamcenter can also be run locally on this system. You are creating an additional Teamcenter database for use with an existing Teamcenter application root directory. Note Teamcenter servers and two-tier rich clients on UNIX or Linux hosts cannot connect to Microsoft SQL Server database servers. Keep this in mind when planning database access in a heterogeneous network. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 5-7

100

101 Chapter 6 Teamcenter server installation Before you start Install a Teamcenter corporate server PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide

102

103 Chapter 6 Teamcenter server installation Before you start Locate the Teamcenter software distribution image for your platform. If you install Teamcenter online help, locate the Teamcenter documentation distribution image. 1 On the local host, create the Teamcenter operating system user account. Note All Teamcenter services run as this user account. Obtain the host name of the licensing server and the port number used for licensing processes. Ensure that a database server is installed for Teamcenter and obtain the following information from the database administrator: o The type of database server used for this installation of Teamcenter. o The following information about the database server: Name of the host on which the database server runs. Number of the port on which the database server listens. For Oracle database servers, the service name of the Oracle instance. Typically, the service name is the same as the SID. For MS SQL database servers: Name of the database Name of a system data source (DSN) to be created by Teamcenter Environment Manager Whether you can create a database user or must use an existing database user: If you can create a database user, obtain the following information about the generic Oracle instance: Name of the database system user. 1. The Teamcenter documentation distribution image contains the tchelp.jar file needed by the online help feature. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 6-1

104 Chapter 6 Teamcenter server installation Password for the database system user. Absolute path to the tablespace directory on the database server. If you must use an existing database user: Database user name Database user password Determine a parent directory to contain a Teamcenter volume or volumes. This parent directory must exist before installation. Only the parent directory should exist; the volume directory is created during installation. Note Siemens PLM Software recommends the volume location not be under the Teamcenter application root directory. Doing so can cause problems when upgrading to a new version of Teamcenter. Select the features to install. Point to any feature to view a description. 2 Obtain the information required to install File Management System. Note If you install File Management System, the FMS server cache (FSC) and the server manager must run on the same host server, with the same user ID. Teamcenter provides server managers based on the J2EE and the Microsoft.NET platforms. The.NET Web tier is supported only on Windows platforms. Data Read cache directory and size? Description For FMS to operate correctly, the location you specify must be on the local host. If you are installing a volume on the host, FMS does not use the read cache; Siemens PLM Software recommends accepting the default cache size (10 megabytes). Do not specify 0; specifying 0 creates a file cache with a default size larger than 10 megabytes. If you are not installing a volume on this host, FMS acts as a cache server. In this case, Siemens PLM Software recommends increasing the value to 1000 megabytes. However, choose a size that represents the maximum size of the data that must be processed. If you choose 1000 megabytes, and a user requests a 3 gigabyte assembly, the request fails. 2. For further descriptions of server features, see Teamcenter features. 6-2 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

105 Teamcenter server installation Data Write cache and size? Communication mode between FMS components? Configure proxy servers? Is this host an FMS master? Add the URL of the local host to the list of servers defined in the Fms_BootStrap_Urls site preference? Description This cache is required when the FSC acts as a cache server. For FMS to operate correctly, the location you specify must be on the local host. If you are installing a volume on this host, FMS does not use the write cache; Siemens PLM Software recommends accepting the default cache size (10 megabytes). Do not specify 0; specifying 0 creates a file cache with a default size larger than 10 megabytes. If you are not installing a volume on this host, FMS acts as a cache server. In this case, Siemens PLM Software recommends increasing the value to 512 megabytes or more. However, choose a size that represents the maximum size of the data that must be processed. Either HTTP or HTTPS. Either HTTP proxy server or HTTPS proxy server. If you choose to configure proxy servers, you must provide: The name of the host running the proxy server. The number of the port the proxy server listens on. If you are installing only one FSC server in the network, it must be the master host. Each Teamcenter network must have at least one master configuration file and one FSC designated to read this file. This preference is used only by the Teamcenter thin client. When searching for an assigned FMS server cache to manage file downloads, thin clients contact FSC servers defined in the Fms_BootStrap_Urls preference in the order they are listed. The server responds with the FSC server assigned to the thin client, and all subsequent communication is with that assigned server cache. If there is only the thin client and one FSC server in the network, you must select this option. Each Teamcenter network must have at least one server listed in the Fms_BootStrap_Urls preference for thin client use. For failover purposes, you can include multiple servers. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 6-3

106 Chapter 6 Teamcenter server installation Data Description Default settings for the FCC? Location of the cache directory for all Windows systems and for all UNIX systems. Default maximum size in megabytes of whole files downloaded from the volume to rich client hosts. Users cannot download a file whose size exceeds the value you set for this value. This default setting can be overridden by the FMS client cache configuration file. Choose a size large enough to accommodate the largest whole file that users download from the volume. If the user requests a 3-gigabyte assembly when the cache size is set to 1000 megabytes, the request fails. Default maximum size in megabytes of whole files uploaded to a volume from rich client hosts. Users cannot upload a file whose size exceeds the value you set for this value. This default setting can be overridden by the FMS client cache configuration file. Choose a size large enough to accommodate the largest whole file that users upload to the volume. Default maximum size in megabytes of the segment file cache used by the embedded viewer and the stand-alone application viewer on rich client hosts. This default setting can be overridden by the FMS client cache configuration file. o o If no or few rich client users in the network deploy Lifecycle Visualization, Siemens PLM Software recommends setting this cache size to 10 megabytes. Do not specify 0; specifying 0 creates a file cache with a default size larger than 10 megabytes. If rich client users in the network deploy Lifecycle Visualization, Siemens PLM Software recommends setting this cache size in the range of 2000 megabytes to 4000 megabytes. The cache size is initially small, expanding to the maximum size only if a user launches Lifecycle Visualization to view a file of that size. The initial size of the cache is proportional to the value specify. 6-4 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

107 Teamcenter server installation Install a Teamcenter corporate server Note On Linux hosts, make sure Linux host names do not exceed 31 characters in length. Host names longer than 31 characters cause Teamcenter corporate server installation to fail during saving of the POM schema file in the TC_DATA directory. When entering host names during Teamcenter installation, be aware Teamcenter installation tools do not require fully-qualified domain names for host names. If your fully-qualified domain name exceeds 31 characters, use the server short host name instead. For more information, see the GTAC solutions document on GTAC. 1. Log on to the operating system with the Teamcenter user account you created for installing and maintaining the Teamcenter installation. 2. Specify the path to the required Java Runtime Environment (JRE) by setting the JRE_HOME or JRE64_HOME environment variable on your host. Note Alternatively, you can specify the JRE path when you launch Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM) from a command prompt using the -jre JRE-path argument. For more information, see Java Runtime Environment. 3. Start TEM: a. Change to the root directory of the Teamcenter software distribution image. b. Run the tem.sh script. TEM starts and displays the Installer Language dialog box. c. In the Installer Language dialog box, select a language and click OK. Your language selection applies only to the TEM session, not the Teamcenter installation. Note For information about any TEM panel, click the help button. 4. Proceed to the Welcome to Teamcenter panel. This panel contains the following options: Install Installs a new Teamcenter configuration using a fully configurable installation process. Quick Preconfigured Install Installs preconfigured corporate server and client configurations using a simplified installation process. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 6-5

108 Chapter 6 Teamcenter server installation For information about installing Teamcenter servers using quick preconfigured install configurations, see Teamcenter Environment Manager Help. Upgrade Upgrades an existing Teamcenter configuration. For information about upgrading, see the Upgrade Guide. Click Install to begin installing a corporate server. Note The Welcome to Teamcenter panel also provides these installation options: Quick preconfigured installation TEM provides a set of predefined common Teamcenter configurations that require minimal user input to install. To install a preconfigured corporate server, click Quick Preconfigured Install, then select one of the corporate server configurations. For information about installing Teamcenter servers using quick preconfigured install configurations, see Teamcenter Environment Manager Help. Custom distribution To simplify installations of Teamcenter on multiple hosts, TEM can create a silent distribution or a compact distribution. Compact distribution is recommended only for Teamcenter client configurations, not for servers. For information about creating a custom distribution, see Creating a custom distribution. 5. In the Configuration panel, type a unique ID and description for the new Teamcenter configuration. The configuration ID identifies your Teamcenter configuration when you maintain, upgrade, uninstall, or add features to the configuration. Installation log files are also named based on the ID you enter. 6. In the Solutions panel, select the Corporate Server solution. For descriptions of solutions, point to the solution name or see Solutions and features reference. 7. Proceed to the Features panel. This panel shows the corporate server features preselected by the Corporate Server solution: Teamcenter Foundation FMS Server Cache NX Integration 8. Select any additional features you want to include in your configuration. For descriptions of features, point to the feature name or see Solutions and features reference. 6-6 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

109 Teamcenter server installation If you select additional features, TEM displays additional panels during installation that are not described in this procedure. For help with any panel in TEM, click the help button. You can also add features to the corporate server later using TEM in maintenance mode. Note If you are deploying the J2EE Web tier, select the J2EE Based Server Manager feature (under Server Enhancements). If you want to install a custom solution, see Installing a custom solution or third-party template. If you install Teamcenter Automotive Edition and GM Overlay with the rich client, make sure you complete the required postinstallation steps. For more information, see the appropriate client installation guide (for Windows or Linux). 9. In the Installation Directory box, enter the path to a new directory where you want to install Teamcenter. Note The Teamcenter installation directory must not already exist on your system. TEM creates the directory during installation. The path to the Teamcenter installation directory must not exceed 64 characters. The Teamcenter installation directory must be in a location excluded from real-time virus scanning. Real-time virus scanning prevents Teamcenter from updating the persistent object manager (POM) schema during installation, causing installation errors. The Installation Directory value is the Teamcenter application root directory stored in the TC_ROOT environment variable. Do not set TC_ROOT in the system environment. TEM sets this variable as required in configuration files. Setting this variable in the operating system can cause conflicts if you install multiple Teamcenter configurations. 10. In the File System Cache (FSC) panel, type a unique identifier and port for the FMS server cache in the FSC ID and Port boxes. A Teamcenter network must have at least one master FSC. If you want to designate the current FSC as an FSC master, select the Enable configuration master check box. Otherwise, type the URL to the parent FSC in the FSC Parent URL box. For advanced FSC configuration options, click Advanced. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 6-7

110 Chapter 6 Teamcenter server installation 11. In the Operating System User panel, type the password for the operating system account under which you install Teamcenter. 12. In the Foundation panel, select how you want to create or designate the Teamcenter database and Teamcenter data directory (TC_DATA). Database exists? Database populated? TC_DATA exists? Select this option No N/A No Create and populate database, create new data directory No Teamcenter database or data directory exists and you want TEM to create both. This option is selected by default. Yes No No Populate database, create new data directory A database exists but is not populated with Teamcenter data. You want TEM to populate the database and create a new data directory. Yes Yes No Create new data directory using existing populated database A database exists and is populated. You want TEM to use this database and create a new data directory. Yes Yes Yes Use populated database and existing data directory A database exists and is populated, and a data directory exists. You want TEM to use both of these. 13. Enter the required values for your Teamcenter database according to your selection in the Foundation panel. Create and populate database, create new data directory: a. Proceed to the Foundation Database panel. b. Select the appropriate database server vendor (IBM DB2, Oracle, or MS SQL Server). c. Enter the required values for the database server, the database user, and the database administrator account. Populate database, create new data directory: a. Proceed to the Foundation Database panel. b. Select the appropriate database server vendor (IBM DB2, Oracle, or MS SQL Server). 6-8 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

111 Teamcenter server installation c. Enter the required values for the database server and the database user. Create new data directory using existing populated database: a. Proceed to the Foundation Database panel. b. Select the appropriate database server vendor (IBM DB2, Oracle, or MS SQL Server). c. Enter the required values for the database server and the database user. Use populated database and existing data directory: No database information is required. Proceed to the Data Directory panel. Note For more information about database configuration values, click the help button. For Oracle databases, the directory you specify in the Database Path box must exist and you must have write permission to the directory. 14. In the Data Directory box, enter a location for the Teamcenter data directory. The Teamcenter data directory is called the TC_DATA directory. This value is stored in the TC_DATA environment variable on your system. TEM creates shared data subdirectories and files in this location. Each data directory is associated with a single database user within a database instance. Do not set TC_DATA in the system environment. TEM sets this variable as required in various scripts. Setting this variable in the operating system can cause conflicts if you install more than one configuration. 15. Proceed to the Volume Specification panel. In the Name box, type a name for the Teamcenter volume you want TEM to create. In the Directory box, type the absolute path to the directory in which to create the volume, or accept the default location. Note Siemens PLM Software recommends not defining the volume location under the Teamcenter application root directory. Doing so leads to complications when upgrading to a later version of Teamcenter. 16. Proceed to the Foundation panel. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 6-9

112 Chapter 6 Teamcenter server installation Value Transient Volume Directories Windows clients UNIX clients Generate server cache Generate client cache Description Specifies transient volume locations for Windows hosts, UNIX/Linux hosts, or both. A transient volume is an operating system directory controlled by Teamcenter and used to store temporary data for transport of reports, PLM XML data, and other nonvolume data between the enterprise tier and client tier in a deployed four-tier architecture. All four-tier clients that access the corporate server you are installing use this transient volume. For more information about transient volumes, see the System Administration Guide. Specifies the location for a transient volume for Windows client hosts. Specifies the location for a transient volume for Linux client hosts. Specifies you want to generate a shared server cache. If you select this option, TEM runs the generate_metadata_cache utility at the end of the install, upgrade, or update action. This option reduces Teamcenter memory consumption by moving metadata to shared memory. Types, property descriptors, and constants are placed in a shared cache that is shared by all Teamcenter server instances. This option is selected by default in a Teamcenter server installation. For more information about managing shared server cache, see the System Administration Guide. Specifies you want to generate a cache of data that rich clients can download once at initial logon and then reuse on the client host. This option reduces server demand, reduces startup time, and improves overall performance. When this option is selected, TEM runs the generate_client_meta_cache utility at the end of the install, upgrade, or update action. If you clear this option, but a client cache already exists, the old client cache is deleted. This option is selected by default in a Teamcenter server installation Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

113 Teamcenter server installation Value Description For more information about the generate_client_meta_cache utility, see the Utilities Reference. For advanced Teamcenter Foundation options, click Advanced. 17. Proceed to the Flex License Client panel. Enter settings for the Siemens PLM License Server. Note The Siemens PLM License Server must be installed before you begin Teamcenter installation. For more information, see Install the licensing server. 18. Proceed to the Teamcenter Administrative User panel. During a corporate server installation, the values in this panel are read-only. 19. Proceed through the remaining panels, entering the required information for the features you selected. For information about these panels, click the help button. 20. Proceed to the Confirmation panel. Verify the information you entered. If you want to change any values, click Back to return to the panels you want to change. Otherwise, click Start to begin installing the Teamcenter corporate server. Note If you chose the Online Help feature, TEM prompts for the location of the online help files during installation. Enter the path to the location of tchelp.jar file on the Teamcenter documentation distribution image. If an error occurs during installation, follow the instructions in the error message displayed by TEM or see Troubleshooting for possible solutions. 21. When installation is complete, close TEM. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 6-11

114

115 Chapter 7 Teamcenter postinstallation tasks Teamcenter postinstallation tasks Run the postinstallation tasks script Start Teamcenter database daemons Configure Multi-Site Collaboration Prepare the Multi-Site Collaboration environment Configure Multi-Site Collaboration daemons Configure heterogeneous operating system environment Back up new installations Terminate Teamcenter sessions Back up existing Teamcenter data Back up Teamcenter databases PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide

116

117 Chapter 7 Teamcenter postinstallation tasks Teamcenter postinstallation tasks Perform the appropriate procedures to complete installation of Teamcenter features. Run the postinstallation tasks script If you installed the corporate server without root privileges, a user with root privileges must run the root postinstallation tasks script. This script registers daemons and performs other installation actions that require root privileges. In the TC_ROOT/install directory, locate and run the following script: root_post_tasks_id.ksh Start Teamcenter database daemons You can start Teamcenter database daemons manually by executing the following startup files: Database daemon Action manager Subscription manager Task monitor Daemon startup script name rc.ugs.actionmgrd rc.ugs.subscriptionmgrd rc.ugs.task_monitor The installation program creates these startup files in different directories depending upon the operating system. For all systems except AIX, the script resides in the column labelled Script Location. There is a corresponding symbolic link located in the Startup Directory column. The symbolic links also have different S prefix numbers depending on the operating system. For AIX systems, the startup directory is /etc, and one file (rc.ugs) calls all the daemon startup scripts if they are installed and have execute permissions set. The following table list the locations of the startup scripts. Operating system Script location Startup directory IBM AIX /etc Not applicable; see rc.ugs file Hewlett-Packard HP-UX /sbin/init.d /sbin/rc3.d/s905script-name Sun Solaris /etc/init.d /etc/rc2.d/s95script-name PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 7-1

118 Chapter 7 Teamcenter postinstallation tasks Configure Multi-Site Collaboration Multi-Site Collaboration allows the exchange of Teamcenter data objects between databases. Each database should be easily accessible via TCP/IP, either over the Internet or the company intranet. Configuration of Multi-Site Collaboration is optional. Coordinate configuration of Multi-Site Collaboration with the system administrators of the other Teamcenter databases to be part of the Multi-Site Collaboration environment. Information about all participating Teamcenter database sites must be stored in each database and in the site preference files. In addition, you must identify the network nodes to run Multi-Site Collaboration server processes for these databases and configure those systems to run the processes. Prepare the Multi-Site Collaboration environment Perform the following steps to configure Multi-Site Collaboration for a wide area network: 1. Identify all Teamcenter databases to be part of the Multi-Site Collaboration environment. 2. Identify the Teamcenter database to act as the ODS database. This database stores records about the data objects published by other databases in the Multi-Site Collaboration environment (that is, made public to the other databases). This can be one of the databases identified in step 1 or it can be a dedicated database. The database must be populated with Teamcenter data. 3. For each database identified in step 2, identify a network node local to that database to act as the ODS server. The ods daemon runs on this system to listen for publication queries from other databases. 4. For each database identified at step 1, identify a network node local to that database to act as the IDSM for that database. When other databases request an object published from this database, the idsm daemon is run on this network node to export the object. 5. For each database identified in step 1, obtain the site name and site ID. The site ID of the database is generated during installation and cannot be changed. The site name is customizable but by default is based on the site ID. To obtain the site name and site ID, use the administration application named Organization in Teamcenter rich client (in the rich client application manager, click Admin and then click the Organization symbol). Within Organization, choose the top-level Sites node from the Organization tree. The site details for the local database are listed first. For more information, see Organization Guide. 6. Using the information obtained in steps 2 through 5, populate each database site table with information about the other sites using the Organization application in the Teamcenter rich client. 7-2 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

119 Teamcenter postinstallation tasks The node for each site is the name of the network node to run the necessary Multi-Site Collaboration daemons (idsm and/or ods). If the site is an ODS database, check the ODS site flag. To publish objects from the ODS database, define the site of the ODS database in the site table and configure the ODS server as an IDSM server. 7. For each database identified in step 1 and step 2, edit the site preference for the database and modify the following preferences to reflect the Multi-Site Collaboration environment: ODS_permitted_sites (ODS database only) ODS_site (Non-ODS databases) ODS_searchable_sites ODS_searchable_sites_excluded IDSM_permitted_sites IDSM_permitted_users_from_site_site-name IDSM_permitted_transfer_sites IDSM_permitted_transfer_users_from_site_site-name IDSM_permitted_checkout_sites IDSM_permitted_checkout_users_from_site_site-name Fms_BootStrap_Urls TC_publishable_classes TC_transfer_area For more information about these preferences, see the Teamcenter Preferences and Environment Variables Reference. 8. For each database identified in step 1 and step 2, copy all POM transmit schema files for that database into the POM transmit schema directories for each of the other databases. This step is required to allow the import of data objects from other databases. Devise a strategy for regularly synchronizing POM transmit schema directories. 9. For each network node identified at step 3 and step 4, run the Teamcenter installation program on that node to configure and start the Multi-Site Collaboration daemons. Configure Multi-Site Collaboration daemons Configure the Multi-Site Collaboration daemons: 1. As a user with root privileges, run the root_post_install_tasks.sh program in the install directory in the Teamcenter application root directory. 2. At the command line, execute the following command: execute ps -ef grep -v grep grep inetd This script obtains the current process ID of the inetd daemon. 3. At the command line, execute the following command: kill -HUP process-id Replace process-id with the inetd daemon ID obtained in step 2. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 7-3

120 Chapter 7 Teamcenter postinstallation tasks This procedure adds the idsm daemon entry to the inetd.conf file and forces the inetd daemon to reload its configuration. As a result, the Multi-Site Collaboration daemons are launched to complete the installation. Configure heterogeneous operating system environment If you are adding Windows Teamcenter clients to a UNIX or Linux Teamcenter environment, you must perform the following tasks: 1. Install Teamcenter and configure the database (Teamcenter application root and data directories) on a Windows system that can serve a common mount point for all Windows clients. This allows the Windows and non-windows Teamcenter clients to interoperate, particularly in volume management. 2. Synchronize the following files in the separate Teamcenter data directories: POM schema files (TC_DATA\pom_schema_server_sid) POM transmit files (\pom_transmit\*.sch) Dataset definition files (TC_DATA\gs_info\*.des) 3. Make sure your Windows and UNIX server configurations contain identical sets of Teamcenter features. For example, if you install features or custom templates on a UNIX server, you must install the same features and templates on your Windows server. 4. Configure File Management System (FMS) on UNIX and Windows volume servers. Conversely, if you create a Teamcenter database by running the Teamcenter setup program from a Windows workstation, you must install Teamcenter on Linux clients you want to connect to the database. Back up new installations Siemens PLM Software strongly recommends backing up new Teamcenter and Oracle installations before using them. 1. Terminate Teamcenter sessions. For information, see Terminate Teamcenter sessions. 2. Back up existing Teamcenter data. For information, see Back up existing Teamcenter data. 3. Export existing Oracle databases. For information, see Export an Oracle database. 4. Terminate Teamcenter-Oracle sessions. For information, see Terminate Oracle sessions. 7-4 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

121 Teamcenter postinstallation tasks 5. Back up the Oracle installation. For information, see Back up an Oracle installation. Terminate Teamcenter sessions 1. Instruct all users to close and log off of Teamcenter sessions, including tcserver processes. 2. Use the clearlocks utility to check for nodes connected to the database: $TC_ROOT/bin/clearlocks -node_names 3. Note the node names returned, and then type the following command for each node name returned: $TC_ROOT/bin/clearlocks -assert_dead node-name Replace node-name with a returned node name. Back up existing Teamcenter data Back up the following directories: The Teamcenter application root directory on each installed workstation The Teamcenter data directory for each configured database The Teamcenter volume directories for each configured database These are the only directories affected by Teamcenter installation. If you created other directories that contain data used by your existing Teamcenter installation, such as a separate POM transmit schema directory, Siemens PLM Software recommends that you back up these directories as a precautionary measure. Back up Teamcenter databases Back up your Oracle server and databases: 1. Export existing Oracle databases. For information, see Export an Oracle database. 2. Terminate Teamcenter-Oracle sessions. For information, see Terminate Oracle sessions. 3. Back up the Oracle installation. For information, see Back up an Oracle installation. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 7-5

122

123 Part IV Web tier installation Install the Teamcenter Web tier, which manages communication between the Teamcenter clients and the enterprise tier. J2EE Web tier installation PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide

124

125 Chapter 8 J2EE Web tier installation J2EE Web tier installation J2EE Web tier prerequisites Install the Web Application Manager Installing thin client Web applications Build the Teamcenter Web Tier Web application Build additional Web applications Install Global Services Supporting files locations Generate Web applications Build a proxy WAR file for WebLogic Migrate legacy thin client URLs Sharing an application server instance for multiple four-tier environments Installing rich client Web applications Install the rich client distribution server Install rich client distribution instances Rich client distribution instance requirements Install a rich client distribution instance Configuring TCCS, Security Services, and proxy settings Configure TCCS for the rich client distribution instance Configure Security Services for the rich client distribution instance Configure reverse proxy settings for the rich client distribution instance Deploying the distribution instance Before you start Deploy the distribution server instance Publish information for users Start and stop the rich client distribution server Start the rich client distribution server Stop the rich client distribution server Managing the rich client distribution server and instances Change the distribution server contents Add components to the distribution server instance Run the distribution server as a service PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide

126

127 Chapter 8 J2EE Web tier installation J2EE Web tier installation J2EE Web tier installation begins with installing the Teamcenter Web Application Manager, a tool that builds thin client and rich client Web applications. With this tool, you can build thin client applications that distribute the Teamcenter thin client to run in Web browsers on client hosts. The Web Application Manager also enables you to install a rich client distribution server and build rich client distribution instances that install the four-tier rich client over a network onto client hosts. Building Web applications with the Web Application Manager consists of the following general steps: 1. Launch the Web Application Manager. 2. Copy the necessary ICD files from the Teamcenter software distribution image. This populates the list of solutions available to install. 3. Create a new Web application. This includes specifying a name and staging location for the Web application, locations of the install images, and the type of solutions it contains. 4. Choose solutions to include in your application. 5. Set context parameters. Context parameters allow you to configure access to Teamcenter services and behavior of Web tier solutions. Most Web tier solutions provide usable default values you can modify as needed after installation, but some parameters must be set during installation to enable the selected solutions. 6. Generate a deployable file. Depending on the solutions you select, the Web Application Manager generates either a Web archive (WAR) or enterprise archive (EAR) file. 7. Deploy the Web application on a supported J2EE application server. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 8-1

128 Chapter 8 J2EE Web tier installation Note Deployment of Web applications is described in the Web Application Deployment Guide. If your network includes client hosts running on an IPv6 network, the J2EE Web tier must be deployed in an application server that supports an IPv6 URL as an external endpoint and uses IPv4 addresses to support all communication with the Teamcenter enterprise tier, such as communication with the J2EE server manager. A typical environment for the J2EE Web tier is a dual-stack machine that supports both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses in which the application server accepts HTTP requests from either IPv4 or IPv6. Teamcenter enterprise tier server components that communicate with other server components in the same network are assumed to be on an IPv4 network and are not supported on IPv6. Teamcenter IPv6 support is limited to clients or integrations that use Teamcenter client communication system (TCCS) and Teamcenter components that communicate with clients on IPv6-enabled networks. J2EE Web tier prerequisites Before you install the J2EE Web tier, make sure you complete the following tasks: Install the Teamcenter server and server manager using Teamcenter Environment Manager as described in Teamcenter server installation. Install a supported third-party J2EE application server and the Java Runtime Environment (JRE) on the Web tier host. 1 If you want to install Teamcenter online help for the Web tier, obtain the Teamcenter 10.1 documentation distribution image. Note Alternatively, you can install the Teamcenter online help library using Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM) rather than installing it as part of the Web tier. Teamcenter developer references, the Teamcenter Data Model Report, and the Teamcenter PDF help collection are not available to install on the J2EE Web tier. These online help components can only be installed to a local host or network file system path using TEM. For more information, see Installing Teamcenter online help. If you use Security Services with the rich client or thin client, install Security Services as described in Security Services installation. 1. For information about supported application servers and Java versions, see the Siemens PLM Software Certification Database ( certification/teamcenter.shtml). 8-2 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

129 J2EE Web tier installation Install the Web Application Manager 1. Create a home directory for the Teamcenter Web tier, for example, /tcweb. This directory is referenced as WEB_ROOT. 2. Change to the WEB_ROOT directory. 3. Type the following command to extract Web Application Manager files to your host: cat image-path/install_tcweb.tz uncompress -c tar xvf - Replace image-path with the full path to the Teamcenter software distribution image. Note On Red Hat Linux systems, use the gzip command instead of uncompress to extract INSTALL_TCWEB.TZ file: cat image-path/install_tcweb.tz gzip d tar xvf 4. To launch the Web Application Manager, change to the WEB_ROOT directory and enter the following command: insweb Installing thin client Web applications The first thin client Web application you build is the Teamcenter Web Tier application, which provides essential thin client functionality. To this application you can add additional thin client solutions, including custom solutions, according to your needs. For information about installing this application, see Build the Teamcenter Web Tier Web application. After you build the Teamcenter Web Tier application, you can build additional Web applications to support Teamcenter features you use, as described in Build additional Web applications. Build the Teamcenter Web Tier Web application 1. Launch the Web Application Manager (insweb). 2. Copy Web tier solution ICDs: a. Click Copy ICDs. In the Copy ICD Files dialog box, click Browse. b. Browse to the Web_tier directory in the root directory of the Teamcenter software distribution image and select the icd directory, and then click Open. c. In the Copy ICD Files dialog box, click OK to load ICD files. 3. To begin creating a Web application, click Add. Web Application Manager displays the Add Web Application dialog box. 4. Create the Teamcenter Web Tier Web application: PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 8-3

130 Chapter 8 J2EE Web tier installation a. In the Name box, type the name of this application, for example, Teamcenter Web Tier. b. In the Staging Location box, enter the path to the location where you want the application files to reside. Typically, this is a directory under the WEB_ROOT directory. Web Application Manager creates the directory you specify if it does not exist. c. Optionally, in the Description box, type a brief description of the application. d. Add the path to the Web_tier directory on the Teamcenter software distribution image to the Disk Locations for Install Images box: image-location/web_tier Use the Add or Modify buttons to add a location or modify an existing one. Note Do not change the default solution type (Thin Client) shown in the Solution Type box. 5. Select the solutions to include in the Teamcenter Web Tier Web application: a. Click Solutions. b. In the Select Solutions dialog box, select the following required solutions: Teamcenter Server Adapter Teamcenter Web Tier Infrastructure Teamcenter Web Tier Core Applications Note Some solutions require other solutions, and some solutions are incompatible with others. When you select a solution, the Web Application Manager automatically selects prerequisite solutions and disables incompatible solutions. c. Optionally, select one or more of the following additional solutions: Solution Teamcenter GM Overlay Teamcenter Online Help Description Provides the Teamcenter Automotive Edition GM Overlay for the Teamcenter thin client. Provides Teamcenter online help for the thin client. Note If you select this solution, you must add the path to the Teamcenter documentation distribution image to the list of Disk Locations for Install Images as in step The Teamcenter documentation distribution image contains the tchelp.jar file that contains the online help files. 8-4 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

131 J2EE Web tier installation Solution Teamcenter Services WSDL/SOAP Support Description Installs the Teamcenter service-oriented architecture (SOA), which provides the ability to develop task-specific clients, utilities, and system integrations for the Teamcenter server. The Teamcenter SOA also ships with WS-I compliant WSDL files for all operations, supporting open industry standards. For more information, see the Services Guide. 6. If you require the deployable file for the Web application to be a distributable file, click Advanced Web Application Options and select the Distributable option. Note A distributable file is required only if you deploy the Web tier application in a cluster configuration. 7. Click OK. The Web Application Manager displays the Modify Required Context Parameters dialog box. 8. Enter values for required context parameters. For most context parameters, you may accept the default values shown. For the Teamcenter Web Tier Web application, you must supply values for the following context parameters: TreeCache Cluster Name 3 TreeCache Mode TreeCache Cluster Port (when using multicast communication protocol) Local Service Port (when using TCP communication protocol) TreeCache Peers (when using TCP communication protocol) Connection Timeout LogVolumeName MAX-POOL-SIZE Enterprise Application Lookup ID Deployable File Name IS_SSO_ENABLED SSO_APPLICATION_ID SSO_LOGIN_SERVICE_URL SSO_SERVICE_URL TcLocale LogVolumeLocation PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 8-5

132 Chapter 8 J2EE Web tier installation Enterprise Application Registration ID To set a context parameter, double-click the Value box for the given parameter and enter the new value. To view a description of any context parameter, click the parameter name in the Modify Required Context Parameters dialog box. For more information about context parameters, see Web tier context parameters. Note Whether your network uses IPv6 (128-bit) or IPv4 (32-bit) addresses, use host names in URLs wherever possible so the domain name system (DNS) can determine which IP address to use. If you must use IP addresses and your network uses IPv6 addresses, enclose the literal IPv6 address in square brackets, for example: 9. Click OK to begin building the Web application. The Web Application Manager displays the status of the installation in the Progress dialog box. When the installation is complete, click OK to close the Progress dialog box. 10. Click Exit to exit the Web Application Manager. 11. Locate the deployable file (tc.ear) generated during installation. This file is in the deployment directory under the specified staging location. Deploy the Web application as described in the Web Application Deployment Guide. 4 Note If your network includes client hosts running on an IPv6 network, the J2EE Web tier must be deployed in an application server that supports an IPv6 URL as an external endpoint and uses IPv4 addresses to support all communication with the Teamcenter enterprise tier, such as communication with the J2EE server manager. A typical environment for the J2EE Web tier is a dual-stack machine that supports both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses in which the application server accepts HTTP requests from either IPv4 or IPv6. Teamcenter enterprise tier server components that communicate with other server components in the same network are assumed to be on an IPv4 network and are not supported on IPv6. Teamcenter IPv6 support is limited to clients or integrations that use Teamcenter client communication system (TCCS) and Teamcenter components that communicate with clients on IPv6-enabled networks. 3. For more information about configuring JBoss Cache TreeCache and setting TreeCache parameters, see The TreeCache implementation also uses the JGroups toolkit. For more information about JGroups, see 4. The Web Application Deployment Guide provides deployment procedures specific to various supported application servers. Choose the appropriate procedure for the application server you use. 8-6 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

133 J2EE Web tier installation Build additional Web applications Depending on the Teamcenter features you use, build one or more of the Web tier applications described in the following table. Feature Application Description Global Services Thin client deployed on WebLogic Express Legacy thin client support Global Services application directory application Global Services Enterprise application Proxy WAR file for WebLogic application Legacy URL support application Provides the application directory functionality required by Global Services. For information about installing this application, see Install Global Services. Provides essential Global Services functionality. You can add Global Services connectors and other components to this application. For information about installing this application, see Install Global Services. Provides support for WebLogic Express as a front-end HTTP listener for the thin client. For information about installing this application, see Build a proxy WAR file for WebLogic. Upgrades legacy thin client URLs to Teamcenter If you are upgrading a previous Teamcenter installation that includes the thin client, generate the legacy URL management application. For information about installing this application, see Migrate legacy thin client URLs. Install Global Services You build Global Services Web applications using the Web Application Manager. Supporting files locations Several Global Services connectors require that you provide the location to files that are provided by the connector s back-end system or from some other source. The location must be accessible to the Web Application Manager as you must enter the path to the file in the Disk Locations for Install Images box. If you plan to include the connector in your Web application, make sure the files identified for the connector are available, and note the path to the file for use in Generate Web applications. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 8-7

134 Chapter 8 J2EE Web tier installation Note As an alternative to having the directories containing dependent connector files accessible to the Web Application Manager, you can copy the dependent files to an accessible location. However, if you do not keep the files in the paths indicated in the ICD file, you must edit the ICD file for the connector to eliminate or correct the path. For example, the Teamcenter Enterprise connector ICD has the following dependent file entry: [COPYFILE] { [FROM] enterprise/mti.jar [TO] lib/enterprise } If you copy the mti.jar file to a Web Application Manager accessible location, it must be in the enterprise directory under the location set in the Disk Location to Add box. Alternatively, you can edit the ICD file to remove enterprise/ from the [FROM] section. Teamcenter Enterprise connector This solution requires the MTI_ROOT\evista\java\classes directory location. This directory contains the mti.jar file and mtiems.jar files required for connecting to Teamcenter Enterprise. The mtiems.jar file contains the import and export functionality that the connector supports for Teamcenter Enterprise. If you are connecting to an earlier version of Teamcenter Enterprise, import and export is not supported and the required mtiems.jar file is not available in this directory. However, after you install the Teamcenter 10.1 Global Services Application Directory solution, the WEB_ROOT\application-directory-staging-directory\webapp_root\lib\enterprise directory for that solution contains a version of this file containing only a manifest file. The easiest approach is to copy the required JAR files (mti.jar and mtiems.jar to WEB_ROOT\application-directory-staging-directory\ webapp_root\ lib\ enterprise directory and add this location to the disk locations for install images in the Web Application Manager. Generate Web applications Note Some solutions require other solutions, and some solutions are incompatible with others. When you select a solution, the Web Application Manager automatically selects prerequisite solutions and disables incompatible solutions. For example, Teamcenter Server Adapter and Teamcenter 10.1 Global Services Framework Enterprise Application are incompatible solutions. 1. Launch the Web Application Manager (insweb.bat). 2. Copy Web tier solution ICDs: a. Click Copy ICDs. b. In the Copy ICD Files dialog box, click Browse. 8-8 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

135 J2EE Web tier installation c. Browse to the Web_tier directory in the Teamcenter software distribution image, select the icd directory, and click Open. d. In the Copy ICD Files dialog box, click OK to load ICD files. 3. Click Add to begin creating Global Services applications. The Web Application Manager displays the Add Web Application dialog box. 4. Create the required undeployable solutions: a. In the Name box, type a name for the application, for example, Application Directory. b. Accept the default value for Staging Location or enter a different directory. c. In the Disk Locations for Install Images box, add the path to the Web_tier directory on the Teamcenter software distribution image. d. Click Advanced Web Application Options. e. In the Advanced Web Application Options dialog box, clear the Automatically Build Deployable File check box. f. Click Solutions. g. In the Select Solutions dialog box, clear all preselected solutions and select the Teamcenter 10.1 Global Services Framework Application Directory solution. Note Do not change the default solution type (Thin Client) in the Solution Type box. 5. Click OK to begin installing the solution. The Web Application Manager displays the installation status in the Progress dialog box. When the installation is complete, click OK to close the Progress dialog box. 6. Click Add to begin creating the Global Services enterprise application. The Web Application Manager displays the Add Web Application dialog box. 7. Create the Global Services enterprise application: a. In the Name box, type a name for the application, for example, Global Services Enterprise Application. b. Accept the default value for Staging Location or enter a different directory. c. Click Advanced Web Application Options. Type a name for the deployable file in the Deployable File Name box (alphanumeric characters only). PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 8-9

136 Chapter 8 J2EE Web tier installation If you require the deployable file to be a distributable file, select the Distributable option. 5 d. (Optional) Enter the application s description in the Description box. Note Do not change the default solution type (Thin Client) shown in the Solution Type box. 8. Select the solutions to include in the Global Services Web application: a. Click Solutions. b. In the Select Solutions dialog box, clear all preselected solutions and select the Teamcenter 10.1 Global Services Framework - Enterprise Application solution. c. Optionally, select sets of additional solutions according to how you use Global Services: If you use these products Teamcenter 2007 or later Teamcenter Enterprise Apache-based Web services JMS messaging EPSync Manager Global Services user interface (for a configuration that does not contain standalone user interface solution) Server-to-server communications for global workflow Select these solutions Teamcenter 10.1 Global Services Framework - Teamcenter SOA Connector Teamcenter 10.1 Global Services Framework - Teamcenter Enterprise Connector Teamcenter 10.1 Global Services Framework - Axis2 Services Teamcenter 10.1 Global Services Framework - JMS Messaging Teamcenter 10.1 Global Services Framework - EPSync Reactor Teamcenter - Web Tier Infrastructure Teamcenter 10.1 Global Services Framework - User Interface Teamcenter 10.1 Global Services Framework - Security Proxy 5. A distributable file is required only if you deploy the Web tier application in a cluster configuration Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

137 J2EE Web tier installation If you use these products Global Services orchestration Teamcenter Sourcing Teamcenter and Teamcenter Enterprise (to share data) Teamcenter Substance Compliance Select these solutions Teamcenter 10.1 Global Services Framework - Ode BPEL Enterprise Application Note This solution must be created and deployed separately from the Teamcenter 10.1 Global Services Framework - Enterprise Application solution. Teamcenter 10.1 Global Services Framework - Teamcenter Sourcing Teamcenter 10.1 Global Services Framework - Data Exchange Teamcenter 10.1 Global Services Framework CPM Connector for Substance Compliance Note Some solutions require other solutions, and some solutions are incompatible with others. When you select a solution, the Web Application Manager automatically selects prerequisite solutions and disables incompatible solutions. If you are installing the Teamcenter Enterprise Connector for Teamcenter Enterprise 2005 SR1 or an earlier release of Teamcenter Enterprise, ensure that you copy the mtiems.jar file to the same location as the mti.jar file. For more information, see Supporting files locations. 9. If you selected a connector that requires supporting files (see Supporting files locations), click Modify Disk Locations and add the path to any supporting files. 10. Click OK. The Web Application Manager displays the Modify Required Context Parameters dialog box. 11. Enter values for required context parameters. For most context parameters, accept the default values shown. At a minimum, Global Services requires values for the following context parameters: To set a context parameter, double-click the Value box for the given parameter and enter the new value. To view a description of any context parameter, click the parameter name in the Modify Required Context Parameters dialog box. For more information about Global Services context parameters, see Global Services context parameters. Note For a description of these parameters, see Global Services context parameters. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 8-11

138 Chapter 8 J2EE Web tier installation ApplicationInstance SSOAppID LogFileLocation TcGSBOSJNDI TcGSJDBCJNDI TcGSMessageServerJNDI TcGSNotifierReactorJNDI TcGSDORJNDI To set a context parameter, double-click the Value box for the given parameter and enter the new value. To view a description of any context parameter, click the parameter name in the Modify Required Context Parameters dialog box. For more information about Global Services context parameters, see Global Services context parameters. 12. Click OK to begin building the Web application. The Web Application Manager displays the installation status in the Progress dialog box. When the installation is complete, click OK to close the Progress dialog box. 13. Click Exit to exit the Web Application Manager. 14. Locate the deployable files (by the names you specified in step 7) generated during installation. This file is in the deployment directory under the specified staging location. Deploy the Web application as described in the Web Application Deployment Guide. 6 Build a proxy WAR file for WebLogic If you use WebLogic Express as a front-end HTTP listener, you must generate a proxy WAR file: 1. Launch the Web Application Manager (insweb). 2. Click Add to begin creating the Web application. Web Application Manager displays the Add Web Application dialog box. 3. Create the proxy WAR file Web application: a. In the Name box, type the name of this application, for example, WebLogic Proxy. b. Accept the default value for Staging Location or enter a different directory. c. Optionally, type a description of the application in Description box. d. Click Advanced Web Application Options. Type a name for the deployable file in the Deployable File Name box (alphanumeric characters only). e. Make sure the Disk Locations for Install Images box includes the path to the Web_tier directory on the Teamcenter software distribution image. 6. The Web Application Deployment Guide provides deployment procedures specific to various supported application servers. Choose the appropriate procedure for the application server you use Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

139 J2EE Web tier installation f. Click Solutions. In the Select Solutions dialog box, clear all preselected solutions and select only the Teamcenter Web Tier Proxy solution. 7 Note Do not change the default solution type (Thin Client) in the Solution Type box. 4. Click OK. The Web Application Manager displays the Modify Required Context Parameters dialog box. 5. Enter values for the following required context parameters: Parameter WebLogicHost WebLogicPort Description Host name of the WebLogic server running the Web tier. The proxy forwards the request to this server. Port number of the WebLogic server instance running the Web tier. The proxy forwards the request to this server. To set a context parameter, double-click the Value box for the given parameter and enter the new value. To view a description of any context parameter, click the parameter name in the Modify Required Context Parameters dialog box. 6. Click OK to begin building the Web application. The Web Application Manager displays the status of the installation in the Progress dialog box. When the installation is complete, click OK to close the Progress dialog box. 7. Click Exit to exit the Web Application Manager. 8. Locate the deployable file by the name you entered in step 3. This file is in the deployment directory under the specified staging location. Deploy the Web application as described in the Web Application Deployment Guide. 8 Migrate legacy thin client URLs If you migrate Web tier applications to Teamcenter 10.1 from Teamcenter engineering process management 2005 or earlier, you must update the link your site uses to access the thin client and the links users saved to objects managed in Teamcenter. Teamcenter 10.1 changes part of the thin client URL from /cgi-bin/iman to /file-name/webclient. The file-name reference is replaced with the name of the Web tier EAR file. For example, if the Web tier EAR file is named tc.ear, the value is /tc. 7. If this solution is not included in the solutions list, copy solution ICD files as described in Build the Teamcenter Web Tier Web application. 8. The Web Application Deployment Guide provides deployment procedures specific to various supported application servers. Choose the appropriate procedure for the application server you use. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 8-13

140 Chapter 8 J2EE Web tier installation To manage this change, install the legacy URL support application (cgi-bin.war) and deploy it on the server where the Teamcenter Enterprise Tier Web application runs. Note Install the Teamcenter - Legacy URL (cgi-bin) Support thin client solution in a separate Web application. This solution is not compatible with other Teamcenter thin client solutions. Deploy the application so that it intercepts legacy requests and redirects them to the new URL location. For example, if the original requests are going to port 9090, deploy the cgi-bin.war application on port If the original requests are going to server1, deploy the cgi-bin.war application on server1. When the cgi-bin.war file is deployed, users who access a legacy /cgi-bin/iman URL are redirected to the /tc/webclient URL with the following message: You have requested a resource which has moved to a new location. Requested URL: New URL: You will be redirected to the new URL automatically in nn seconds or you may click the above link manually. If possible, update your links to reflect the new location. This notification message will be displayed each time an old URL is requested prior to month-day-year. After this time, requested resources that have moved will be automatically redirected to the new URL without notification. When you create cgi-bin.war using Web Application Manager, you control aspects of the application: Whether the application displays the Siemens PLM Software URL message before redirecting users to the new URL. When you choose not to display the Siemens PLM Software URL message, the application redirects users to the new URL but displays no informative message. The period of time (in seconds) the application displays the Siemens PLM Software URL message before redirecting users to the new URL. The date the Siemens PLM Software URL message expires. After this date, the application redirects the users to the new URL but does not display the informative message. The protocol or the port, server, and domain portion of the requested, legacy URL. The application changes the Siemens PLM Software-provided portion of the URL and passes through the site-provided portion of the legacy URL. 1. Launch the Web Application Manager (insweb). 2. Click Add. Web Application Manager displays the Add Web Application dialog box. 3. Create the legacy URL support application Web application: a. In the Name box, type the name of this application, for example, Legacy URL Support. b. Optionally, in the Description box, type a description of the application Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

141 J2EE Web tier installation c. Accept the default value for Staging Location or enter a different directory. d. Make sure the Disk Locations for Install Images box includes the path to the Web_tier directory on the Teamcenter software distribution image. e. Click Solutions. In the Select Solutions dialog box, deselect all preselected solutions and select only the Teamcenter Legacy URL (cgi-bin) Support solution. 9 Note Do not change the default solution type (Thin Client) in the Solution Type box. 4. Click OK. The Web Application Manager displays the Modify Required Context Parameters dialog box. 5. Enter values for the following required context parameters: Parameter TcEngLocale expirydateofresource MovedNotification Description Specifies a locale for messages displayed to the user. This locale must match the locale specified for the Teamcenter Enterprise Tier Web application. Specifies the date the URL message expires. This parameter must contain a value. Enter a value in month-day-year format (mm-dd-yyyy), for example, , or enter one of the following keywords: NEVER Specifies that the URL message never expires. NOW Specifies that no message or notification regarding the resource move is displayed to the user. The user is immediately redirected to the new URL. To set a context parameter, double-click the Value box for the given parameter and enter the new value. To view a description of any context parameter, click the parameter name in the Modify Required Context Parameters dialog box. 6. Click OK to begin building the Web application. The Web Application Manager displays the status of the installation in the Progress dialog box. When the installation is complete, click OK to close the Progress dialog box. 9. If this solution is not included in the solutions list, copy solution ICD files as described in Build the Teamcenter Web Tier Web application. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 8-15

142 Chapter 8 J2EE Web tier installation 7. Click Exit to exit the Web Application Manager. 8. Locate the deployable file (cgi-bin.war) generated during installation. This file is in the deployment directory under the specified staging location. Deploy the Web application as described in the Web Application Deployment Guide. 10 Note After installation, you can optionally modify the following context parameters for legacy URL support: requestredirectedto replacementfor CGIBIN_IMAN redirectionwaittime For information about these context parameters, see Web tier context parameters. Sharing an application server instance for multiple four-tier environments Teamcenter supports deploying more than one instance of the same Teamcenter Web tier application (EAR file) into one application server instance. Multiple EAR files can be configured to run as discrete applications, each with a unique entry point. This allows you to connect each application to a different enterprise tier without the need to manage multiple application server instances. The following example shows a possible scenario with three Web applications (EAR files) deployed in a single application server instance. Client tier Web tier Enterprise tier Clients Single application server instance Server managers Resource tier Databases Client A fi fi svrmgr11 fi DB1 Client fi fi svrmgr2 fi DB2 B fi fi svrmgr3 fi DB3 To deploy multiple Web applications in a single Web application server instance, perform the following tasks: 1. Install multiple server managers with unique TreeCache settings. For information about installing a server manager, see Installing the server manager. 2. Create Web applications as described in Build the Teamcenter Web Tier Web application. Assign each application a unique name. 10. The Web Application Deployment Guide provides deployment procedures specific to various supported application servers. Choose the appropriate procedure for the application server you use Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

143 J2EE Web tier installation 3. Set the following Web tier context parameters to unique values for each Web application. Context parameter DEPLOYABLE-FILE-NAME Enterprise Application Registration ID Enterprise Application Lookup ID Description Name of the deployable file you are creating for the Web tier application. Identifier for the Web application. This ID is used to register the application s EJB and J2C connector. If you want to deploy multiple Teamcenter Web tier applications in a single application server instance, each application must be assigned a unique ID. Specifies the ID by which the Teamcenter presentation tier accesses the application identified by the Enterprise Application Registration ID parameter. If you deploy your EAR file with other EAR files in the same application server instance, these two IDs should be set to the same value for a given application. 4. Deploy Web application EAR files in the Web application server instance. Note For more information, see the Web Application Deployment Guide. Multiple EAR file deployment is not supported on JBoss. If you use JBoss as your Web application server, you must deploy each EAR file in a separate application server instance. Installing rich client Web applications Preparing the Teamcenter Web tier to distribute the four-tier rich client to client hosts over a network requires the following tasks: 1. Install a rich client distribution server. The rich client distribution server manages the connection between rich client distribution server instances and the Over-the-Web Installer. The Over-the-Web Installer contacts the distribution server for the rich client files to download to the client host. For more information, see Install the rich client distribution server. 2. Install a rich client distribution instance or instances. For more information, see Install rich client distribution instances. 3. Deploy the Web components in a Web server. The Web components include the Over-the-Web Installer and the HTML pages that launch the Over-the-Web Installer. For more information, see Deploying the distribution instance. 4. Start the distribution server. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 8-17

144 Chapter 8 J2EE Web tier installation For more information, see Start the rich client distribution server. Note The two-tier rich client is installed only through Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM). Over-the-Web installation is supported only for the four-tier rich client. If your network includes client hosts running on an IPv6 network, the J2EE Web tier must be deployed in an application server that supports an IPv6 URL as an external endpoint and uses IPv4 addresses to support all communication with the Teamcenter enterprise tier, such as communication with the J2EE server manager. A typical environment for the J2EE Web tier is a dual-stack machine that supports both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses in which the application server accepts HTTP requests from either IPv4 or IPv6. Teamcenter enterprise tier server components that communicate with other server components in the same network are assumed to be on an IPv4 network and are not supported on IPv6. Teamcenter IPv6 support is limited to clients or integrations that use Teamcenter client communication system (TCCS) and Teamcenter components that communicate with clients on IPv6-enabled networks. Install the rich client distribution server 1. Start the Web Application Manager: a. Change to the Web_tier directory. b. Enter the following command: insweb The Web Application Manager displays the Teamcenter Web Application Manager dialog box. 2. Click Copy ICDs. The Web Application Manager displays the Copy ICD Files dialog box. 3. Enter the path to the icd directory in the rich client over-the-web software distribution image and click OK. Note Ensure that the icd folder is in the Source box of the Copy ICD Files dialog box. The Web Application Manager displays a Progress dialog box and copies and loads the ICD files. 4. To ensure that ICD files are copied, check the Progress dialog box. When ICD files are copied, a list of ICD files follows the Copying ICD files... notice. If no files are listed, Web Application Manager did not find files to copy in the directory you supplied. If the copy was not successful, repeat steps 2 and 3, ensuring that you include the icd directory in the path. Not including the icd directory is the most common reason ICD files are not copied Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

145 J2EE Web tier installation 5. Click OK in the Progress dialog box. The Web Application Manager displays the Teamcenter Web Application Manager dialog box. 6. In the Teamcenter Web Application Manager dialog box, click Add. The Web Application Manager displays the Add Web Application dialog box. 7. In the Name box, type the name of this application, for example, Teamcenter OTW Distribution Server. 8. In the Staging Location box, type the path to the location where you want the distribution server software and administration files to reside. Typically, you would install the distribution server software in a directory under the Web_tier directory, the directory in which you installed the Web Application Manager on your hard drive. Note This directory must be empty. The Web Application Manager creates the directory if it does not exist. Note the staging location path of this distribution server for later use. 9. Optionally, in the Description box, type a brief description of this distribution server. 10. Click the Add button adjacent to the Disk Locations for Install Images box. The Web Application Manager displays the Add Disk Location dialog box. 11. In the Disk Location To Add box, type the path to the icd directory in the thin client over-the-web software distribution image and click OK. The Web Application Manager displays the Add Web Application dialog box with the path you entered displayed in the Disk Locations for Install Images box. 12. Choose Distribution Server from the Solution Type list. The Web Application Manager displays Distribution Server in the Selected Solutions box. Note If Distribution Server is not in the Solution Type list, the required ICD files were not copied correctly. To copy the ICD files, repeat steps 2 through Click OK. The Web Application Manager displays the Modify Required Context Parameters dialog box. 14. Type values for the following context parameters: PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 8-19

146 Chapter 8 J2EE Web tier installation Parameter RMI Port Remote Object Port File Transfer Port Value Specifies the port number used by the rich client distribution server, a remote method invocation (RMI) registry server. The default value, 12099, is in a range that is typically available. Note Record the RMI port number for future use. It is required when creating the distribution server instance. Specifies the port on which the distribution server listens for over-the-web installers. The default value, 0, allows the distribution server to pick an available port at run time. If you want to use a specific port, enter a nonzero port number. This is helpful if, for example, a firewall exists between distribution server and over-the-web installation clients. Specifies the port the distribution server uses to transfer files to client hosts. The default value, 0, allows the distribution server to pick an available port at runtime. If you want to use a specific port, enter a nonzero port number. This is helpful if, for example, a firewall exists between the distribution server and over-the-web installation clients. 15. Click OK. The Web Application Manager begins installing the distribution server and displays a Progress dialog box. 16. When the Progress dialog box indicates that installation is complete, click OK. The Web Application Manager displays the Teamcenter Web Application Manager dialog box with the distribution server software you installed listed as an application in the Web Applications box. 17. Either click Exit to exit the Web Application Manager or click Add to begin installing the rich client distribution server instance. Install rich client distribution instances The Teamcenter rich client instance you install works only in a deployment of the four-tier architecture. For each unique rich client configuration, you must create a distribution server instance. Rich client distribution instance requirements Before you build a rich client distribution instance, ensure that the following software is installed and configured: Teamcenter corporate server 8-20 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

147 J2EE Web tier installation For information, see Teamcenter server installation. Rich client distribution server For more information, see Install the rich client distribution server. If you use Security Services with the rich client, make sure Security Services is installed and configured. For information, see Security Services installation and the Security Services Installation/Customization guide. Make sure the Web Application Manager has access to the following software images: Complete rich client over-the-web software distribution image Note The rich client over-the-web software distribution image includes files for all supported Windows, UNIX, and Linux platforms. The Web Application Manager requires access to all of these to build the Over-the-Web Installer. Teamcenter lifecycle visualization software distribution image Note If you include Lifecycle Visualization in your rich client distribution instance, and you use downloaded software images instead of a DVD: 1. Download the release_vis_all.zip file. Replace release with the current Teamcenter release level. 2. Expand the release_vis_all.zip archive to a directory on your local host. 3. When building your rich client distribution instance, enter the location of this directory in the context parameter in the Web Application Manager. Obtain values for the required rich client parameters. You must provide these values when building the rich client distribution instance. Note Required parameters must have values specified. If a required parameter has no significance for your deployment (for example, a UNIX location in an environment of all Windows systems), accept the default value. Whether your network uses IPv6 (128-bit) or IPv4 (32-bit) addresses, use host names in URLs wherever possible so the domain name system (DNS) can determine which IP address to use. If you must use IP addresses and your network uses IPv6 addresses, enclose the literal IPv6 address in square brackets, for example: PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 8-21

148 Chapter 8 J2EE Web tier installation Parameter RMI Port WindowsLocation UnixLocation WebBrowserUnixLocation RichClientHelpWebServer RichClientHelpLocation Description Port number used by the rich client distribution server. This value was determined when the distribution server was installed. The default is Location on the client host where you want the Over-the-Web Installer to download rich client files on Microsoft Windows systems by default. The drive must exist on the client hosts prior to rich client installation, and users must have write permission to it. For example, if the installation location is F:\Teamcenter\rich_client, every Windows client host must have an F drive, and users must have permissions to create Teamcenter\rich_client. Location on the client host where you want the Over-the-Web Installer to download rich client files on UNIX systems by default. The mount must exist on the client hosts prior to rich client installation, and users must have write permission to it. Location of a Web browser on Linux client systems. This location must be available for Linux client hosts. URL specifying the name of the host and the port where the Web tier or presentation tier application files are deployed in an application server. This parameter works together with the RichClientHelpLocation parameter to determine how rich client users access help: To enable accessing help over the Web, set the parameter value to Do not supply the remainder of the path to the help files (that information is supplied in the RichClientHelpLocation parameter). To enable accessing help using direct file access, set this parameter to file://. Path to the Teamcenter Help Library files. This parameter works together with the RichClientHelpWebServer parameter to determine how rich client users access help: To enable accessing help using direct file access, set the value of this parameter to the full path to the help files. You must supply paths for Windows, UNIX, and Linux systems. To enable accessing help over the Web, enter the full path to the installed help library index.html file Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

149 J2EE Web tier installation Parameter HTTPUseGZip ParentFSCAddressTable HTTPServerTable Description Indicates whether the rich client prefers responses from the J2EE server in a compressed (gzipped) form. Compressing responses reduces the bandwidth requirement significantly, and should be considered, especially in lower bandwidth network environment. When set to true, the server may send responses without compression depending on the server configuration. When set to false, the server never compresses responses for this rich client. List of addresses (host name and port) of the FMS file server caches (FSC) to act as the parents of the installed FMS file client cache. For information on the FMS file client cache and FMS file server cache, see Installing File Management System. List of Web tier application servers; the first server in the list is the default server for logon. Requires the following information for each server: URI URL of the Web tier SOAP endpoint. The value depends on where the Web tier application is deployed. Typically it has the form: Name Display name of the URL for the rich client graphical user interface. SSOAppID Provides the Teamcenter application ID and sets the TC_SSO_APP_ID environment variable for Security Services. The value you provide in this context parameter is used only when Security Services is enabled and either multiple Teamcenter sites are served by a single identity provider or the Security Services service is configured to use an ID other than TC. When the multiple sites have different sets of users authorized to use the application for each installation, or different identifications in each installation, this value identifies which installation is authenticated. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 8-23

150 Chapter 8 J2EE Web tier installation Parameter JREWindows64Location JREWindows64Location JREUNIXLocation Description Specifies the path to the Java Runtime Environment (JRE) on the client host during installation of the rich client through the Over-the-Web Installer on 64-bit versions of Windows. By default, the Over-the-Web Installer uses the value of the JRE64_HOME environment variable on the target client host. Change the value of this context parameter if you want to specify a different path. Specifies the path to the Java Runtime Environment (JRE) on the client host during installation of the rich client through the Over-the-Web Installer on 32-bit versions of Windows. By default, the Over-the-Web Installer uses the value of the JRE32_HOME environment variable on the target client host. Change the value of this context parameter if you want to specify a different path. Specifies the path to the Java Runtime Environment (JRE) on the client host during installation of the rich client through the Over-the-Web Installer on Linux systems. By default, the Over-the-Web Installer uses the value of the JRE_HOME environment variable on the target client host. Change the value of this context parameter if you want to specify a different path. Depending on the solutions you include in your rich client distribution instance, you may need to provide values for the additional parameters shown in the following tables. Rich client optional parameter values Parameter TeamcenterSSOService Description Complete URL of the Security Services Identity Service Web application. This information is required only when you configure the rich client to log on using the optional Security Services. This URL is determined when Security Services is installed and configured. You must provide the same URL used to configure Security Services on the Web tier Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

151 J2EE Web tier installation Rich client optional parameter values Parameter TeamcenterSSOlogonURL TeamcenterSSOAppID FMSProxyHTTPHost FMSProxyHTTPPort Description Complete URL of the Security Services logon Service Web application. This information is required only when you configure the rich client to log on using the optional Security Services. This URL is determined when Security Services is installed and configured. You must provide the same URL used to configure Security Services on the Web tier. Application ID assigned to this instance of Teamcenter in the Security Services application registry. This information is required only when you configure the rich client to log on using the optional Security Services and when multiple Teamcenter sites are either served by a single identity provider or the Security Services service is configured to use an ID other than TC. This ID is determined when Security Services is installed and configured. You must provide the same URL used to configure Security Services on the Web tier. When the multiple sites have different sets of users authorized to use the Teamcenter application for each installation, or different identifications in each installation, this value identifies which installation is authenticated. Name of HTTP proxy server host for File Management System (FMS) communication. If you do not specify a host, the rich client does not communicate with FMS using an HTTP proxy server. To configure an HTTP proxy server, you must also specify a value for the FMSProxyHTTPPort parameter. Number of port for HTTP proxy server for File Management System (FMS) communication. If you do not specify a port number, the rich client does not communicate with FMS using an HTTP proxy server. To configure an HTTP proxy server, you must also specify a value for the FMSProxyHTTPHost parameter. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 8-25

152 Chapter 8 J2EE Web tier installation Rich client optional parameter values Parameter FMSProxyHTTPSHost FMSProxyHTTPSPort Description Name of HTTPS proxy server host for File Management System (FMS) communication. If you do not specify a host, the rich client does not communicate with FMS using an HTTPS proxy server. To configure an HTTPS proxy server, you must also specify a value for the FMSProxyHTTPSPort parameter. Number of port for HTTPS proxy server for File Management System (FMS) communication. If you do not specify a port number, the rich client does not communicate with FMS using an HTTPS proxy server. To configure an HTTPS proxy server, you must also specify a value for the FMSProxyHTTPSHost parameter. Lifecycle Visualization (embedded viewer) parameter and table values Parameter EmbVisLicenseLevel EmbVisUnixLocation EmbVisWindowsLocation Description License level for the embedded viewer: Mockup, Professional, Standard, or Base. The Base license is available for all users of the rich client. The other license levels are purchased separately. Location on a UNIX system of the installed embedded viewer Web application to be configured with this rich client. Location on a Windows system of the installed embedded viewer Web application to be configured with this rich client. Lifecycle Visualization (stand-alone application viewer) parameter and table values Parameter TcVisWindowsLocation Description Full path to the stand-alone application viewer installation location on Windows client hosts. Users install the stand-alone application viewer on client hosts using the Teamcenter lifecycle visualization installation program. This location must be the same for all Windows clients Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

153 J2EE Web tier installation Lifecycle Visualization (stand-alone application viewer) parameter and table values Parameter TcVisUnixLocation Description Full path to the stand-alone application viewer installation location on Linux client hosts. Users install the stand-alone application viewer on client hosts using the Teamcenter lifecycle visualization installation program. This location must be the same for all Linux clients. Teamcenter Integration for NX parameter and table values Parameter NXWindowsLocation NXUnixLocation NXVersion Description Full path to the NX installation location on Windows client hosts. Users install the NX application on client hosts using the NX installation program. This location must be the same for all Windows clients installing this instance. Full path to the NX installation location on Linux client hosts. Users install the NX application on client hosts using the NX installation program. This location must be the same for all Linux clients installing this instance. Version of NX installed on client hosts. Users install the Teamcenter Integration for NX application on client hosts using the NX installation program. This version must be the same for all clients installing this instance. The default value, V22.0, specifies NX 4; V21.0 specifies NX 3. Content Management System for Rich Client 4-Tier values Parameter CMSWebAppServerTable Description The list of the locations of the Content Management Web servers. The entries correspond to the associated Teamcenter URI sequences. Leave the field blank if the Teamcenter URI does not have a corresponding Content Management Web Server URL. Install a rich client distribution instance Install the rich client instance on the same host and in the same directory as the distribution server. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 8-27

154 Chapter 8 J2EE Web tier installation Note If your Teamcenter network contains 32-bit and 64-bit systems, you must provide 32-bit and 64-bit rich client distribution instances. Users with 32-bit Web browsers must use the 32-bit Over-the-Web Installer, and users with 64-bit Web browsers must use the 64-bit Over-the-Web Installer. 1. Start the Web Application Manager: a. Change to the Web_tier directory. b. Enter the following command: insweb The Web Application Manager displays the Teamcenter Web Application Manager dialog box. 2. Enter the path to the icd directory in the rich client over-the-web distribution image and click OK. The Web Application Manager displays a Progress dialog box and copies the ICD files. 3. When copying is complete, click OK. The Web Application Manager displays the Teamcenter Web Application Manager dialog box. 4. In the Teamcenter Web Application Manager dialog box, click Add. The Web Application Manager displays the Add Web Application dialog box. 5. In the Name box, type a name for this instance. Choose a name that uniquely identifies this Web application instance. 6. In the Staging Location box, enter the path to the directory where you want to install the rich client image files for downloading to clients. Typically, you would install the rich client distribution instance files in a directory under the Web_tier directory, the directory in which you installed the Web Application Manager on your hard drive. Note This directory must be empty. The Web Application Manager creates the directory if it does not exist. Note the staging location path of this distribution server instance for later use. 7. Optionally, in the Description box, type a brief description of this instance. 8. Click the adjacent Add button adjacent to the Disk Locations for Install Images box. The Web Application Manager displays the Add Disk Location dialog box. 9. In the Disk Location to Add box, enter the paths to the following installation images: 8-28 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

155 J2EE Web tier installation Enter the path to the icd directory in the rich client over-the-web installation image. Enter the paths to the Teamcenter lifecycle visualization installation images for each operating system. Note For each instance, the Over-the-Web Installer requires access to the installation images files for all operating systems. 10. Click OK. Web Application Manager displays the Add Web Application dialog box with the paths you entered displayed in the Disk Locations for Install Images box. 11. In the Solution Type list, choose Distribution Server Instance. The Selected Solutions list automatically includes the following required solutions: Over-the-Web Installer Microsoft Visual C /2008/2010 Redistributables Teamcenter client communication system Rich Client 4-Tier 12. If you want to include additional solutions in the distribution instance, click Solutions and select the applications you want installed with the rich client. For information about available rich client solutions, see Rich client solutions. 13. When you are satisfied with your selections in the Add Web Application dialog box, click OK. The Web Application Manager displays the Modify Required Context Parameters dialog box. 14. Enter a value for each parameter and click OK. Note For descriptions of the rich client required parameters, see Rich client distribution instance requirements. The other required parameters vary, depending on the applications you are installing with the rich client instance. For descriptions, see Rich client distribution instance requirements. The required parameters must have values specified. If a required parameter has no significance for your deployment (for example, a UNIX location in an environment of all Windows systems), retain the default value. The Web Application Manager displays the Modify Required Table dialog boxes for the HTTPServerTable and the ParentFSCAddressTable. 15. For each table, type the values for each parameter. To add another row to the table, click Add Row. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 8-29

156 Chapter 8 J2EE Web tier installation Note Whether your network uses IPv6 (128-bit) or IPv4 (32-bit) addresses, use host names in URLs wherever possible so the domain name system (DNS) can determine which IP address to use. If you must use IP addresses and your network uses IPv6 addresses, enclose the literal IPv6 address in square brackets, for example: Table HTTPServerTable Description Type a list of Web tier application servers; the first server in the list is the default server for logon. Requires the following information for each server: URI URL of the Web-tier SOAP endpoint. The value depends on where the Web tier application is deployed. Typically it has the form: Name Display name of the URL for the rich client user interface. Note If you use Teamcenter client communication system (TCCS), you do not need to supply values for the HTTPServerTable table because you specify these when you define TCCS environments. For more information, see Configure TCCS for the rich client distribution instance. If you use Security Services in applet-free mode, append /tccs to the end of the TcSS Login URL value, for example: This setting uses TCCS for communication between Security Services and the logon service, but not for SOA requests to a Teamcenter server or Web tier Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

157 J2EE Web tier installation Table Description ParentFSCAddressTable Type a list of addresses (host name and port) of the FMS file server caches (FSC) to act as the parents of the installed FMS file client cache. For information on the FMS file client cache and FMS file server cache, see Installing File Management System. Note If you use Teamcenter client communication system (TCCS), you do not need to supply values 16. When you complete each table, click OK. When you complete setting values for the last table, the Web Application Manager displays a Progress dialog box and performs the following tasks: Extracts the rich client image files into the webapp_root directory under the staging location directory (named in step 6). Creates the manifest file (ds_manifest.mf) in the staging location directory (named in step 6). The manifest file records and maintains information about the rich client image files, including a list of the files and a version for each file. The Over-the-Web Installer consults the manifest file to determine which files to download. 17. When the Progress dialog box indicates that installation is complete, click OK. The Web Application Manager displays the Teamcenter Web Application Manager dialog box. 18. Click Exit to exit the Web Application Manager. To make the rich client distribution instance available to client hosts, deploy the distribution instance on a supported Web application server. For more information, see Deploying the distribution instance. Configuring TCCS, Security Services, and proxy settings If you use Teamcenter client communication system (TCCS) or Security Services, or if you connect to Teamcenter through a reverse proxy, you must modify settings in your rich client distribution instance using the Modify Web Application dialog box in the Web Application Manager. Configure TCCS for the rich client distribution instance 1. In the Web Application Manager, select your four-tier rich client application in the Web Applications list, and then click Modify. 2. In the Modify Web Application dialog box, click Modify Context Parameters. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 8-31

158 Chapter 8 J2EE Web tier installation 3. In the Modify Context Parameters dialog box, enter values for TCCS context parameters, and then click OK to continue. Context Parameter Client Communication System Switch Client Tag Filter TcCSShareConfiguration TcCSProxyConnectionType TcCSKerberosSupport TcCSKrb5File Description Specifies whether to enable TCCS to handle communication between the client application and the Web tier. If you want to enable TCCS, set this parameter to on; otherwise, set it to off. Specifies a pattern to apply when filtering TCCS environments. Wildcard characters (*) are allowed. The Client Tag Filter pattern is compared to the Tag parameters on defined TCCS environments. Environments that do not fit the pattern are not available to the rich client. For example, if the rich client Client Tag Filter value is 9.*, all TCCS environments with Tag values beginning with 9. are available to the rich client. Environments with Tag values beginning with 10 are not available. Specifies whether the TCCS configuration is a private or shared environment. If this is a private environment, set this parameter to false. If it is a shared environment, set this parameter to true. Specifies whether to use specify the proxy connection type. If you do not use a proxy, set this parameter to Do not use proxy. Otherwise, accept the default value. Specifies whether to use Kerberos authentication for Teamcenter logon. If you use Kerberos, set this parameter to true; otherwise, set it to false. Note Teamcenter supports Kerberos authentication only on Windows client hosts. Specifies the path to the Kerberos configuration file (krb5.ini). If you leave this parameter empty, the client uses the default Kerberos configuration file. On Windows systems, the default krb5.ini file is in the C:\Windows directory Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

159 J2EE Web tier installation Context Parameter TcCSAlwaysPromptForUserID Description Specifies whether to always prompt for a Kerberos user name. If you want to enable zero sign-on functionality on Windows hosts, set this parameter to false. This setting uses the native operating system user ID for Kerberos authentication on the client host. Zero sign-on allows Windows users to launch a Teamcenter client without being prompted to log on to Teamcenter. 4. In the Modify Web Application dialog box, click Modify Tables. 5. In the Modify Tables dialog box, select the TcCSEnvironmentTable table, and then click Modify. 6. In the Modify Table dialog box, click Add Row. Enter values for the TCCS environment and then click OK to continue. Value Name URI Tag TcSS Application ID Description Specifies the name of a the TCCS environment. This name is displayed in the TCCS logon dialog after configuration is complete. Specifies the URI to the TCCS environment. This is the endpoint URI for the Web tier deployment, for example, Specifies a string identifier for the TCCS environment. When installing a rich client, you can optionally provide a Client Tag Filter value to filter the list of environments displayed in the rich client to those environments that match the filter. For example, if the Client Tag Filter value is 9*, all TCCS environments with Tag values beginning with 9 are available to the client host. Environments with Tag values beginning with 10 are not available. Note You set the Client Tag Filter value in step 3. Specifies the ID of the Security Services application you use with TCCS. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 8-33

160 Chapter 8 J2EE Web tier installation Value TcSS Login URL Description Specifies the URL to the Security Services application you use with TCCS. If you use Security Services in applet-free mode, include /tccs at the end of the URL, for example: Note Whether your network uses IPv6 (128-bit) or IPv4 (32-bit) addresses, use host names in URIs and URLs wherever possible so the domain name system (DNS) can determine which IP address to use. If you must use IP addresses and your network uses IPv6 addresses, enclose the literal IPv6 address in square brackets, for example: 7. In the Modify Web Application dialog windows, click OK to apply your changes. 8. Exit the Web Application Manager and redeploy the rich client distribution instance. Configure Security Services for the rich client distribution instance 1. Launch the Web Application Manager. 2. In the Web Applications box, select the Web application that contains the rich client distribution instance and click Modify. The Web Application Manager displays the Modify Web Application dialog box. 3. Click Modify Context Parameters. Web Application Manager displays the Modify Context Parameters dialog box. 4. Type values for the Security Services context parameters, and then click OK. For descriptions of Security Services context parameters, see Web tier context parameters. 5. Exit the Web Application Manager and redeploy the rich client distribution instance. For more information about installing and configuring Security Services, see the Security Services Installation/Customization. Configure reverse proxy settings for the rich client distribution instance If you must connect to a Teamcenter environment through a reverse proxy server (such as WebSEAL or SiteMinder), you may need to configure TCCS reverse proxy settings for SiteMinder or WebSEAL by performing the following steps: 1. In the Web Application Manager, select your four-tier rich client application in the Web Applications list, and then click Modify Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

161 J2EE Web tier installation 2. In the Modify Web Application dialog box, click Modify Tables. 3. In the Modify Tables dialog box, select the TcCSReverseProxyConfigurationTable table, and then click Modify. 4. In the Modify Table dialog box, click Add Row. 5. In the Add Row to Table dialog box, in the Criteria String box, type the appropriate value. SiteMinder: Note WebSEAL: checkheaders,false This setting configures TCCS to detect form-based challenges originating from the reverse proxy. This setting also applies to other reverse proxy servers that do not send specific header information in the 200 form-based challenge. server,webseal,:/pkmslogin.form Click OK and close dialog boxes until you return to the Modify Web Application dialog box. 6. Generate a deployable file and deploy the rich client distribution instance. Deploying the distribution instance Deploy the rich client distribution instance on a supported Web application server. Note If your Teamcenter network contains 32-bit and 64-bit systems, you must deploy 32-bit and 64-bit rich client distribution instances. Users with 32-bit Web browsers must use the 32-bit Over-the-Web Installer, and users with 64-bit Web browsers must use the 64-bit Over-the-Web Installer. Before you start Install a supported third-party Web server. A rich client distribution instance requires a Web server, such as Apache HTTP Server. You can also use an application server, such as IBM WebSphere, but it is not required. For information about supported Web servers and application servers, see the Siemens PLM Software Certification Database: certification/teamcenter.shtml Deploy the distribution server instance Web Application Manager installs the following files in the webapp_root/otwweb directory under the distribution server instance staging location. otw_installer.jar file Contains the Over-the-Web Installer. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 8-35

162 Chapter 8 J2EE Web tier installation images directory Contains all images used by the Web pages. installed.html file Contains the English version of the HTML page displayed with installation completes successfully. installfailed.html file Contains the English version of the HTML page displayed when installation fails. installing.html file Contains the English version of the HTML page for launching the Over-the-Web Installer. launcherror.html file Contains the English version of the HTML page displayed to the user when the Over-the-Web Installer cannot install the rich client due to one of the following problems: o o o The connection to the Web is not available or the user has not provided permissions to install. The required Java Plug-in is not available and cannot be installed automatically. Java and or JavaScript are disabled in the Web browser. otw.html file Contains the logic for detecting the Web browser and Java Plug-in required for installing the rich client over the Web. localized directory Contains subdirectories for each supported locale other than English (French, German, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Russian, S_Chinese, Spanish, and T_Chinese). The subdirectories contain localized versions of the installing.html and error.html files. To use a localized version of the installation, deploy the localized installing.html and error.html files rather than the English versions Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

163 J2EE Web tier installation Note Before deploying a localized installing.html file, you must edit it as follows: 1. Using a text editor, find the following two lines and in each replace change_me_instance with the name of the instance: <param name="instance" value="change_me_instance> instance="change_me_instance" 2. Find the following two lines and in each replace change_me_server with the name of the server host: <param name="server_name" value="change_me_server> server_name="change_me_server" When editing the preceding information, do not delete the quotation marks. For each distribution server instance you create, deploy these files in a Web server. If you are creating multiple rich client distribution instances, consider creating a unique directory in the Web server documentation root for each instance and copy all the files in the webapp_root/otwweb directory there. For detailed deployment information, see the documentation for the Web server. The following examples use the name of the instance for the Web component directory name: Web server Apache HTTP Server Deployment 1. In the conf configuration file, find the HTTP document root directory: DocumentRoot document-root-path 2. Create the instance-name directory under the HTTP document root directory. 3. Copy the rich client Web file to the instance-name directory. 4. Publish the following URL: Apache Tomcat 1. In the server.xml configuration file, find the HTTP document base directory. For example: <!-- Tomcat Root Context --> <!-- <Context path="" docbase="root" debug="0"/> --> 2. Create the instance-name directory under the HTTP document base directory. 3. Copy the rich client Web components to the instance-name directory. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 8-37

164 Chapter 8 J2EE Web tier installation Web server Deployment 4. Publish the following URL: Sun Java System 1. In the config configuration file, find the HTTP document root directory. For example: <VARS docroot="document-root-path"> 2. Create the instance-name directory under the HTTP document base directory. 3. Copy the rich client Web components to the instance-name directory. 4. Publish the following URL: IBM WebSphere 1. Find the document root directory (HTTP server core settings in the administration server console). 2. Create the instance-name directory under the HTTP document root directory. 3. Copy the Web components to the instance-name directory. 4. Publish the following URL: Publish information for users To enable users to install the rich client over the Web, publish the following information: URL where the Web components are located. The location in which the rich client will be installed on user workstations. Users must have write permissions for this location. For rich client instances that include support for Teamcenter lifecycle visualization or NX, the locations in which users must install Teamcenter lifecycle visualization and NX. Note If your Teamcenter network contains 32-bit and 64-bit systems, you must provide 32-bit and 64-bit rich client distribution instances. Users with 32-bit Web browsers must use the 32-bit Over-the-Web Installer, and users with 64-bit Web browsers must use the 64-bit Over-the-Web Installer Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

165 J2EE Web tier installation Start and stop the rich client distribution server You can start and stop the rich client distribution server as described in the following sections. Start the rich client distribution server 1. Go to the staging location directory you created for the distribution server. This is the directory containing the distribution server application and administration utilities. 2. In the webapp_root subdirectory find and run the start_rmi program file. The start_rmi program file starts the Java remote method invocation (RMI) registry. 3. In the webapp_root subdirectory, find and run the start_server program file. The start_server program file starts the distribution server. When this distribution server is successfully started, it displays the following message: Distribution Server Started When the distribution server is running, rich client can be installed over the Web. Stop the rich client distribution server Stop a rich client distribution server from a local computer by using the control-c keys on the distribution server console. The distribution server stops, and cleanup progress is reported. To stop a rich client distribution server from a remote computer, or if you changed the port number the RMI registry is running on, you must have file access to the stop_server program file and the dist_server.jar file in the webapp_root subdirectory of the distribution server staging location. To stop the distribution server, enter the following command: stop_server host-name:port-number Replace host-name with the name of the computer where the distribution server is running. Replace port-number with the port number. The stop_server program prints the results of the remote shutdown. If the results include Java exceptions, errors occurred. Usually exceptions occur when no distribution server is running on the specified host. To stop the RMI registry, use the operating system facilities. The operating system facilities stop the RMI registry server. Managing the rich client distribution server and instances After a rich client distribution server and server instances are installed and configured, you can change the distribution server contents, add components to a distribution server instance, and patch components in a distribution server instance. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 8-39

166 Chapter 8 J2EE Web tier installation Note To allow automatic updating of a rich client when users start a Teamcenter session, do not change the name of the distribution instance. Change the distribution server contents 1. Stop the rich client distribution server. For information, see Stop the rich client distribution server. 2. Replace the existing dist_server.jar file with the new JAR file. The dist_server.jar is in the in the webapp_root subdirectory of the staging location for the distribution server. 3. Restart the rich client distribution server. For information, see Start the rich client distribution server. Add components to the distribution server instance 1. Launch the Web Application Manager: a. Change to the Web_tier directory. b. Enter the following command: insweb The Web Application Manager displays the Teamcenter Web Application Manager dialog box. 2. Click Copy ICDs. The Web Application Manager displays the Copy ICD Files dialog box. 3. Enter the path to the icd directory in the Rich Client Over-the-Web distribution image and click OK. The Web Application Manager displays a Progress dialog box and copies the ICD files. 4. When copying is complete, click OK. The Web Application Manager displays the Teamcenter Web Application Manager dialog box. 5. In the Web Applications list, select the distribution server instance you want to add components to and click Modify. The Web Application Manager displays the Modify Web Application dialog box. 6. Click Modify Disk Locations. The Web Application Manager displays the Modify Disk Locations dialog box. 7. Ensure the paths to the installation images of components you want to add are listed in the Disk Locations for Install Images box Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

167 J2EE Web tier installation For example, if you intend to add the embedded viewer to the rich client, enter the paths to the Teamcenter lifecycle visualization installation images for each operating system. Note For each instance, the Over-the-Web Installer requires access to the installation images files for all operating systems. 8. Click Add Solutions. The Web Application Manager displays the Add Solutions dialog box. 9. Select the components you want to add and click OK. If the solution you are adding has required parameters, the Web Application Manager displays the dialog boxes as necessary. 10. Provide the information for the required parameters and click OK. Note For descriptions of the rich client required parameters, see Rich client distribution instance requirements. The other required parameters vary, depending on the applications you are installing with the rich client instance. For descriptions, see Rich client distribution instance requirements. The required parameters must have values specified. If a required parameter has no significance for your deployment (for example, a UNIX location in an environment of all Windows systems), retain the default value. The Web Application Manager begins installation of the solutions and displays a Progress dialog box. 11. When installation is complete, click OK to close the Progress dialog box. The Web Application Manager displays the Modify Web Application dialog box. 12. If the solution you added has optional parameters you want to modify, click Modify Context Parameters. The Web Application Manager displays the Modify Context Parameters dialog box. Note If you change a context parameter, the Over-the-Web Installer cannot automatically update the rich client installation on user workstations. Users must uninstall the rich client and reinstall it from this instance. For example, if you add the Teamcenter lifecycle visualization embedded viewer solution, and modify the PVisLicenseLevel context parameter, users must uninstall and reinstall the rich client. 13. Type the values for the optional parameters and click OK. Note For descriptions of the optional parameters, see Rich client optional parameter values. The Web Application Manager displays the Modify Web Application dialog box. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 8-41

168 Chapter 8 J2EE Web tier installation 14. Exit the Web Application Manager. 15. If you changed a context parameter value, notify users that they must uninstall the rich client and reinstall from the same instance. Run the distribution server as a service Use the nohup command to run start_rmi and start_server as services Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

169 Part V Adding features You add features to Teamcenter configurations using Teamcenter Environment Manager and the Web Application Manager. Some features require additional steps to install or configure. See the appropriate topics for the features you want to install. Installing the server manager Install the Business Modeler IDE Installing a custom solution or third-party template Manufacturing Installing Teamcenter reporting and analytics Installing Render Management Installing Teamcenter online help PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide

170

171 Chapter 9 Installing the server manager Gather required information Install the J2EE server manager Start the server manager Start the J2EE-based server manager PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide

172

173 Chapter 9 Installing the server manager Gather required information The following table describes information required to configure the server manager. Data TreeCache cluster name 1 JMX HTTP Adaptor port Server host name Communication protocol Multicast configuration Description Name for a cluster of components accessing a shared global server pool. This name must be unique for this database and corporate server. You must supply this same name for the TreeCache cluster name when configuring the Web tier application. Number of the port running a Java Management Extension (JMX) HTTP adaptor. Logical host name of the server manager host. If the server manager host has multiple IP addresses, the server host name allows you to control which IP address is used when connecting to Teamcenter servers. If your server manager host has only one IP address, you do not need to provide a value for this box. If the server host has multiple IP addresses and you want the server manager to use a specific address when connecting to Teamcenter servers, you must provide the address or the logical host name of the server manager host. The value you enter is written to the SERVER_HOST parameter in the serverpool.properties file. The communication protocol mode between TreeCache peers, either TCP or multicast mode. The Web tier application must use this same mode. If you are using multicast mode, ensure that the network on which the server manager and Web tier run are configured to allow multicast communication. 1. For more information about configuring JBoss Cache TreeCache and setting TreeCache parameters, see The TreeCache implementation also uses the JGroups toolkit. For more information about JGroups, see PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 9-1

174 Chapter 9 Installing the server manager Data TCP configuration Description If you are using TCP, the following information is required: The TCP port at which this TreeCache cluster member attempts to provide the TreeCache service. If the port is in use, the application fails to start and issues an error about having no port to bind to. Select an available port and retry. This port can vary from the port specified for the Web tier application. If you use multiple TreeCaches on the same host (for example, a server manager and a Web tier application), the TreeCaches must use different local service ports. Depending on the network configuration, specifying the same local service port for each component may cause problems when they are on different machines. Maximum time in milliseconds that a TreeCache cluster member waits for peer responses to TCP pings. The larger the value you specify, the more slowly the first server manager starts. Typically, you supply this same value for the Connection Timeout parameter when configuring the Web tier application. A list of addresses (host name and port number pairs) to ping for peer members of the TreeCache cluster in TCP communication mode. This cluster member pings each host/port pair in the list. To be found, a peer must have a matching service port (see the Local Service Port context parameter). Once a peer is found, the peers exchange data regarding available server pools. Note You can include more than one address on a given host. It is not necessary to include all members of the cluster in this list. However, it is important that when each cluster member after the first is started, it should ping a member that is already in the cluster. For example, it is valid to include only a subset of the server managers and none of the application servers. In this case, the cluster connects only when one or more of the designated managers is running. This method reduces pinging and thereby improves performance. For small configurations, all members (server managers and web tiers) should be included in the peers list. For larger configurations, it is 9-2 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

175 Installing the server manager Data Maximum servers in pool Minimum warm servers Target number of server processes Number of logons CPU load Description recommended that the number of pinged ports be limited to no more than six. All members should ping at least the same subset of primary server managers so that tree caches connect and data is shared. Maximum number of Teamcenter server processes allowed to run in this pool (for a single-host configuration) or in this subpool (for a multihost configuration). Minimum number of Teamcenter server processes in this pool that are started but not logged onto. If necessary to maintain the minimum number of warm servers, while not exceeding the maximum number of server processes, the server manager times out servers in use. Target number of server processes to be available in this pool or subpool during specified times. You specify these values as time and integer pairs separated by commas. For example: , This value sets the target number of server processes as 3 between 7 a.m. and 5 p.m. and as 2 between 5 p.m. and 7 a.m. If the number of server processes is below the specified target, warm servers are added to reach this number. In this case, the number of warm servers exceeds the minimum. If the number of server processes exceeds the specified target, only the minimum number of warm servers is maintained and servers are terminated as they time out. Number of logons the server manager allows per minute for this pool or subpool. The default value, 0, allows unlimited logons per minute. Whether you want the server manager to control server processes based on the CPU load of the local host. This option is relevant only for Sun Solaris systems. Note For server pool sizing recommendations, see the Teamcenter Deployment Guide available on GTAC. Install the J2EE server manager 1. Launch Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM). Create a new Teamcenter configuration or choose an existing configuration to which you want to add the J2EE-based server manager. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 9-3

176 Chapter 9 Installing the server manager 2. Proceed to the Features panel. Under Server Enhancements, select J2EE based Server Manager. 3. Proceed to the Server Manager for J2EE panel. Note For information about fields in TEM panels, click the Help buttons in each panel. 4. In the Pool ID and JMX HTTP Adaptor Port boxes, type a name and port for the server pool. 5. Under Startup Mode, choose one of the following: Service/Daemon Specifies you want to run the server manager as a daemon. This is the default mode. Command Line Specifies you want to run the server manager manually from a command line. 6. Enter the remaining values as needed in the Server Manager for J2EE panel. For more information about these values, see Gather required information. 7. Click Next. TEM displays the Server Manager TreeCache Configuration panel. 8. Enter values for the server manager TreeCache configuration. For more information, see Teamcenter Environment Manager Help. 9. Proceed through remaining panels until you reach the Confirmation panel. Click Start to begin installing the Teamcenter server with the J2EE-based server manager. 10. When installation completes, exit TEM. 11. If you install the server manager in Service/Daemon startup mode, a user with root privileges must run the root postinstallation tasks script to register the server manager daemon. In the TC_ROOT/install directory, locate and run the following script: root_post_tasks_id.ksh You can install multiple J2EE server manager daemons on the same host. Each server manager daemon has its own configuration directory: TC_ROOT/pool_manager/confs/config-name Replace config-name with the name of the server manager configuration. The server manager configuration directory contains configuration files, log files, and server manager scripts. These include the following. 9-4 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

177 Installing the server manager File/Directory mgrstart mgrstop Description Script that launches the J2EE server manager in console mode. Script that stops the J2EE server manager when started from a command line. If you run the J2EE server manager as a daemon, stop the service using the rc.tc.mgr_config script. Note You can also stop the server manager using J2EE server manager administrative interface. mgr.output logs For more information, see the System Administration Guide. If you run the J2EE server manager as a daemon, this file contains all output from the J2EE server manager. This file is not used if you run the server manager from the command line. Directory that contains all J2EE server manager log files. If you run the J2EE server manager as a daemon, the server manager starts automatically. If you run the server manager from the command line, you must start the server manager manually. For information about starting the J2EE server manager manually, see Start the J2EE-based server manager. For information about managing the J2EE server manager, see the System Administration Guide. Note If you experience connection delays during server manager startup, see Troubleshooting four-tier architecture deployment for possible solutions. Start the server manager If you install the.net based Server Manager feature, you must start the server manager to enable four-tier rich clients to connect to the corporate server. If you install the J2EE based Server Manager feature, you must start the server manager to enable four-tier rich clients to connect to the corporate server. For more information, see Start the J2EE-based server manager. Start the J2EE-based server manager Note These steps are not necessary if you run the J2EE-based server manager as a daemon. However, you may perform these steps for administrative or diagnostic purposes. 1. Open a command prompt with Teamcenter environment settings. 2. Change to the TC_ROOT/pool_manager/confs/config-name directory. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 9-5

178 Chapter 9 Installing the server manager Replace config-name with the name of the server manager configuration. 3. Type the following command to start the server manager: mgrstart The server manager displays several messages during startup. The server manager started successfully if you see a message similar to the following that contains an IP address and a port number: GMS: address is : Launch the server manager user interface 1. Launch the server manager user interface from Replace manager_host with the machine on which the manager is running, and jmx_http_adaptor_port with the number of the port running a Java Management Extension (JMX) HTTP adaptor. (You define this in Teamcenter Environment Manager when you set the JMX HTTP Adaptor Port.) 2. To log on, use the default user ID (manager) and password (manager). You can change these values using the Change_Authentication operation on the Pool Manager page. The server manager displays the Agent View page. Bookmark this page for future reference. For information about configuring the server manager, see the System Administration Guide. Also, for information about using the server manager interface, see the System Administration Guide. 9-6 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

179 Chapter 10 Install the Business Modeler IDE Install the Business Modeler IDE Install the Business Modeler IDE as a stand-alone application Install the Business Modeler IDE to an existing Eclipse environment Allocate memory to the Business Modeler IDE Start the Business Modeler IDE PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide

180

181 Chapter 10 Install the Business Modeler IDE Install the Business Modeler IDE To install the Business Modeler IDE, you can install it as a stand-alone application, or if you already have Eclipse installed, install it into your Eclipse environment. After you install the Business Modeler IDE, allocate additional memory so that Business Modeler IDE has enough memory to run. Before running TEM, you must have the proper version of JRE installed and have set the JRE_HOME environment variable or the JRE64_HOME environment variable. For more information, see the Installation on Windows Clients Guide. Note The Business Modeler IDE cannot be installed on UNIX platforms. For information about installing the Business Modeler IDE, see the Business Modeler IDE Guide. Install the Business Modeler IDE as a stand-alone application 1. Start Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM). Note Before running TEM, you must have the proper version of JRE installed. You must also set the JRE_HOME environment variable if you have a 32-bit system, or set the JRE64_HOME environment variable if you have a 64-bit system. For more information, see the Installation on Windows Clients Guide. 2. Proceed to the Solutions panel. In the Solutions panel, select Business Modeler IDE, and then click Next. 3. Perform the following steps in the Features panel: a. Under Base Install, select one of the following: Business Modeler IDE 2-tier Connects to a Teamcenter server in a two-tier environment using IIOP (over a network). Business Modeler IDE 4-tier Connects to a Teamcenter server in a four-tier environment using HTTP. Business Modeler IDE Standalone PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 10-1

182 Chapter 10 Install the Business Modeler IDE Installs only the Business Modeler IDE without requiring connection to a Teamcenter server. When you select one of these options, a server connection profile is added in the Business Modeler IDE. For more information, see the Business Modeler IDE Guide. b. (Optional) Select ExtensionsfiPlatform ExtensibilityfiGlobal ServicesfiMapping Designer. This installs the Mapping Designer data model mapping tool into the Business Modeler IDE. c. (Optional) Select ExtensionsfiMechatronics Process ManagementfiEDA for Business Modeler IDE. This installs the EDA Derived Data configuration tool into the Business Modeler IDE. This tool is used to configure Teamcenter EDA, an application that integrates Teamcenter with electronic CAD (E-CAD) design applications, such as Cadence and Mentor Graphics. Note If you install this option, you must ensure that the ExtensionsfiMechatronics Process ManagementfiEDA Server and Rich Client Support option is also installed to the server. In addition, later in the installation process when you select templates to install to the Business Modeler IDE, you must select the EDA Server and Rich Client Support template (edaserver_template.xml). d. In the Installation Directory box, enter the location where you want to install the Business Modeler IDE. The Business Modeler IDE files are installed to a bmide subdirectory. e. Click Next. 4. In the Java Development Kit dialog box, click the browse button to locate the JDK installed on your system. The kit is used for creating services. For Teamcenter 10.1, use Java Development Kit 7 or later. Click Next. 5. Depending on whether you selected Business Modeler IDE two-tier or four-tier installation, perform the following steps: If you selected the Business Modeler IDE 2-tier option, perform the following steps in the 2-tier server settings panel: a. In the Connection Port box, type the server port number. The default is b. Click the Edit button to the right of the 2-tier Servers box to change the server connection profile settings, or click the Add button to add another server to connect to. c. Click the Advanced button. A. Click the arrow in the Activation Mode box to select the mode to use when connecting to the server. The default is NORMAL Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

183 Install the Business Modeler IDE If you want to allow multiple concurrent user sessions to the two-tier rich client, select PER_CLIENT. B. Click the ellipse button to the right of the Configuration Directory box to select the folder where you want this configuration saved. The default is TC_ROOT\iiopservers. C. Click OK. d. Click Next. If you selected the Business Modeler IDE 4-tier option, perform the following steps in the 4-tier server configurations panel. a. Leave the Compress (gzip) the responses from the Web application servers check box selected if you want faster connection performance from the server. b. Click the Add button to the right of the 4-tier Servers table if you want to add another server to connect to. c. Click Next. If you have previously installed Teamcenter client communication system (TCCS) on your system, and you also selected the Business Modeler IDE 4-tier option, the TcCS Settings panel appears. This panel is used to configure TCCS for use with the Business Modeler IDE. TCCS is used when you need secure Teamcenter communications through a firewall using a forward proxy. Note If you want to use TCCS, you must install it first. To install TCCS, run the installation-source\additional_applications\tccs_install\tccs.exe file. To change the TCCS setup later, run the tccs-installation-location\tccs\_teamcenter Communication Service_installation\Change Teamcenter Communication Service Installation file. o o If you do not want to use TCCS, ensure that the Use TcCS Environments for 4-tier clients check box is cleared and click Next. If this check box is cleared, the 4-tier server configurations panel is displayed after you are finished with the current panel. If you want to use TCCS, perform the following steps: a. Select Do not use proxy if you do not want to use a forward or reverse proxy. b. Select Use web browser settings to automatically use proxy settings already configured in a Web browser. c. Select Detect setting from network to automatically use proxy settings from the network. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 10-3

184 Chapter 10 Install the Business Modeler IDE d. Select Retrieve settings from URL and type a valid proxy URL to use a proxy autoconfiguration file. e. Select Configure settings manually to type valid host and port values for proxy servers. f. Select the Use TcCS Environments for 4-tier clients check box if you want to use TCCS, or clear it if you do not. (This check box is automatically selected if TCCS is installed.) g. If the Use TcCS Environments for 4-tier clients check box is selected, you can use the Client Filter Text box to specify a filter text on the available TCCS environments to avoid displaying undesired environments in the rich client client logon window. This box is optional and can hold any string. h. Click Next. 6. Perform the following steps in the Business Modeler IDE Client panel: a. Click the Add button to the right of the table to select the templates to install. Templates contain the data model for Teamcenter solutions. The Teamcenter Foundation template is installed by default. The Foundation template contains the data model used for core Teamcenter functions. All customer templates must extend the Foundation template. Select the same templates that were installed on the server so that you can see the same data model definitions in the Business Modeler IDE that were installed on the server. Tip Make sure that you select the same templates that are on the server. To find the templates installed on the server, look in the TC_DATA\model directory on the server. For more information, see the Business Modeler IDE Guide. Note If you installed the EDA option to the Business Modeler IDE, select the EDA Server and Rich Client Support template (edaserver_template.xml). b. If you have any templates of your own to install or a template from a third-party, click the Browse button and browse to the directory where the templates are located. c. Click Next. 7. Complete the remaining panels to finish the installation in Teamcenter Environment Manager. When the installation is complete, exit Teamcenter Environment Manager. 8. Verify the installed files in the install-location/bmide directory. The following data model files are placed into the install-location/bmide/templates folder: baselines\template-name_tcbaseline.xml 10-4 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

185 Install the Business Modeler IDE Contains a snapshot of the template s data model taken at the release of Teamcenter 10.1, if a baseline was taken. icons\template-name_icons.zip Contains the icons used by that template. lang\template-name_template_language_locale.xml Contains the text that is displayed in the Business Modeler IDE user interface for all languages. template-name_dependency.xml Lists the other templates that this template is built on top of, for example, the Foundation template. template-name_template.xml Contains the data model for this template, including business objects, classes, properties, attributes, lists of values (LOVs), and so on. master.xml Lists the template XML files included in the data model, for example, the foundation_template.xml file. For instructions about how to run the Business Modeler IDE, see Start the Business Modeler IDE. Install the Business Modeler IDE to an existing Eclipse environment If you already have Eclipse installed, you can install the Business Modeler IDE into your existing Eclipse environment. For more information about Eclipse, see the following URL: Note If the Eclipse environment already has Business Modeler IDE plug-ins installed from an earlier version, installing a later version of Business Modeler IDE plug-ins in the same environment results in problems and is not supported. Therefore, when upgrading to a later version of Teamcenter, install a fresh version of Eclipse and perform the following procedure: 1. Ensure you have an Eclipse 3.8 package installed. To download Eclipse, see the following URL: 2. In the Teamcenter software distribution image, change to the following directory: additional_applications/bmide_plugins 3. Extract the bmide_plugins.zip file to your Eclipse directory (ECLIPSE_HOME). This archive contains the Business Modeler IDE plug-ins. After unzipping the plug-ins, verify their installation at ECLIPSE_HOME. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 10-5

186 Chapter 10 Install the Business Modeler IDE 4. Create a LocalSites directory on your computer, and create the following subdirectories: CDT, DTP, EMF, GEF, JDT, and WTP. 5. Perform the following steps to extract the remaining plug-ins from the additional_applications/bmide_plugins directory: a. Extract each of the following archive files into its corresponding LocalSites subdirectory. These archives contain plug-ins required by the Business Modeler IDE. cdt-master-version.zip Unzip to the CDT directory. This contains the C/C++ Development Toolkit (CDT) plug-ins. CDT provides the capability to work with projects that use C or C++ as a programming language. dtp-sdk_version.zip Unzip to the DTP directory. This contains the Data Tools Platform (DTP) plug-ins. DTP provides a number of tools for working with data sources. eclipse-jdt-sdk-version.zip Unzip to the JDT directory. This contains the Java Development Tools (JDT) plug-ins. JDT provides tools for implementing a Java IDE. emf-xsd-sdk-version.zip Unzip to the EMF directory. This contains the Eclipse Modeling Framework (EMF) plug-ins. EMF is a modeling framework and code generation facility for building tools and other applications based on a structured data model. GEF-ALL-version.zip Unzip to the GEF directory. This contains the Graphical Editing Framework (GEF) plug-ins. GEF allows developers to take an existing application model and create a graphical editor. wtp-sdk-r-version.zip Unzip to the WTP directory. This contains the Web Tools Platform (WTP) plug-ins. WTP helps you develop Web and Java EE applications. b. If you need language support, create the required subdirectories under LocalSites and extract the appropriate language pack to the corresponding subdirectory: NLpack1-GEF-SDK-version.zip Contains the GEF language pack for German, Spanish, French, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Portuguese (Brazil), Traditional Chinese, and Simplified Chinese. NLpack2-GEF-SDK-version.zip Contains the GEF language pack for Czech, Hungarian, Polish, and Russian. NLpack2a-GEF-SDK-version.zip 10-6 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

187 Install the Business Modeler IDE Contains the GEF language pack for Danish, Dutch, Finnish, Greek, Norwegian, Portuguese, Swedish, and Turkish. NLpackBidi-GEF-SDK-version.zip Contains the GEF language pack for Arabic and Hebrew. 6. Launch Eclipse by running the eclipse file from the eclipse directory. When Eclipse opens, set the workspace if asked and close the Welcome tab if it appears. 7. Install the remaining plug-ins using the Eclipse installation feature. For more information about installing plug-ins to Eclipse, see the following article: tasks/tasks-124.htm a. Choose HelpfiInstall New Software from the top menu bar. The Available Software dialog box is displayed. b. In the Available Software dialog box, click the Add button to the right of the Work with box. The Add Site dialog box is displayed. c. In the Add Site dialog box, click the Local button and browse to each subdirectory under the LocalSites directory, for example, CDT\eclipse, DTP/eclipse, and so on. As you add each site, type a name for each in the Name box in the Add Site dialog box. As you add sites, the plug-in items display on the Available Software dialog box. d. In the Available Software dialog box, click the arrow in the Work with box and choose each site in turn (for example, CDT, DTP, and so on). The plug-in items are displayed in the pane. Note You must clear the Group items by category check box to see the plug-in items. If you leave it selected, you may see the message: There are no categorized items Select the Hide items that are already installed check box to only see uninstalled features. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 10-7

188 Chapter 10 Install the Business Modeler IDE Install plug-ins e. Select all the items for the site and click Next to install them. Install all the sites (CDT, DTP, and so on). f. Click Next and then Finish. g. Restart Eclipse. 8. After all the plug-ins are installed, you should be able to open the Advanced perspective. In Eclipse, choose WindowfiOpen PerspectivefiOther and select the Advanced perspective. Allocate memory to the Business Modeler IDE Allocate memory to the Business Modeler IDE so that it has enough to launch and run. Note If you perform live updates, you must have a minimum of 4 GB of RAM on the system running the Business Modeler IDE to allow for other processes. You can allocate memory in the following ways: BusinessModelerIDE.ini file To increase the memory allocated to the Business Modeler IDE, open the install-location/bmide/client/businessmodeleride.ini file and change the 10-8 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

189 Install the Business Modeler IDE -Xmx1024M value to a higher number to allocate maximum Java heap size. For example, if you have 2 GB available to dedicate for this purpose, set the value to -Xmx2048M. Do this only if your machine has the available memory. The Xms value in this file sets the initial Java heap size, and the Xmx value sets the maximum Java heap size. BMIDE_SCRIPT_ARGS environment variable Caution To allocate the memory required by scripts during installation, update, or load of templates with large data models, create a BMIDE_SCRIPT_ARGS environment variable. Set the BMIDE_SCRIPT_ARGS variable to -Xmx1024M to allocate 1 GB of RAM to the Business Modeler IDE scripts. If your system has more memory that you can allocate to the Business Modeler IDE, you can set the value higher. Because Java standards require that no more than 25 percent of total RAM be allocated to virtual memory, if the amount allocated to the Business Modeler IDE is higher than 25 percent of total RAM, memory disk swapping occurs, with possible performance degradation. If you set the Xmx value to a higher value than the RAM your system has, you may get the following error when you launch the Business Modeler IDE: Could not create the Java virtual machine. Set the Xmx value to a setting that your system supports, in both the BMIDE_SCRIPT_ARGS environment variable and the BusinessModelerIDE.ini file. Note If you are running the Business Modeler IDE in an Eclipse environment, run the following command to increase virtual memory to 2 GB: eclipse.exe -vmargs -Xmx2048M For instructions about how to run the Business Modeler IDE, see Start the Business Modeler IDE. Start the Business Modeler IDE 1. You can start the Business Modeler IDE in several ways, depending on how you installed it: Start the stand-alone application. This runs the bmide.bat file. Run the bmide.sh file in the install-location/bmide/client directory. Note To ensure that you have enough memory to run the Business Modeler IDE, allocate memory in the BusinessModelerIDE.ini file and in a BMIDE_SCRIPT_ARGS environment variable. Start from an Eclipse environment. Navigate to the directory where Eclipse is installed and execute the Eclipse command. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 10-9

190 Chapter 10 Install the Business Modeler IDE Note To ensure that you have enough memory to run Eclipse, you can run the Eclipse.exe command with a virtual memory argument. For example, the following command increases virtual memory to 2 GB: Eclipse.exe -vmargs -Xmx2024M You must have a minimum of 4 GB of RAM on the system running the Business Modeler IDE to allow for other processes. When you start the Business Modeler IDE for first time, the Welcome window is displayed. 2. Click one of the buttons in the Welcome window to learn more about the Business Modeler IDE: The Overview button provides links to online help topics. The Tutorials button provides links to tutorials. 3. To work in the IDE, click the Workbench button in the right side of the Welcome window. The Workbench is the main window in Eclipse. The Workbench window shows one or more perspectives. A perspective is an arrangement of views (such as the Navigator) and editors. At the top of the Workbench is a toolbar that allows you to open new perspectives and move between ones already open. The name of the active perspective is shown in the title of the window. Note You can access the Welcome window again later by choosing HelpfiWelcome from the Business Modeler IDE. 4. Examine the BMIDE view in the Standard perspective. This view provides a centralized location for favorites, data model elements, and project files. Note If a perspective fails to open, it could be that not enough memory is being allocated to the Business Modeler IDE Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

191 Chapter 11 Installing a custom solution or third-party template Installing a custom solution or third-party template Install a template using TEM Update the database using TEM PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide

192

193 Chapter 11 Installing a custom solution or third-party template Installing a custom solution or third-party template Use TEM to install custom templates you package using the Business Modeler IDE. Install a template using TEM After you package extensions, install the resulting template to a production environment using Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM). You can also use this procedure to install a third-party template. Warning You should back up your data on a regular basis so that you can restore it in the event of a template installation failure. For more information, see the Business Modeler IDE Guide. 1. Copy the template files from the packaging directory on your Business Modeler IDE client to a directory that is accessible by the server. By default, packaged template files are located in the Business Modeler IDE workspace directory in the folder under the project. On Linux, users must have permissions to the workspace directory. 2. Start Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM). 3. In the Maintenance panel, choose Configuration Manager and click Next. 4. In the Configuration Maintenance panel, choose Perform maintenance on an existing configuration and click Next. 5. In the Configuration pane, select the configuration from which the corporate server was installed. Click Next. 6. In the Feature Maintenance panel, under the Teamcenter section, select Add/Remove Features. Click Next. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 11-1

194 Chapter 11 Installing a custom solution or third-party template Note If you already installed a template to the database and want to update the template, under the Teamcenter Foundation section, select Update the database. This option should not be used to install a new template but only to update an already installed template. Use the Add/Update templates for working within the Business Modeler IDE client option under Business Modeler Templates only if you want to add a dependent template to your Business Modeler IDE. 7. In the Features panel, click the Browse button on the lower right side of the panel. Browsing for the template files 8. Browse to the directory where you have copied the template files. In the Files of type box, ensure that Feature Files is selected so that you see only the installable template (feature) file. Select your template s feature file (feature_template-name.xml) and click the Select button. The template appears as a new feature under Extensions in the Features panel. You can change the location of the feature in the Features panel and add a new group to place the feature under. 9. Select the new template in the Features panel. Click Next Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

195 Installing a custom solution or third-party template Selecting the new feature 10. In the Teamcenter Administrative User panel, enter your user name and password to log on to the server. Click Next. 11. The Database Template Summary panel displays the list of templates that are installed as part of your template install. Click Next. Viewing the templates to be installed 12. In the Confirmation panel, click Start. The new template is installed. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 11-3

196 Chapter 11 Installing a custom solution or third-party template Note If the installation fails because of invalid data model, perform the following steps: a. Fix the incorrect data model and repackage the template. b. Locate the template-name_template.zip in your project s packaging directory and unzip it to a temporary location. Copy the following files to the server in the TC_ROOT/install/template-name folder: template-name_template.xml template-name_dependency.xml template-name_tcbaseline.xml (if the file exists) c. Launch Teamcenter Environment Manager in the maintenance mode and continue with recovery. 13. To verify the installation of the new template, confirm that the TC_DATA directory on the Teamcenter server contains the new template files. Also log on to the server and confirm that you can create instances of your new data model. Note To have libraries read on the user system, the TC_LIBRARY environment variable must be set to the platform-specific shared library path. This environment variable is set to the LD_LIBRARY_PATH (Solaris, Linux, or HP-UX Itanium), LIBPATH (AIX), or SHLIB_PATH (HP-UX) environment variable, depending on the platform detected when the Teamcenter session is initiated. Update the database using TEM If you already installed a template as a new feature and want to update it because you have added more data model definitions to it, perform the following steps: 1. Copy the packaged template files from the packaging directory on your Business Modeler IDE client to a directory that is accessible by the server. By default, packaged template files are located in the Business Modeler IDE workspace directory in the folder under the project.. 2. Start Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM). 3. In the Maintenance panel, choose Configuration Manager and click Next. 4. In the Configuration Maintenance panel, choose Perform maintenance on an existing configuration and click Next. 5. The Configuration panel displays the installed configuration. Click Next. 6. In the Feature Maintenance panel, under the Teamcenter Foundation section, select Update Database (Full Model System Downtime Required). Click Next Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

197 Installing a custom solution or third-party template Starting a full model update Note Use the Add/Update Templates for working with the Business Modeler IDE Client option under Business Modeler only if you want to add or update a dependent template to your Business Modeler IDE. 7. Click Next 8. In the Teamcenter Administrative User panel, enter your user name and password to log on to the server. Click Next. The Update Database panel displays currently installed templates. 9. Click the Browse button to navigate to the directory where the packaged template files are located. Select the updated feature_template-name.xml file. Note If you are fixing a COTS template (for example, the Foundation template) using a new template file provided in a patch, you must copy the template s feature_template-name.xml and the template-name_install.zip files to the same temporary directory containing the new template-name_template.zip file. The template displays a refreshed status icon. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 11-5

198 Chapter 11 Installing a custom solution or third-party template Selecting the template for update 10. Click Next. 11. In the Confirmation panel, click Next. The new template is installed. 12. To verify the installation of the revised template, log on to the server and confirm that you can create instances of your new data model Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

199 Chapter 12 Manufacturing Manufacturing Install the Manufacturing Resource Library Configure the NX Library Planning data migration from Genius4000 to Resource Manager PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide

200

201 Chapter 12 Manufacturing Manufacturing To populate the database with sample Teamcenter manufacturing process management data, make sure that the Teamcenter corporate server is installed on the installation host and the Teamcenter database is configured or upgraded. Install the Manufacturing Resource Library The Manufacturing Resource Library is a collection of data that you can import into the database. It includes a classification hierarchy for resources such as tools, machines, and fixtures. You use this data in the Classification and Resource Manager applications. In addition, you can access these resources from NX CAM. To do this, you must configure NX Library. To install the Manufacturing Resource Library on a UNIX server, you must use a Windows rich client. If you do not have one in your network, you must add one temporarily. After you do this, start the setup program on the Windows installation CD-ROM as explained in the Installation on Windows Servers Guide. Configure the NX Library This procedure pertains to the following files: MACH/resource/configuration/cam_part_planner_mrl.dat MACH/resource/library/tool/inclass/dbc_mrl_tooling_library_tlas.tcl MACH/resource/library/tool/inclass/dbc_mrl_tooling_library_tlas_en.def MACH/resource/ug_library/dbc_mrl_general.tcl 1. Create a copy of your cam_part_planner_library.dat file and rename it to cam_part_planner_mrl.dat. 2. Change the following line in the cam_part_planner_mrl.dat file: Old: New: LIBRARY_TOOL,${UGII_CAM_LIBRARY_TOOL_INCLASS_DIR}dbc_inclass_tlas.def, ${UGII_CAM_LIBRARY_TOOL_INCLASS_DIR}dbc_inclass_tlas.tcl LIBRARY_TOOL,${UGII_CAM_LIBRARY_TOOL_INCLASS_DIR}dbc_mrl_tooling_library_tlas_en.def, ${UGII_CAM_LIBRARY_TOOL_INCLASS_DIR}dbc_mrl_tooling_library_tlas.tcl PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 12-1

202 Chapter 12 Manufacturing If you use a customized configuration file at your company, make the change in the customized file and continue to use this file to initialize NX CAM. 3. Copy the following files to your MACH/resource/library/tool/inclass/ directory. dbc_mrl_tooling_library_tlas.tcl dbc_mrl_tooling_library_tlas_en.def 4. Copy dbc_mrl_general.tcl to MACH/resource/ug_library. 5. When you initialize NX CAM, use the modified cam_part_planner_mrl.dat file, or the customized configuration file that you modified in step 2. Planning data migration from Genius4000 to Resource Manager The data in a Genius4000 installation is composed of database instances and associated files, such as graphics files, part files, and text documents residing on a file system. Note To migrate Genius4000 data from Teamcenter 9 onwards, you must do so by installing Teamcenter 8.x (or earlier) and migrating the data using the Genius data migration utility found in that installation. Converting Genius4000 data to Resource Manager-compliant data involves the following steps: Step 1: Export data from the Genius4000 database. This step performs two functions: Export the contents of the Genius4000 database to SML ASCII files using the standard Genius SML Export function. The SML ASCII files are stored in an interim export directory where they are used as input for the conversion process. Copy all associated files residing in the Genius4000 file system to the Resource Manager import directories. Where necessary, these files are converted to formats required for the import step. Step 2: Convert the exported data to Resource Manager data. This step converts the various data formats from Genius4000 and converts them into formats required by Resource Manager. You have some choice as to the final file types the system creates. File conversion converts TOL files of records that do not have an associated NX part file to NX part files. Since such files generally contain 2D graphics that cannot be converted to JT format, they are copied to an intermediate directory (GeniusTolGraphics) and converted to CGM format in a later conversion step. It also modifies the color tables of HPGL files so that the embedded viewer displays them with the same colors previously used by Genius4000 and UNC8500i. This is the only step in the migration procedure that is performed on a UNIX system Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

203 Manufacturing Step 3: Step 4: Import the Resource Manager data into the Teamcenter 8.x (or earlier) Resource Manager database. After you convert all the data, this step imports the results into an existing Resource Manager database. This procedure is similar to that required to install the small or full manufacturing content kit. Upgrade the Teamcenter 8.x (or earlier) database to your current Teamcenter version. For more information about performing this procedure on a UNIX system, see the Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide in the Teamcenter 8.x (or earlier) installation. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 12-3

204

205 Chapter 13 Installing Teamcenter reporting and analytics Installing Teamcenter reporting and analytics Before you begin Create the Reporting and Analytics database Configure the Reporting and Analytics license file Install Reporting and Analytics Install Remote Reporting and Analytics Deploy Reporting and Analytics Complete Reporting and Analytics installation PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide

206

207 Chapter 13 Installing Teamcenter reporting and analytics Installing Teamcenter reporting and analytics Install and configure Teamcenter reporting and analytics in a new or existing Teamcenter configuration. Before you begin Download the Teamcenter reporting and analytics software distribution image for your platform from the Siemens PLM Software FTP site. Reporting and Analytics requires additional preinstallation steps. For information about steps to perform before you install Reporting and Analytics, see the current version of the Teamcenter Reporting and Analytics Deployment Guide in the Documentation directory in the Reporting and Analytics software distribution image. Create the Reporting and Analytics database Reporting and Analytics requires an Oracle or Microsoft SQL Server database for Reporting and Analytics metadata. Your database administrator must create this database before you launch Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM) to install Reporting and Analytics. TEM creates the required table structure for Reporting and Analytics, but the database user and tablespaces must exist before you install Reporting and Analytics. Metadata tables are divided into three categories based on the number of rows they will hold and the growth potential. These tables can be stored in the same tablespace or in separate tablespaces for better performance and manageability. Siemens PLM Software recommends creating the following tablespaces: Tablespace Small Medium Large Description Typical number of rows Minimum size 50MB Growth is very slow. Typical number of rows Minimum size 150MB Growth is Slow. Typically rows or more. Minimum size 500MB Growth very rapid with usage. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 13-1

208 Chapter 13 Installing Teamcenter reporting and analytics Tablespace Indexes Description Typically rows or more. Minimum 400MB. For more information about creating the metadata database for Reporting and Analytics, see Planning for Installation in the Teamcenter Reporting and Analytics Deployment Guide for the current version of Reporting and Analytics. Configure the Reporting and Analytics license file Reporting and Analytics requires an eqube license file (license.dat) on the host where the Reporting and Analytics license server runs. TEM requires the location of the license file to install the Reporting and Analytics license server during Reporting and Analytics installation. Note On Sun Solaris and Hewlett-Packard HP-UX systems, the Reporting and Analytics license server uses the host s HOSTID value address to identify the host. On Linux systems, the license server uses the host s MAC address. You must supply this information when you request an eqube license file from eq Technologic. Note For information about starting the Reporting and Analytics license server, see the Teamcenter Reporting and Analytics Deployment Guide in the Reporting and Analytics software distribution image. Install Reporting and Analytics 1. Launch TEM. 2. Create a new Teamcenter configuration or select an existing configuration to which you want to add Reporting and Analytics. In the Features panel, select the following features: Teamcenter for Reporting and Analytics Installs the Teamcenter Reporting and Analytics integration. Reporting and Analytics is a standalone reporting application that introduces a new folder in Report Builder called TcRA Reports, which contains reports created with Reporting and Analytics. Dashboard Installs the Reporting and Analytics Dashboard application for the rich client. Dashboard provides an embedded viewer for Reporting and Analytics reports in the rich client. For more information about the Reporting and Analytics Dashboard, see the Report Builder Guide. 3. Proceed to the TcRA Install Options and General Settings panel. Select one or more of the following options to include in your Reporting and Analytics installation: 13-2 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

209 Installing Teamcenter reporting and analytics Create license server Create WAR file Create metadata Secure Connection Specifies you want to install a Reporting and Analytics license server. If you select this option, TEM later prompts for the location of the eqube license file (license.dat). If you do not select this option, TEM later prompts for the location of the Reporting and Analytics license server. Specifies you want to generate a Reporting and Analytics WAR file. Specifies you want to populate the metadata database for Reporting and Analytics. Select this only during the first installation of Reporting and Analytics. If you are upgrading from a previous version of Reporting and Analytics or adding additional hosts, do not select this option. Specifies you want to connect to the Reporting and Analytics license server through a secure (HTTPS) connection. The remaining sequence of TEM panels varies according to the options you select. 4. Enter the required information in TEM for the selected Reporting and Analytics options. Note For more information about any TEM panel, click the help button. Selected option TEM panel Tasks Create license server TcRA License Server Settings Enter the location of the Reporting and Analytics license file (license.dat), the license authentication time-out in seconds, and license keystore settings for the Reporting and Analytics license server. Create WAR file TcRA WAR Settings Type the Web application context, server name, and port for the Reporting and Analytics Web application. Create WAR file TcRA WAR SMTP Properties Specify SMTP settings to enable users to receive messages generated by Reporting and Analytics. Create WAR file TcRA Web Parts and Services Specify whether to enable Web services and integration with SharePoint and Teamcenter community collaboration with Reporting and Analytics. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 13-3

210 Chapter 13 Installing Teamcenter reporting and analytics Selected option TEM panel Tasks Create WAR file TcRA Authentication Settings Select the Reporting and Analytics authentication method (eqube, SSO, or Windows NTLM) and specify related settings. Note Selecting SSO Authentication requires that you install Teamcenter with Security Services enabled and configure the LDAP server before you install Reporting and Analytics. For information about installing Security Services, see the Security Services Installation/Customization guide. Create WAR file TcRA License Settings Type the host and port of the Reporting and Analytics license server. Create WAR file Create metadata or TcRA WAR and Metadata Settings Type an owner for Reporting and Analytics metadata and select your Web application server vendor. Create metadata TcRA Metadata Settings Specify metadata settings for the Reporting and Analytics integration. Note The values you type under Oracle Tablespace Names must match the names of the Oracle tablespaces you created in Create the Reporting and Analytics database. Any option TcRA Database Selection Specify the database engine you use for Reporting and Analytics (Oracle, Microsoft SQL Server, or IBM DB2) and type the required values for the Reporting and Analytics database you created in Create the Reporting and Analytics database. 5. Proceed through the remaining TEM panels and begin installing Reporting and Analytics. During installation, TEM prompts you for the location of the TCRA2008.zip file. When installation is complete, close TEM. Install Remote Reporting and Analytics Install Remote Reporting and Analytics as described in Deploying Remote Teamcenter Reporting and Analytics Plugin in the Teamcenter Reporting and Analytics Deployment Guide Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

211 Installing Teamcenter reporting and analytics The Teamcenter Reporting and Analytics Deployment Guide is in the Documentation directory in the Teamcenter reporting and analytics software distribution image. Deploy Reporting and Analytics Deploy the Reporting and Analytics WAR file as described in the Teamcenter Reporting and Analytics Deployment Guide in the Reporting and Analytics software distribution image. Note Before you deploy the Reporting and Analytics WAR file, make sure that Remote Reporting and Analytics is installed and running. For more information, see Deploying Remote Teamcenter Reporting and Analytics Plugin in the Teamcenter Reporting and Analytics Deployment Guide. The Teamcenter Reporting and Analytics Deployment Guide is in the Documentation directory in the Teamcenter reporting and analytics software distribution image. Complete Reporting and Analytics installation 1. Set the TC_RA_server_parameters preference using the rich client. Set the following values: Value Host Port Context ServletName Description Specifies the host on which you deploy the Reporting and Analytics WAR file. Specifies the port used by the Reporting and Analytics Web application. Specifies the name of the Reporting and Analytics WAR file Specifies the name of the Reporting and Analytics servlet, for example, BuildNPlay/eQTCnectIntegrationController. This preference must be set to enable Reporting and Analytics to communicate with Teamcenter. For information about setting preferences, see Getting Started with Teamcenter. 2. Test connections to Reporting and Analytics applications. Log on to Reporting and Analytics at the following URLs and click Test Connections: Teamcenter reporting and analytics Mapper: and Analytics-context/Mapper Teamcenter reporting and analytics BuildNPlay: and Analytics-context/BuildNPlay PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 13-5

212 Chapter 13 Installing Teamcenter reporting and analytics Reporting and Analytics Portal: and Analytics-context/Portal If connections are not successful, you cannot create reports in Reporting and Analytics until connection problems are resolved. For more information about Reporting and Analytics Mapper and BuildNPlay, see the Mapper User s Guide and the BuildNPlay User s Guide in the Reporting and Analytics software distribution image. 3. Log on to the Reporting and Analytics administrative console using user name ADMIN and password ADMIN. Click Manage Instance Properties, and then set the following values as appropriate: SMTP Host Authentication required for SMTP (Set to True or False) SMTP User ID SMTP User Password 4. If Reporting and Analytics is installed with Security Services enabled, set the following values for the Teamcenter connection (Connection 1): Set the user ID and password values to the LDAP user ID and password. Under Advanced Properties, set SSO Enabled to yes, and set the SSO Application ID to the Teamcenter application ID. Note For information about using the Reporting and Analytics integration, see the Report Builder Guide Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

213 Chapter 14 Installing Render Management Installing Render Management Prerequisites for rendering Install Render Management Complete Render Management installation Render document options Validating pdfgenerator by translating files from the command line Viewing document rendering logs PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide

214

215 Chapter 14 Installing Render Management Installing Render Management During installation using Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM), along with the selections made to support general installation, your administrator must select to install the following features to support document rendering. The administrator can accept default values unless otherwise directed. Note This topic describes an installation using a single server machine. Installation in a distributed configuration using multiple server machines is supported. Prerequisites for rendering The prerequisites for rendering documents in Teamcenter include the following: Install and configure one or both of the following: o Teamcenter 10.1 lifecycle visualization Convert and Print, Ghostscript version 8.64 (Asian font version) and MS Office 2007 or o Adobe LiveCycle PDF Generator ES version or ES2 Version 9.0, Adobe Acrobat Pro Extended version 9.2 (for information, see the Adobe LiveCycle ES2 documentation), and a source format authoring application (for example, MS Office: 2003, XP, or 2007). Note For information about downloading Ghostscript, see the following URL: Install document render functionality by installing and configuring a Dispatcher Server and Dispatcher Client, under Corporate Server, in Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM). For more information, see Getting Started with Dispatcher (Translation Management) and the Dispatcher Server Translators Reference Guide. Install and configure the previewservice, rendermgttranslator, and pdfgenerator (supported by default only on Windows) translators. For information about verifying that translators are configured for render management, see the Dispatcher Server Translators Reference Guide. Set up item revision definition configuration (IRDC) and dispatcher service configuration objects and deploy to the Teamcenter database. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 14-1

216 Chapter 14 Installing Render Management For more information about working with document management IRDC objects and dispatcher service configuration objects, see the Business Modeler IDE Guide. The software needed for rendering is dictated by the available input formats and the required output formats. Input format 1 Output format Required software MS Office, PostScript PDF Teamcenter 10.1 lifecycle visualization Convert, Ghostscript version 8.64 (Asian font version) and MS Office: 2007 or 2010 MS Office PostScript Teamcenter 10.1 lifecycle visualization Convert, Ghostscript version 8.64 (Asian font version) and MS Office: 2007 or 2010 MS Office TIF Teamcenter 10.1 lifecycle visualization Convert, Ghostscript version 8.64 (Asian font version) and MS Office: 2007 or 2010 DXF, HPGL, Text, PostScript, PDF MS Office (including Microsoft Project), PostScript, Encapsulated PostScript (.eps), Adobe Photoshop (.psd), WordPerfect, Rich Text, Bitmap, GIF, JPEG, TIFF and multipage TIF Thumbnail (JPEG) PDF Teamcenter 10.1 lifecycle visualization Convert, Ghostscript version 8.64 (Asian font version) Adobe LiveCycle PDF Generator ES version 8.2.1, Adobe Acrobat and source format authoring application (for example, MS Office 2003, XP, or 2007) Install Render Management Start TEM and perform or verify the following selections: 1. In the Features panel, select the following features: Under Server Enhancements, select Sample files. Under Enterprise Knowledge Foundation, select Dispatcher Server, Dispatcher Client, Dispatcher Client for Rich Client, and Render Document for Rich Client. 1. Supported MS Office formats include Microsoft Word, Excel, PowerPoint, WordX, ExcelX and PPTX, unless otherwise noted Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

217 Installing Render Management Note The docmgt_samples.xml file includes DispatcherServiceConfig instances an administrator must deploy after creating a Business Modeler IDE template project. Record the installation directory used for the Dispatcher Server and Dispatcher Client. This is required in a later step. For example, you can use: C:\Program Files\Siemens\Teamcenter9\tc9rendering 2. In the Dispatcher Components panel, specify the Dispatcher root directory. For example, you can use: C:\Program Files\Siemens\Teamcenter9\dispatcher 3. In the Dispatcher Components panel, select Install Module, and then enter a Staging Directory and Port for the module. 4. In the Dispatcher Settings, select Install Documentation, Start Dispatcher Services, and Start Dispatcher Services as Windows Service. 5. In the Select Translators panel, under Document Management (DocMgt) Translators, select PdfGenerator and RenderMgtTranslator. Also, under TcVis Translators, select PreviewService Translator. 6. In the Translator Settings panel, under TcVis Translators, enter the installation location for Teamcenter lifecycle visualization, and the Vis License value. Under Document Management (DocMgt) Translators, enter the paths to the watched folder input and output directories, and a maximum wait time. Note The watched folder input and output directories must point to the same location as the Adobe LiveCycle watched folder input and result directories, respectively. For more information about configuring these directories, see the Adobe LiveCycle ES documentation. TEM updates the following files with the specified information: and: Dispatcher\Module\Translators\previewservice\previewservice.bat Dispatcher\Module\Translators\docmgt_translators\...config\pdfgenerator_config.properties 7. For Dispatcher Client, specify and record a password. To complete the configuration: 1. Verify that pdftranslator.bat is installed in the dispatcher root directory: Dispatcher\Module\translators\docmgt_translators\ pdfgenerator\pdftranslator.bat 2. Verify the pdfgenerator_config.properties file under the dispatcher root directory sets full paths for the Adobe PDF Generator ES watched input and results folders: For example, in: PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 14-3

218 Chapter 14 Installing Render Management Set: Dispatcher\Module\translators\docmgt_translators\ config\pdfgenerator_config.properties WatchedFolderInputDir=//pdfgenerator_server/LCWatchedFolder/input WatchedFolderResultDir=//pdfgenerator_server/LCWatchedFolder/result Note Caution These case-sensitive paths can be in a shared network directory, but must point to the same locations as the Adobe LiveCycle watched folder directories configured for GeneratePDFService WatchedFolder Endpoint. See the relevant documentation at the Adobe website, for instructions on how to set up WatchedFolder directories. Windows services typically do not support mapped drives. Complete Render Management installation After installation, the administrator can: Specify which translator to use in file conversion when there are multiple translation services that can perform the conversion for rich client document rendering on demand, during checkin, and in a workflow task using Business Modeler IDE to configure IRDC and DispatcherServiceConfig business objects. Use Business Modeler IDE to set up necessary IRDC object configurations. An item revision must be under IRDC control for rendering to occur. For example, an IRDC configuration specifies dataset types to translate, and whether to render the item revision at checkin. For more information about configuring IRDC objects, see the Business Modeler IDE Guide. Use Business Modeler IDE to select the service for file translation by setting DispatcherServiceConfig sort order priority for the previewservice service and for the pdfgenerator service. The service with the higher sort order priority is selected when you have multiple translation services defined with the same settings for Source Dataset Type Name and Derived Dataset Type Name. You can also deselect the Service Available setting for a translation service to make the service unavailable. Create access rules to grant access privileges to the dispatcher proxy user to update attributes of the dispatcher request object. For more information about creating access rules, see Getting Started with Dispatcher (Translation Management). Start the dispatcher services for the scheduler, module, and dispatcher client. For more information about starting dispatcher services, see Getting Started with Dispatcher (Translation Management) Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

219 Installing Render Management Render document options After successful configuration, a My Teamcenter user in rich client can perform some or all of the following operations, depending on the setup of the IRDC and Dispatcher service configuration. Use the TranslationfiRender Document menu command translation. Render a document revision during checkin. Render a document revision using the workflow task action handler. Use the TranslatefiAdministration Console menu command to view the status of the translation. Validating pdfgenerator by translating files from the command line You can use the pdfgenerator utility to translate files from the command line. Use this to validate pdfgenerator translator. Note This utility works only on Windows. For more information, see the Utilities Reference. Viewing document rendering logs If you have set up Log Manager, you can see the document render logs in the Log Manager directory. For more information about Log Manager, see Getting Started with Dispatcher (Translation Management). If you have configured logging for dispatcher requests, you can see the document render logs in the Request Administration Console. For more information about using the Request Administration Console, see Getting Started with Dispatcher (Translation Management). PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 14-5

220

221 Chapter 15 Installing Teamcenter online help Installing Teamcenter online help Install online help Install online help using TEM Install online help manually Install online help on the J2EE Web tier Configure online help access for Teamcenter clients Configure online help for the thin client Configure online help for the rich client Configure online help for the rich client distribution instance PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide

222

223 Chapter 15 Installing Teamcenter online help Installing Teamcenter online help Teamcenter provides an online help collection that contains guides for all Teamcenter applications and clients. This collection can be viewed in a Web browser. The collection is available in HTML and PDF formats. Teamcenter HTML online help collection PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 15-1

224 Chapter 15 Installing Teamcenter online help Teamcenter PDF online help collection Teamcenter online help requires a supported Web browser and the appropriate Java plug-in for your platform. The PDF online help collection requires a PDF reader or Web browser plug-in. For information about supported Web browsers and Java versions, see the Siemens PLM Software Certification Database: certification/teamcenter.shtml For information about using Teamcenter online help, see Getting Started with Teamcenter. The following table describes various ways you can access Teamcenter online help collections Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

225 Installing Teamcenter online help Access to Teamcenter online help collection HTML PDF Directly from documentation distribution image 1 Installed on a local host or network file location Installed on a Web server 2 Installed in a rich client configuration 3 Installed in a thin client Web application 3 Directly from GTAC 4 Notes: 1. See the PDF directory on the documentation distribution image. No installation is required. 2. For the PDF collection, full-collection search is not available over HTTP protocol. 3. Access online help through the Help menu in the client. For more information see Getting Started with Teamcenter. 4. The HTML and PDF online help collections for the current version of Teamcenter are available at the following URL: If you install online help in a rich client configuration using TEM, online help access from the rich client is configured automatically. If you install online help in a thin client Web application, online help access from the thin client is configured automatically. If you install online help on a separate host or in a separate Teamcenter configuration, you can configure clients to access those separate online help installations. After online help for the rich client or thin client is installed and configured, you can view online help from the Help menu in the client. For more information, see Getting Started with Teamcenter. Note The PDF online help collection is not accessible though the Help menu in Teamcenter rich client or thin client. Install online help Install online help using the method appropriate to your needs: Install online help in a local rich client configuration using TEM. Install online help manually on a local host or network file location from the documentation distribution image. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 15-3

226 Chapter 15 Installing Teamcenter online help Install online help on the.net Web tier. Install online help on the J2EE Web tier. If you want to configure clients to access online help installed on a separate host, see Configure online help access for Teamcenter clients. Install online help using TEM 1. Launch Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM). 2. Create a new Teamcenter configuration or select the existing configuration to which you want to add online help. 3. Proceed to the Features panel. 4. Under Server Enhancements, select the Online Help feature. 5. Proceed to the Online Help panel. Select the online help components you want to install. Component Teamcenter online help library Teamcenter developer references Description Installs the Teamcenter online help library. This component is required. This component requires approximately 561 MB of disk space. Adds the Teamcenter developer references to the online help collection. The following references are added to the Developer References for Customization group in the online help library: C++ API Reference Integration Toolkit (ITK) Function Reference Services Reference This component requires approximately 629 MB of additional disk space. Note These references are installed only to the Teamcenter HTML Help Collection. They are not available in PDF format, and therefore are not installed to the PDF collection Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

227 Installing Teamcenter online help Component Teamcenter Data Model Report Teamcenter PDF help collection Description Adds the Teamcenter Data Model Report to the Developer References for Customization group in the online help library. The Teamcenter Data Model Report contains documentation on standard Teamcenter data model objects, such as business objects, classes, attributes, properties, lists of values (LOVs), and others. This component requires approximately 3.44 GB of additional disk space and requires significantly more time to install. Note The Teamcenter Data Model Report is installed only to the Teamcenter HTML Help Collection. It is not available in PDF format, and therefore is not installed to the PDF collection. Installs the Teamcenter online help collection in PDF format on your local host. After installation, you can open the online help collection from the following location: TC_ROOT/PDF/index.html This component requires approximately 344 MB of additional disk space. 6. Proceed to the Confirmation panel, and then click Start to install online help. During installation, TEM prompts for the location of the online help files. Enter the path to the location that contains these files on the Teamcenter documentation distribution image. File Description TEM places files in this directory tchelp.jar Online help library TC_ROOT/help tcrefs.jar Developer references TC_ROOT/help DataModelReport.zip Data Model Report TC_ROOT/help PDF.zip PDF help collection TC_ROOT/PDF PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 15-5

228 Chapter 15 Installing Teamcenter online help Note You can later add or remove online help components using TEM in maintenance mode: 1. Proceed to the Feature Maintenance panel. 2. Under Online Help, select Add Help Files. 3. In the Online Help panel, select online help components to add or clear components you want to remove. After you install online help using TEM, you can view online help from the Help menu in the rich client. For more information, see Getting Started with Teamcenter. Install online help manually 1. Locate the online help files on the Teamcenter 10.1 documentation distribution image. 2. Expand online help files to a directory on your local host or a network file location. File tchelp.jar tcrefs.jar Description Contains the Teamcenter online help library. This file is required and must be expanded before any other online help files. This file requires approximately 561 MB of disk space. Contains the Teamcenter developer references. This file is optional. Expanding this file added the following references to the Developer References for Customization group in the online help library: C++ API Reference Integration Toolkit (ITK) Function Reference Services Reference This component requires approximately 629 MB of additional disk space. Note These references are installed only to the Teamcenter HTML Help Collection. They are not available in PDF format, and therefore are not installed to the PDF collection Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

229 Installing Teamcenter online help File DataModelReport.zip PDF.zip Description Contains the Teamcenter Data Model Report. This file is optional. Expanding this file adds the Teamcenter Data Model Report to the Developer References for Customization group in the online help library. The Teamcenter Data Model Report contains documentation on standard Teamcenter data model objects, such as business objects, classes, attributes, properties, lists of values (LOVs), and others. This component requires approximately 3.44 GB of additional disk space. Note The Teamcenter Data Model Report is installed only to the Teamcenter HTML Help Collection. It is not available in PDF format, and therefore is not installed to the PDF collection. Contains theteamcenter online help library in PDF format. This file is optional. This component requires approximately 344 MB of additional disk space. 3. If you want other hosts to access online help, set permissions for the HTML online help directory (help) or the PDF online help directory (PDF) as needed to allow access to other hosts. After installation, you can open the online help collection from the following locations: HTML online help: help-directory/help/index.html PDF online help: help-directory/pdf/index.htm You can use this same method to install the online help on a Web (HTTP) server. Rich client or thin client hosts can be configured to access the HTML online help collection over a Web server. For more information, see Configure online help access for Teamcenter clients. Note The PDF online help collection cannot be accessed through the rich client or thin client. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 15-7

230 Chapter 15 Installing Teamcenter online help Install online help on the J2EE Web tier You can install online help on the J2EE Web tier as part of a thin client Web application. This provides online help for the thin client that can also be accessed by rich clients as described in Configure online help access for Teamcenter clients. 1. Launch the Web Application Manager. 2. Click Add to create a new Web application. 3. In the Add Web Application dialog box, type a name and enter a staging location for the online help Web application. In the Solution Type box, select Thin Client. 4. In the Disk Locations for Install Images box, enter the path to the tchelp.jar file on the Teamcenter 10.1 documentation distribution image. 5. Click Solutions. 6. In the Select Solutions dialog box, select the Teamcenter - Online Help solution, and then click OK. 7. In the Add Web Application dialog box, click OK. 8. In the Modify Required Context Parameters dialog box, click OK. The Web Application Manager builds the online help Web application. 9. Locate the deployable file generated during installation. This file is in the deployment directory under the specified staging location. Deploy the Web application as described in the Web Application Deployment Guide. 1 After you install online help using TEM, you can view online help from the Help menu in the thin client. For more information see Getting Started with Teamcenter. Note Additional online help components, such as the Teamcenter developer references and Teamcenter Data Model Report, cannot be installed on the J2EE Web tier. The Web Application Manager installs only the core Teamcenter online help library. If you have additional thin client Web applications that do not contain online help, you can configure those applications to access online help installed in another thin client Web application. For more information, see Configure online help for the thin client. 1. The Web Application Deployment Guide provides deployment procedures specific to various supported application servers. Choose the appropriate procedure for the application server you use Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

231 Installing Teamcenter online help Configure online help access for Teamcenter clients Configure access to installed online help for rich client and thin client hosts. Note If you install online help in a rich client configuration using TEM as described in Install online help using TEM, no further configuration is needed to access to online help. Configure online help for the thin client If your thin client Web application contains the Teamcenter - Online Help solution, no further configuration is needed to enable online help. To enable a thin client to access online help installed in a separate Web applications, launch the thin client and modify the following Teamcenter preferences to add the full path to the online help files. Preference WEB_core_help_server WEB_help_server Description Set to the full path to the launch page for the online help collection, including the application name, for example, /tc/help/index.html. Set to the URL of the thin client help, for example, /tc/help/index.html #filename:thin_client_dhtml:getting_started For more information about these preferences, see the Preferences and Environment Variables Reference. For information about setting preferences, see the Preferences and Environment Variables Reference. Note This procedure assumes you have an existing deployed thin client Web application that contains the Teamcenter - Online Help solution. For information about creating a thin client Web application that contains Teamcenter online help, see Install online help on the J2EE Web tier. Configure online help for the rich client Configure access to online help installed on a separate host in a new or existing rich client configuration. 1. Launch TEM. 2. Create a new Teamcenter configuration or perform maintenance on an existing configuration. New configuration: a. Proceed to the Features panel. b. Select the two-tier or four-tier rich client, but do not select the Online Help feature. Note For more information about installing a two-tier or four-tier rich client, see the Installation on Linux Clients Guide. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 15-9

232 Chapter 15 Installing Teamcenter online help Existing configuration: a. Proceed to the Feature Maintenance panel. b. Under Teamcenter Rich Client 2-tier or Teamcenter Rich Client 4-tier, select Modify settings. 3. Proceed to the Rich Client Settings panel. Select the Enable online help check box. 4. In the Rich Client Settings panel, select the Enable online help check box, and then specify how you want the rich client to access online help. Direct access from a network file location: a. Select Help Files Directory. b. Enter the path to the installed online help, for example, /tc/help. Access from a Web server: a. Select Web Server URL. b. Type the URL to the location of the Teamcenter online help collection, for example, 5. Proceed to the Confirmation panel, and then click Start to update the Teamcenter configuration. Configure online help for the rich client distribution instance 1. Launch the Web Application Manager. 2. Create or modify a rich client distribution instance. In the Modify Required Context Parameters dialog box, specify how you want the rich client to access online help by setting context parameters as follows. Direct access from a network file location. Context parameter Value RichClientHelpWebServer Specify file://. RichClientHelpLocation Specify the path to the location that contains the online help collection for both Windows and UNIX systems. The Web Application Manager appends index.html to this path. Access from a Web server Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

233 Installing Teamcenter online help Context parameter Value RichClientHelpWebServer Specify replacing host-name and port with the host name and port for the deployed thin client Web application that contains the online help (the Teamcenter - Online Help solution). RichClientHelpLocation Specify the subpath to the deployed Web application, for example, tc/help. The Web Application Manager appends index.htm to this path. For more information about these parameters, see Rich client distribution instance requirements. Note For more information about creating a rich client distribution instance, see Install rich client distribution instances. For more information about modifying an existing rich client distribution instance, see Add components to the distribution server instance. 3. After you set context parameters, click OK. The Web Application Manager updates the rich client distribution instance. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 15-11

234

235 Part VI Additional configuration and maintenance Create additional Teamcenter configurations, apply patches, or uninstall Teamcenter as described in the appropriate topics. Managing installations and configurations Deploying localized versions of Teamcenter Creating a custom distribution Installing Teamcenter patches Uninstalling Teamcenter PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide

236

237 Chapter 16 Managing installations and configurations Managing installations and configurations Create a configuration Modify a configuration Add an existing Teamcenter database Add or configure a database Change the Oracle password How to change the Oracle password Encrypt the password file Encrypt the database connection string Configure multiple databases for a four-tier rich client Multiple database overview (four-tier rich client) Multiple database example (four-tier rich client) Step 1: Install the corporate server Step 2: Deploy the Web tier Step 3: Configure the rich client instance Migrate Teamcenter to a different JRE PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide

238

239 Chapter 16 Managing installations and configurations Managing installations and configurations A Teamcenter configuration is a collection of features associated with one Teamcenter data directory. The collection of configurations that share the same Teamcenter application root directory is a Teamcenter installation. When you installed Teamcenter executables using Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM) from the software distribution image, you created the first configuration. You can create a new Teamcenter configuration or modify features in your existing Teamcenter configuration using Teamcenter Environment Manager. Create a configuration 1. Start Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM): a. Change to the install directory in the Teamcenter application root directory for your Teamcenter installation. b. Run the tem.sh script. 2. In the Maintenance panel, choose Configuration Manager. 3. In the Configuration Maintenance panel, choose Create new configuration. 4. In the Configuration panel, type a description and unique ID for the new configuration. 5. In the Solutions panel, optionally select one or more solutions. For a description of a solution, point to the solution name in TEM or see Teamcenter solutions. Note Solutions are preselected groups of features that provide starting points for recommended Teamcenter configurations. You can add features or deselect features in the Features panel in Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM). 6. In the Features panel, select features to include in the configuration. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 16-1

240 Chapter 16 Managing installations and configurations For a description of a feature, point to the feature name in TEM or see Teamcenter features. 7. Proceed through the remaining panels in TEM, entering the required information for the features you selected. For information about each panel, click the help button. 8. When TEM displays the Confirmation panel, click Start to begin installation. Modify a configuration Add Teamcenter features to an existing configuration, or remove them from a configuration: 1. Start Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM): a. Change to the install directory in the Teamcenter application root directory for your Teamcenter installation. b. Run the tem.sh script. 2. In the Maintenance panel, choose Configuration Manager. 3. In the Configuration Maintenance panel, choose Perform maintenance on an existing configuration. 4. In the Old Configuration panel, select the configuration you want to modify. 5. In the Feature Maintenance panel, select Add/Remove Features. Note Options in the Feature Maintenance vary depending on the features in your configuration. For information about other options, see Teamcenter Environment Manager Help. 6. In the Features panel, select features to add to the configuration, or deselect features you want to remove. 7. Proceed through the remaining panels in TEM, entering the required information for the features you selected. For information about each panel, click the help button. 8. When TEM displays the Confirmation panel, click Start to begin installation. Add an existing Teamcenter database You can add a Teamcenter database to an installation by creating a configuration that references an existing Teamcenter data directory and its configured database. A data directory is associated with one (and only one) database instance Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

241 Managing installations and configurations 1. In the install directory of the Teamcenter application root directory of the configuration, type the tem.sh program to start Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM). 2. In the Configuration Maintenance panel, select Add new configuration. 3. In the Configuration panel, enter a description of and unique ID for the configuration you are creating. 4. Proceed to the Features panel. Select the Teamcenter Foundation feature only and specify an installation directory for the new configuration the Installation Directory box. The installation directory must not already exist on your system. (TEM creates the directory.) 5. In the Foundation panel, select Use populated database and existing data directory and enter the full path to the existing data directory in the Data Directory Location box. 6. In the Data Directory box, enter a location for the Teamcenter data directory. The directory must exist. The Teamcenter data directory is called the TC_DATA directory. This value is stored in the TC_DATA environment variable on your system. TEM creates shared data subdirectories and files in this location. Do not set TC_DATA in the system environment. TEM sets this variable as required in various scripts. Setting this variable in the operating system can cause conflicts if you install more than one configuration. 7. In the Teamcenter Administrative User panel, enter the password for the Teamcenter administrator. Caution Make sure the password does not contain space characters or any of the following $ % " : ;. < > ( ) { } 8. In the Confirmation panel, review your selections and click Start to add the database. Add or configure a database You can simultaneously configure a Teamcenter database and add it to an installation by creating a new configuration. Because you are configuring a database, you must also install and configure File Management System and create a data directory. Prerequisites: A database server must be installed (IBM DB2 or Oracle). A database instance must exist, either a specific instance configured for Teamcenter or a multipurpose instance to be configured in this procedure. For information about installing a database server and database instances, see Database server installation. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 16-3

242 Chapter 16 Managing installations and configurations 1. In the install directory of the Teamcenter application root directory of the configuration, type the tem.sh program to start Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM). 2. In the Configuration Maintenance panel, select Add new configuration. 3. In the Configuration panel, enter a description of and unique ID for the configuration you are creating. 4. Proceed to the Features panel. Select the Teamcenter Foundation feature only and specify an installation directory for the new configuration the Installation Directory box. The installation directory must not already exist on your system. (TEM creates the directory.) 5. In the Foundation panel, select Create new data directory using existing populated database. 6. In the Foundation Database panel, enter access information for the existing database. In the Data Directory box, enter a location for the Teamcenter data directory. The directory must exist. The Teamcenter data directory is called the TC_DATA directory. This value is stored in the TC_DATA environment variable on your system. TEM creates shared data subdirectories and files in this location. Do not set TC_DATA in the system environment. TEM sets this variable as required in various scripts. Setting this variable in the operating system can cause conflicts if you install more than one configuration. 7. In the Teamcenter Administrative User panel, enter the password for the Teamcenter administrator. Caution Make sure the password does not contain space characters or any of the following $ % " : ;. < > ( ) { } 8. In the Confirmation panel, review your selections and click Start to add the database. Change the Oracle password How to change the Oracle password If you use an Oracle database and want to change the password Teamcenter uses to connect to the database, you can do this two ways using the install utility: Encrypt the password file using the -encryptpwf argument. Encrypt the database connection string using the -encrypt argument Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

243 Managing installations and configurations Encrypt the password file To encrypt a password file, you set a temporary environment variable to the password you want to encrypt, and then generate an encrypted password file. 1. Open a Teamcenter command prompt. 2. Create a temporary environment variable and set it to the password you want to encrypt: set variable-name=password For example: set temp_pw=mypassword Note For security, choose a unique and obscure name for the environment variable, and delete the variable promptly after completing this procedure. 3. Type the following command: install -encryptpwf e=variable-name f=password-file Replace variable-name with the name of the environment variable you created. Replace password-file with the path and name of the password file to create. For example: install -encryptpwf e=temp_pw f=pwd.txt This command generates an encrypted password file that can be used for connecting to the Teamcenter database. The password file can also be used with Teamcenter utilities that use the password file (-pf) argument. 4. Delete the temporary environment variable you created in step 2. Caution This step is important for security. For more information about the -encryptpwf argument for the install utility, see the Utilities Reference. Encrypt the database connection string To encrypt the database connection string, you must temporarily set the TC_DB_CONNECT environment variable and then re-encrypt the connection string. 1. Open a Teamcenter command prompt. 2. Set the TC_DB_CONNECT environment variable: set TC_DB_CONNECT= db-user:password@database-id Replace db-user with the database user name (the Oracle user). Replace password with the new database password. Replace database-id with the Oracle database name. 3. Type the following command: install -encrypt PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 16-5

244 Chapter 16 Managing installations and configurations This command generates a new database connection string with the new Oracle password encrypted. Copy the new database connection string. 4. Open the TC_DATA/tc_profilevars file in a plain text editor. 5. Locate the following line in the file: set TC_DB_CONNECT=connection-string 6. Replace the existing connection-string with the string generated by the install -encrypt command. 7. Save the changes to the tc_profilevars.bat file. For more information about TC_DB_CONNECT environment variable, see the Preferences and Environment Variables Reference. For more information about the -encrypt argument for the install utility, see the Utilities Reference. Configure multiple databases for a four-tier rich client Configure the rich client to access multiple databases. Multiple database overview (four-tier rich client) To configure a four-tier rich client with access to multiple databases, install a Teamcenter corporate server, including a server manager, for each database and deploy a Web tier EAR file for each server manager. For example, to configure rich client access to two databases, configure: In the enterprise tier, install two corporate servers with server managers and connect each server to a different database. In the Web tier, deploy two Web tier files, each connecting to one of the server managers Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

245 Managing installations and configurations Four-Tier Rich Client FSC Parent= TcHost1: tc.ear TreeCache= ClusterTcData1 tc.ear TreeCache= ClusterTcData2 <fmsworld> <multisiteimport siteid=" "> <defaultfscimport fscid="fsc_tchost2 fscaddress="tchost2:4444" priority="0"/> </multisiteimport> Server Manager TreeCache= ClusterTcData1 FMS FSC_TcHost2 Server Manager TreeCache= ClusterTcData2 TC Server n TC Server n TcHost1 TcHost2 TcData1 TcData2 Multiple databases (four-tier rich client) Multiple database example (four-tier rich client) This example describes a sample scenario for configuring multiple databases. Step 1: Install the corporate server To enable a rich client to access two databases, install and configure two corporate servers: PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 16-7

246 Chapter 16 Managing installations and configurations Note For the complete procedure, see Teamcenter server installation. 1. Using Teamcenter Environment Manager, install Teamcenter in a corporate server configuration on host 1 (TcHost1): Configure the corporate server to connect to database 1 (TcData1). Select the server manager component and configure it with the TreeCache cluster name of ClusterTcData1. 2. Using Teamcenter Environment Manager, install Teamcenter in a corporate server configuration on host 2 (TcHost2): Configure the corporate server to connect to database 2 (TcData2). Select the server manager component and configure it with the TreeCache cluster name of ClusterTcData2. 3. On TcHost1, edit the FMS master file to make FMS aware of the FSC on TcHost2: a. Go to the fms directory in the Teamcenter application root directory. b. Open the fmsmaster_fsc_service-id.xml file and find the following lines: <fmsworld> <multisiteimport siteid="othersite"> <fscimport fscid="otherfsc" fscaddress="host:4444"> <volumeimport volumeid="othervol" /> </fscimport> </multisiteimport> c. Edit the lines, adding the bold text and deleting the indicated text: Original: <fmsworld> <multisiteimport siteid="othersite"> <defaultfscimport fscid="otherfsc" fscaddress="host:4444" priority= 0 /> <volumeimport volumeid="othervol" /> </fscimport> </multisiteimport> Revised: <fmsworld> <multisiteimport siteid="othersite"> <defaultfscimport fscid="otherfsc" fscaddress="host:4444" priority= 0 /> </multisiteimport> d. In the revised section: Replace the value for the siteid parameter with the FMS enterprise ID of the FSC on TcHost2. This value is in the FMS master file on TcHost2 in the fmsenterprise id parameter. Replace the value for the fscid parameter with the FSC ID on TcHost2. This value is in the FMS master file on TcHost2 in the fsc id parameter Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

247 Managing installations and configurations Replace the value for the fscaddress parameter with the host name and port number of host 2. This value is in the FMS master file on TcHost2 in the fsc address parameter. For example: <fmsworld> <multisiteimport siteid=" "> <defaultfscimport fscid="fsc_tchost2" fscaddress="tchost2:4444" priority= 0 /> </multisiteimport> e. On TcHost1, stop and restart the FSC service. Step 2: Deploy the Web tier Deploy and configure the Web tier EAR files to connect to the server managers: Note For the complete procedure, see J2EE Web tier installation. 1. Generate the Web tier EAR file, configuring it to connect to the server manager of TcHost1 by specifying the same values for the TreeCache cluster name and TreeCache mode. 1 For example: TcHost1 server manager TreeCache cluster name: ClusterTcData1 TreeCache mode: TCP Web tier application TreeCache cluster name: ClusterTcData1 TreeCache mode: TCP 2. Generate the Web tier EAR file, configuring it to connect to the server manager of TcHost 2 by specifying identical values for the TreeCache cluster name and TreeCache mode. For example: TcHost 2 server manager TreeCache cluster name: ClusterTcData2 TreeCache mode: TCP Web tier application TreeCache cluster name: ClusterTcData2 TreeCache mode: TCP Note Make sure you choose distinct sets of ports for each EAR file. 3. Deploy each Web tier EAR file in a third-party application server in a separate domain. Users who install this rich client instance, can choose from two databases, TcData1 and TcData2, when logging on to Teamcenter. 1. For more information about configuring JBoss Cache TreeCache and setting TreeCache parameters, see The TreeCache implementation also uses the JGroups toolkit. For more information about JGroups, see PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 16-9

248 Chapter 16 Managing installations and configurations Step 3: Configure the rich client instance Configure the rich client distribution instance to include the two databases: Note For the complete procedure, see Installing rich client Web applications. 1. For the ParentFSCAddressTable parameter, specify the host name and port number of TcHost1. For example: TcHost1:4444 TcHost1 has the site information about the FSC on TcHost2. 2. For the HTTPServerTable parameter, specify two URLs, one for each deployed Web tier application. For example: URI Name TcData1 TcData2 Migrate Teamcenter to a different JRE The Java Runtime Environment (JRE) used by Teamcenter and Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM) is set by TEM during Teamcenter installation. If you upgrade or install a new JRE, you must migrate Teamcenter to the new JRE using TEM. Caution Do not remove your previous JRE until after you complete migrating Teamcenter to the new JRE. If you removed your old JRE before performing this procedure, TEM cannot start. For more information, see Problems/error messages. To change the JRE used by Teamcenter and TEM, perform the following steps. 1. Start Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM): a. Change to the install directory in the Teamcenter application root directory for the Teamcenter installation or configuration you want to modify. b. Run the tem.sh script. 2. In the Maintenance panel, select Migrate Teamcenter to another JRE and then click Next. 3. The Migrate Teamcenter to another JRE panel lists Teamcenter services that depend on the JRE and must be shut down before the migration can begin. After you make sure these services are shut down, select All features from the above list have been shut down, and then click Next. 4. In the JRE Location panel, enter the path to the JRE you want Teamcenter to use Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

249 Managing installations and configurations Caution Note If you use 64-bit Teamcenter, make sure you specify a 64-bit JRE. Similarly, for 32-bit Teamcenter, you must specify a 32-bit JRE. Depending on the features in your configuration, TEM may prompt you for the operating system user password. 5. In the Confirmation panel, click Start to migrate Teamcenter to the specified JRE. If you encounter problems migrating Teamcenter to the new JRE, see Problems/error messages. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 16-11

250

251 Chapter 17 Deploying localized versions of Teamcenter Deploying localized versions of Teamcenter Configuring client display language Choose a display language for the thin client Choose a display language for the rich client Environment settings for non-english locales Environment settings for UTF-8 environments Environment settings for non-utf-8 environments Deploying localizations Deploying thin client localizations Update thin client localized text Create a thin client localization Convert the thin client user interface for Hebrew Deploying rich client localizations Display Siemens PLM Software-provided rich client localizations Update rich client localized text PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide

252

253 Chapter 17 Deploying localized versions of Teamcenter Deploying localized versions of Teamcenter Siemens PLM Software provides localized versions of Teamcenter in the following languages: Language Chinese (Simplified) Chinese (Traditional) Czech English French German Locale code zh_cn zh_tw cz_cz en_us fr_fr de_de Hebrew en_us 1 Italian Japanese Korean Polish Portuguese (Brazilian) Russian Spanish it_it ja_jp ko_kr pl_pl pt_br ru_ru es_es Use the appropriate locale codes to deploy Teamcenter localizations or launch Teamcenter clients in a desired locale. If you provide your own localizations for locales not provided by Siemens PLM Software, use the appropriate Java standard locale codes similar to the locale codes in the preceding table. 2 For more information about localizing Teamcenter, see the Localization Guide. 1. The locale code for Hebrew is en_us because Siemens PLM Software does not yet provide a Hebrew translation. The en_us code allows data entry in Hebrew, but interface text is in English. 2. Standard locale codes are composed of a two lowercase character language code from the ISO standard, followed by an underscore, followed by a two uppercase character country code from the ISO alpha-2 standard. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 17-1

254 Chapter 17 Deploying localized versions of Teamcenter Configuring client display language By default, Teamcenter clients display in the language specified by your operating system locale settings. If you want to override the default language, perform the appropriate procedure to choose the display language for the thin client or the rich client. Choose a display language for the thin client At each logon, you can choose between multiple languages, depending on your company s policy and installation. There are two ways you can specify the language: Specify the language in the URL. For example: o o To specify French, type in the URL. To specify Russian, type in the URL. Note o When specifying a language in the URL, use standard W3C locale identifiers. For more information, see the following URL: o Whether your network uses IPv6 (128-bit) or IPv4 (32-bit) addresses, use host names in URLs wherever possible so the domain name system (DNS) can determine which IP address to use. If you must use IP addresses and your network uses IPv6 addresses, enclose the literal IPv6 address in square brackets, for example: Specify the language in your browser preferences. Your ability to set the language for the thin client depends on the character set encoding of the Teamcenter server host and also the character set encoding of the Teamcenter database. Note To prevent mixed-language display after you change the thin client display language, clear your Web browser cache. This prevents the interface from displaying in mixed languages. For more information about configuring language display during installation, see Installing thin client Web applications. Choose a display language for the rich client By default, the rich client is displayed in the language specified by the operating system Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

255 Deploying localized versions of Teamcenter Note Your ability to set the language for the rich client depends on the character set encoding of the Teamcenter server host and also the character set encoding of the Teamcenter database. For more information about configuring language display during installation, see Installing rich client Web applications. If you find that Asian multibyte characters do not display correctly in the rich client, set your system font to a font that supports Asian multibyte characters. For example, on Microsoft Windows systems, the Arial Unicode MS font can be set to Message Box to correct this problem. Similarly, if you find that Asian multibyte characters do not display correctly when you start the rich client using the native language (-nl) option, restart your system in the appropriate locale and set your system font to a font that supports Asian multibyte characters. If you want to override the default language to launch the rich client in a desired language, add the -nl argument to the rich client launch command: TC_ROOT/start_portal nl locale-code Replace TC_ROOT with the Teamcenter home directory, and replace locale-code with the desired locale code listed in Deploying localized versions of Teamcenter. For example, to launch the rich client Italian user interface, enter the following from a command prompt: Note /tc/rac/start_portal nl it_it To prevent mixed-language display the next time you run the rich client after you change the nl argument value, or after you change your operating system locale, delete the Teamcenter directory under your user directory ($HOME/Teamcenter 3 ). Environment settings for non-english locales Teamcenter is supported in the following locales on all server platforms: Chinese (Simplified) Chinese (Traditional) Czech English French German Hebrew Italian Japanese Korean Polish Portuguese (Brazilian) Russian 3. $HOME is your user home directory. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 17-3

256 Chapter 17 Deploying localized versions of Teamcenter Spanish To ensure correct display and processing of Teamcenter data, set the required values in your operating system environment. Use the appropriate values for your locale and platform. Environment settings for UTF-8 environments Support for the Unicode UTF-8 character set in Teamcenter is restricted to UNIX or Linux platforms that are configured to run the Unicode UTF-8 operating system. A new database installation is required with Unicode UTF-8 character set support. You must configure your Teamcenter installation to run the UTF-8 character set, observing the following considerations: Your platform administrator must configure the system to run the Unicode UTF-8 character set operating system using CDE (Common Desktop Environment) on UNIX systems, or KDE on Linux systems. This is required so that all software running in this operating system environment understands the default character set is UTF-8. If you use Linux, your Linux platform administrator must configure the machine to run Unicode UTF-8 character set operating system by default. This enables all software running on this platform operating system to understand the default UTF-8 character set. Make sure you configure your operating system to run Unicode UTF-8 before you configure a Teamcenter two-tier or four-tier server installation to run the UTF-8 character set. You must configure the Teamcenter thin client to connect to a four-tier UTF-8 server installation running on a Unicode UTF-8 UNIX or Linux operating system. The thin client can be run in a Web browser on any Siemens PLM Software supported platform and language character set encoding operating system. A new Teamcenter installation may configure support for the Unicode UTF-8 character set to install a new database configured with Unicode UTF-8 character set support. Note The thin client or the four-tier rich client can run on any platform (Windows, UNIX, or Linux) running any language character set. Rich client hosts must have the appropriate fonts installed for characters to display properly. If you import translated content in languages that require multibyte characters, such as Russian and Chinese Simplified, you must configure your Teamcenter installation to support the UTF-8 character set to ensure that titles and other properties on this content display correctly in your environment. For more information about setting up translation features, see the Content Management Guide Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

257 Deploying localized versions of Teamcenter Warning If your Teamcenter database server uses the UTF-8 character set, you must not install your Teamcenter corporate server on a Windows host. Teamcenter data from a UTF-8 database may display incorrectly in a two-tier rich client on Windows and can become corrupted if you modify data using a Windows-based corporate server or two-tier rich client. The following illustration shows a sample Teamcenter configuration for restricted Unicode UTF-8 character set support with clients displaying multiple locales. UNIX servers in this configuration run a Unicode UTF-8 character set operating system. Unicode homogeneous server platform configuration PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 17-5

258 Chapter 17 Deploying localized versions of Teamcenter Caution On IBM AIX systems, in locales that use commas for decimal points (for example, French), do not set the LC_ALL environment variable. Instead, make sure the LC_NUMERIC environment variable is set to a value of C. Setting LC_ALL on IBM AIX systems overrides the LC_NUMERIC setting and causes input string errors in the rich client. For more information about this issue, see software field bulletin SFB-Teamcenter-5972 on GTAC: Environment settings on UNIX and Linux systems (UTF-8) Locale Chinese (Simplified) Chinese (Traditional) Setting IBM AIX HP HP-UX Value Sun Solaris Linux Database character set 1 UTF8 UTF8 UTF8 UTF8 Server character set UTF-8 UTF-8 UTF-8 UTF-8 LANG and LC_ALL 2 ZH_CN.UTF-8 zh_cn.utf8 zh_cn.utf-8 zh_cn.utf8 TC_language_default 3 zh_cn zh_cn zh_cn zh_cn Database character set 1 UTF8 UTF8 UTF8 UTF8 Server character set UTF-8 UTF-8 UTF-8 UTF-8 LANG and LC_ALL 2 ZH_TW.UTF-8 zh_tw.utf8 zh_tw.utf-8 zh_tw.utf8 TC_language_default 3 zh_tw zh_tw zh_tw zh_tw Czech Database character set 1 UTF8 UTF8 UTF8 UTF8 Server character set UTF-8 UTF-8 UTF-8 UTF-8 LANG and LC_ALL 2 CS_CZ.UTF-8 cs_cz.utf8 cs_cz.utf-8 cs_cz.utf8 TC_language_default 3 cs_cz cs_cz cs_cz cs_cz English Database character set 1 UTF8 UTF8 UTF8 UTF8 Server character set UTF-8 UTF-8 UTF-8 UTF-8 LANG and LC_ALL 2 EN_US.UTF-8 en_us.utf8 en_us.utf-8 en_us.utf8 TC_language_default 3 en_us en_us en_us en_us French Database character set 1 UTF8 UTF8 UTF8 UTF8 Server character set UTF-8 UTF-8 UTF-8 UTF-8 LANG and LC_ALL 2 FR_FR.UTF-8 fr_fr.utf8 fr_fr.utf-8 fr_fr.utf8 TC_language_default 3 fr_fr fr_fr fr_fr fr_fr German Database character set 1 UTF8 UTF8 UTF8 UTF8 Server character set UTF-8 UTF-8 UTF-8 UTF-8 LANG and LC_ALL 2 DE_DE.UTF-8 de_de.utf8 de_de.utf-8 de_de.utf8 Notes: 1. Applies only to Oracle databases. 2. Set in the system environment variables. 3. Set in the TC_language_default preference Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

259 Deploying localized versions of Teamcenter Environment settings on UNIX and Linux systems (UTF-8) Locale Setting IBM AIX HP HP-UX Value Sun Solaris Linux TC_language_default 3 de_de de_de de_de de_de Hebrew Database character set 1 UTF8 UTF8 UTF8 UTF8 Server character set UTF-8 UTF-8 UTF-8 UTF-8 LANG and LC_ALL 2 HE_IL.UTF-8 iw_il.utf8 he_il.utf-8 he_il.utf8 TC_language_default 3 en_us en_us en_us en_us Italian Database character set 1 UTF8 UTF8 UTF8 UTF8 Server character set UTF-8 UTF-8 UTF-8 UTF-8 LANG and LC_ALL 2 IT_IT.UTF-8 it_it.utf8 it_it.utf-8 it_it.utf8 TC_language_default 3 it_it it_it it_it it_it Japanese Database character set 1 UTF8 UTF8 UTF8 UTF8 Server character set UTF-8 UTF-8 UTF-8 UTF-8 LANG and LC_ALL 2 JA_JP.UTF-8 ja_jp.utf8 ja_jp.utf-8 ja_jp.utf8 TC_language_default 3 ja_jp ja_jp ja_jp ja_jp Korean Database character set 1 UTF8 UTF8 UTF8 UTF8 Server character set UTF-8 UTF-8 UTF-8 UTF-8 LANG and LC_ALL 2 KO_KR.UTF-8 ko_kr.utf8 ko_kr.utf-8 ko_kr.utf8 TC_language_default 3 ko_kr ko_kr ko_kr ko_kr Polish Database character set 1 UTF8 UTF8 UTF8 UTF8 Portuguese (Brazilian) Server character set UTF-8 UTF-8 UTF-8 UTF-8 LANG and LC_ALL 2 PL_PL.UTF-8 pl_pl.utf8 pl_pl.utf-8 pl_pl.utf8 TC_language_default 3 pl_pl pl_pl pl_pl pl_pl Database character set 1 UTF-8 UTF-8 UTF-8 UTF-8 Server character set UTF-8 UTF-8 UTF-8 UTF-8 LANG and LC_ALL 2 PT_BR.UTF-8 pt_br.utf8 pt_br.utf-8 pt_br.utf8 TC_language_default 3 pt_br pt_br pt_br pt_br Russian Database character set 1 UTF8 UTF8 UTF8 UTF8 Server character set UTF-8 UTF-8 UTF-8 UTF-8 LANG and LC_ALL 2 RU_RU.UTF-8 ru_ru.utf8 ru_ru.utf-8 ru_ru.utf8 TC_language_default 3 ru_ru ru_ru ru_ru ru_ru Spanish Database character set 1 UTF8 UTF8 UTF8 UTF8 Server character set UTF-8 UTF-8 UTF-8 UTF-8 LANG and LC_ALL 2 ES_ES.UTF-8 es_es.utf8 es_es.utf-8 es_es.utf8 Notes: 1. Applies only to Oracle databases. 2. Set in the system environment variables. 3. Set in the TC_language_default preference. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 17-7

260 Chapter 17 Deploying localized versions of Teamcenter Environment settings on UNIX and Linux systems (UTF-8) Value Locale Setting IBM AIX HP HP-UX Sun Solaris Linux TC_language_default 3 es_es es_es es_es es_es Notes: 1. Applies only to Oracle databases. 2. Set in the system environment variables. 3. Set in the TC_language_default preference. Note To verify the character set in your server environment, enter the locale charmap command. In Hebrew and Japanese locales, set the following additional variables: 1. In the TC_DATA/tc_profilevars file, set TC_XML_ENCODING to UTF In the TC_ROOT/iiopservers/Start_TcServer1 file and the TC_ROOT/pool_manager/mgrstartMYDB, set TC_CHARACTER_ENCODING_SET to UTF8. Environment settings for non-utf-8 environments For non-english locales on UNIX systems, you must specify the system locale when logging on to the system using CDE (Common Desktop Environment) on UNIX systems or KDE on Linux systems. The LANG and LC_ALL environment variables must be identical to function properly. Set these and other values as described in the following table. Caution On IBM AIX systems, in locales that use commas for decimal points (for example, French), do not set the LC_ALL environment variable. Instead, make sure the LC_NUMERIC environment variable is set to a value of C. Setting LC_ALL on IBM AIX systems overrides the LC_NUMERIC setting and causes input string errors in the rich client. For more information about this issue, see software field bulletin SFB-Teamcenter-5972 on GTAC: Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

261 Deploying localized versions of Teamcenter Environment settings on UNIX and Linux systems (non-utf-8) Value Locale Setting IBM AIX HP HP-UX Sun Solaris Linux Chinese (Simplified) Database character set 1 ZHS16CGB or ZHS16GBK ZHS16CGB or ZHS16GBK ZHS16CGB or ZHS16GBK ZHS16CGB or ZHS16GBK Server character set UTF-8 CGB CGB CGB LANG and LC_ALL 2 ZH_CN.UTF-8 zh.gbk zh_cn.gbk zh_cn.gbk TC_language_default 3 zh_cn zh_cn zh_cn zh_cn Chinese Database character ZHT16BIG5 ZHT16BIG5 ZHT16BIG5 ZHT16BIG5 (Traditional) set 1 Czech English French German Hebrew Server character set BIG5 BIG5 BIG5 BIG5 LANG and LC_ALL 2 Zh_TW.big5 zh_tw.big5 zh_tw.big5 zh_tw TC_language_default 3 zh_tw zh_tw zh_tw zh_tw Database character EE8ISO8859P2 EE8ISO8859P2 EE8ISO8859P2 EE8ISO8859P2 set 1 Server character set ISO ISO ISO ISO LANG and LC_ALL 2 cs_cz.iso cs_cz.iso88592 cs_cz.iso cs_cz TC_language_default 3 cs_cz cs_cz cs_cz cs_cz Database character WE8ISO8859P1 WE8ISO8859P1 WE8ISO8859P1 WE8ISO8859P1 set 1 Server character set ISO ISO ISO ISO LANG and LC_ALL 2 en_us.iso en_us.iso88591 en_us.iso en_us TC_language_default 3 en_us en_us en_us en_us Database character WE8ISO8859P1 WE8ISO8859P1 WE8ISO8859P1 WE8ISO8859P1 set 1 Server character set ISO ISO ISO ISO LANG and LC_ALL 2 fr_fr.iso fr_fr.iso88591 fr_fr.iso fr_fr TC_language_default 3 fr_fr fr_fr fr_fr fr_fr Database character WE8ISO8859P1 WE8ISO8859P1 WE8ISO8859P1 WE8ISO8859P1 set 1 Server character set ISO ISO ISO ISO LANG and LC_ALL 2 de_de.iso de_de.iso88591 de_de.iso de_de TC_language_default 3 de_de de_de de_de de_de Database character IW8ISO8859P8 IW8ISO8859P8 IW8ISO8859P8 IW8ISO8859P8 set 1 Server character set ISO ISO ISO ISO LANG and LC_ALL 2 iw_il iw_il.iso88598 he_il.iso iw_il Notes: 1. Applies only to Oracle databases. 2. Set in the system environment variables. 3. Set the TC_language_default preference. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 17-9

262 Chapter 17 Deploying localized versions of Teamcenter Environment settings on UNIX and Linux systems (non-utf-8) Value Locale Setting IBM AIX HP HP-UX Sun Solaris Linux TC_language_default 3 en_us en_us en_us en_us Italian Japanese (EUC) Japanese (Shift-JIS) Korean Polish Portuguese (Brazilian) Russian Database character WE8ISO8859P1 WE8ISO8859P1 WE8ISO8859P1 WE8ISO8859P1 set 1 Server character set ISO ISO ISO ISO LANG and LC_ALL 2 it_it.iso it_it.iso88591 it_it.iso it_it TC_language_default 3 it_it it_it it_it it_it Database character JA16EUC JA16EUC JA16EUC JA16EUC set 1 Server character set EUC EUC EUC EUC LANG and LC_ALL 2 ja_jp.ibm-eucjp ja_jp.eucjp ja_jp.eucjp ja_jp.eucjp TC_language_default 3 ja_jp ja_jp ja_jp ja_jp Database character JA16SJIS JA16SJIS JA16SJIS JA16SJIS set 1 Server character set Shift-JIS Shift-JIS Shift-JIS Shift-JIS LANG and LC_ALL 2 Ja_JP.PCK ja_jp.sjis ja_jp.pck ja_jp.sjis TC_language_default 3 ja_jp ja_jp ja_jp ja_jp Database character KO16KSC5601 KO16KSC5601 KO16KSC5601 KO16KSC5601 set 1 Server character set KSC5601 KSC5601 KSC5601 KSC5601 LANG and LC_ALL 2 ko_kr.ibm-euckr ko_kr.euckr ko_kr.euc ko_kr TC_language_default 3 ko_kr ko_kr ko_kr ko_kr Database character EE8ISO8859P2 EE8ISO8859P2 EE8ISO8859P2 EE8ISO8859P2 set 1 Server character set ISO ISO ISO ISO LANG and LC_ALL 2 pl_pl.iso pl_pl.iso88592 pl_pl.iso pl_pl TC_language_default 3 pl_pl pl_pl pl_pl pl_pl Database character WE8ISO8859P1 WE8ISO8859P1 WE8ISO8859P1 WE8ISO8859P1 set 1 Server character set ISO ISO ISO ISO LANG and LC_ALL 2 pt_br.iso pt_br.iso88591 pt_br.iso pt_br TC_language_default 3 pt_br pt_br pt_br pt_br Database character CL8ISO8859P5 CL8ISO8859P5 CL8ISO8859P5 CL8ISO8859P5 set 1 Server character set ISO ISO ISO ISO LANG and LC_ALL 2 ru_ru.iso ru_ru.iso88595 ru_ru.iso ru_ru Notes: 1. Applies only to Oracle databases. 2. Set in the system environment variables. 3. Set the TC_language_default preference Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

263 Deploying localized versions of Teamcenter Environment settings on UNIX and Linux systems (non-utf-8) Value Locale Setting IBM AIX HP HP-UX Sun Solaris Linux Spanish TC_language_default 3 ru_ru ru_ru ru_ru ru_ru Database character WE8ISO8859P1 WE8ISO8859P1 WE8ISO8859P1 WE8ISO8859P1 set 1 Server character set ISO ISO ISO ISO LANG and LC_ALL 2 es_es.iso es_es.iso88591 es_es.iso es_es TC_language_default 3 es_es es_es es_es es_es Notes: 1. Applies only to Oracle databases. 2. Set in the system environment variables. 3. Set the TC_language_default preference. Note To verify the character set in your server environment, enter the locale charmap command. In Hebrew and Japanese locales, set the following additional variables: 1. In the TC_DATA/tc_profilevars file, set TC_XML_ENCODING to ISO In the TC_ROOT/iiopservers/Start_TcServer1 file and the TC_ROOT/pool_manager/mgrstartMYDB, set TC_CHARACTER_ENCODING_SET to ISO8859_8. Deploying localizations Build and deploy localizations to the Teamcenter thin client and rich client using the Web Application Manager. Note For more information about applying localizations to Teamcenter, see the Localization Guide. Deploying thin client localizations Use the Web Application Manager to build a localized Teamcenter thin client. Update thin client localized text The thin client text server files reside under the Teamcenter application root directory in the /lang/textserver/locale-code directory. If you change one of the text server XML files (*_locale.xml and *_errors.xml), regenerate the webstrings.xml file: PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 17-11

264 Chapter 17 Deploying localized versions of Teamcenter 1. Change to the WEB_ROOT/staging-location/webapp_root/teamcenter/dhtml/common/intl directory in the Teamcenter application root directory. 2. Copy the webstrings.xml file to the language directory. 3. Regenerate the Web tier application (file-name.ear) and deploy in an application server. 4. Change the header encoding of the webstrings.xml file to the appropriate language-specific character encoding value, for example, Shift-JIS for Japanese. Note After you complete these steps, clear your Web browser cache before you launch the thin client. Create a thin client localization If you localize the thin client into a language not provided by Siemens PLM Software: 1. In the Teamcenter application root directory, create a directory for the new language under the /lang/textserver/ directory. For example, if you localize the user interface for Hebrew, create the iw_il directory. 2. Copy all files from the en_us directory to the new language directory. 3. In the new language directory, translate all XML files to the new language. Note Make sure the encoding specification at the top of each XML file matches your system encoding when you save the file. Also, make sure the encoding specified supports the desired locale. For Hebrew on Windows systems, the encoding specification should resemble the following example: <?xml version="1.0" encoding="windows-1255" standalone="yes"?> 4. Edit the weblocal_locale.xml file in the new language directory to change the value of the web_local_lang parameter from en to the new language name. For example, if you localize the user interface for Hebrew, change the web_local_lang parameter to he: web_local_lang: exported "he"; 5. In the /lang/textserver/no_translation directory, locate the textserver_text.xml file and open it in a plain text editor. 6. Locate the following key for the new language: <key id="textsrv_associateddefaultjavalocale_locale-code</key> Replace lang-code with the W3C standard language code and locale-code with the Java standard locale code. For example, in Hebrew locales, this key would resemble the following: Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

265 Deploying localized versions of Teamcenter <key id="textsrv_associateddefaultjavalocale_he">iw_il</key> 4 Replace the existing key with the following: <key id="textsrv_encodinglocales_iso8859_8">en_us;iw_il</key> <key id="textsrv_encodinglocales_nt_862">en_us;iw_il</key> <key id="textsrv_encodinglocales_nt_1255">en_us;iw_il</key> <key id="textsrv_encodinglocales_utf8">cs_cz;de_de;en_us;es_es;fr_fr; it_it;iw_il;ja_jp;ko_kr;ru_ru;zh_cn;zh_tw</key> Note On UNIX and Linux systems, after you complete this step, remove shared memory backing store files. 7. Change to the WEB_ROOT/staging-locationteamcenter\dhtml\commmon\intl directory and create a new language directory. For example, if you localize the user interface for Hebrew, create the he directory. 8. Copy all files from the en directory to the new language directory. 9. In the new language directory, translate all XML files to the new language. 10. Regenerate the Web tier application (file-name.ear) as described in Installing thin client Web applications. Deploy the application in an application server as described in the Web Application Deployment Guide. Convert the thin client user interface for Hebrew Converting the thin client user interface for the Hebrew language requires customized development of thin client pages and Java code and definitions of Unicode standards in the Teamcenter application. When installing the rich client, you must choose the Latin-Hebrew ISO8859_8 character set. You must also check that the charsets.jar and font.properties.iw files are present in the JRE_HOME/lib directory. Deploying rich client localizations If you change the strings of a localized rich client user interface, you must convert the files to Unicode and regenerate the Java archive (JAR) file. To identify the localized user interface files you need, look for the language and country identifier added to the base resource file. For example, for the aif_locale.properties English resource file, which must remain in English, the equivalent Japanese file is named aif_locale_ja_jp.properties. Convert native.properties files to Unicode as follows: 4. he is the standard W3C code for Hebrew. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 17-13

266 Chapter 17 Deploying localized versions of Teamcenter 1. Copy the base file to a temporary file name, for example, from aif_locale.properties to aif_locale_temp.properties. 2. Edit the base_locale_temp.properties file, modifying the values to the correct native language. 3. Save the file. 4. Run the native2ascii utility against the temporary properties file to convert it to a Unicode properties file. The native2ascii utility is in the \bin directory of Java SDK 1.4. For more information, access the following URL: For example, to convert the properties file from Japanese to Unicode, enter the following command from the command line: native2ascii -encoding SJIS aif_locale_temp.properties aif_locale_ja_jp.properties The final locale-specific properties file or the output of the native2ascii file must have the base_locale_locale-id_language-id.properties file format. The rich client finds the value of a key in the following order: BASE_user.properties BASE_locale-ID_language-ID.properties BASE_locale.properties BASE.properties 5. Recompile the JAR file. 6. Install fonts if necessary. For information about fonts, access the following URL: For more information about converting files to unicode, see the Unicode Consortium Web site: Display Siemens PLM Software-provided rich client localizations To display a Siemens PLM Software-provided localized rich client user interface, set the locale of the client workstation to one of the Siemens PLM Software-provided locales. No other steps are required. In addition to English, Siemens PLM Software provides Teamcenter rich client and thin client user interfaces localized for the following languages: Chinese (Simplified) Chinese (Traditional) Czech French German Hebrew Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

267 Deploying localized versions of Teamcenter Italian Japanese Korean Polish Portuguese (Brazilian) Russian Spanish Update rich client localized text If you change the strings of a localized rich client user interface, you must convert the files to Unicode and regenerate the Java archive (JAR) file. To identify the localized user interface files you need, look for the language and country identifier added to the base resource file. For example, for the aif_locale.properties English resource file, which must remain in English, the equivalent Japanese file is named aif_locale_ja_jp.properties. Convert native.properties files to Unicode as follows: 1. Copy the base file to a temporary file name, for example, from aif_locale.properties to aif_locale_temp.properties. 2. Edit the base_locale_temp.properties file, modifying the values to the correct native language. 3. Save the file. 4. Run the native2ascii utility against the temporary properties file to convert it to a Unicode properties file. The native2ascii utility is in the \bin directory of Java SDK 1.4. For more information, access the following URL: For example, to convert the properties file from Japanese to Unicode, enter the following command from the command line: native2ascii -encoding SJIS aif_locale_temp.properties aif_locale_ja_jp.properties The final locale-specific properties file or the output of the native2ascii file must have the base_locale_locale-id_language-id.properties file format. The rich client finds the value of a key in the following order: BASE_user.properties BASE_locale-ID_language-ID.properties BASE_locale.properties BASE.properties 5. Recompile the JAR file. 6. Install fonts if necessary. For information about fonts, access the following URL: PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 17-15

268 Chapter 17 Deploying localized versions of Teamcenter For more information about converting files to unicode, see the Unicode Consortium Web site: Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

269 Chapter 18 Creating a custom distribution Overview of custom distributions Create a silent distribution Create a silent installation configuration file Launch a silent installation Modify the silent installation configuration file Create a compact distribution PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide

270

271 Chapter 18 Creating a custom distribution Overview of custom distributions Teamcenter supports the following custom distributions to simplify installation of Teamcenter on multiple hosts. Silent distribution A silent distribution is an XML-based configuration file you can use to install Teamcenter silently (without user interaction) on another host. Silent installation suppresses most installation prompts and requires minimal user interaction. As an alternative to installing and configuring Teamcenter on individual hosts in your network, silent installation provides an efficient way to deploy Teamcenter on multiple hosts in your network. The silent installation configuration file records the selections and values you enter during a Teamcenter installation and enables TEM to perform these steps noninteractively on other hosts. You can modify a silent configuration file to change certain Teamcenter settings before installation. Silent distributions are supported for Teamcenter servers, two-tier rich clients, and four-tier rich clients. Compact distribution A compact distribution is an installable package with a selected subset of Teamcenter client features. It is much smaller than a full Teamcenter software distribution image and is more easily distributed to multiple hosts in an organization. A compact distribution is an alternative to installing Teamcenter from a full Teamcenter software distribution image. A compact deployable package can contain a selected subset of Teamcenter features rather than the entire set of features in the release. This reduces network loads and simplifies large-scale Teamcenter deployments by providing an installation package that is smaller and more easily distributed to an organization. For example, a two-tier rich client installation can be packaged in a deployable media as small as 580 MB, where a full Teamcenter distribution can require up to 5 GB. A four-tier rich client compact distribution can be as small as 283 MB, and a Client for Office compact distribution can be only 93 MB. Compact distributions are supported for Teamcenter two-tier and four-tier rich clients. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 18-1

272 Chapter 18 Creating a custom distribution Create a silent distribution Create a silent installation configuration file 1. Log on to the Teamcenter corporate server host and change to the root directory of the Teamcenter software distribution image. 2. Start Teamcenter Environment Manager (tem.sh) from the Teamcenter software distribution image. 3. In the Welcome to Teamcenter panel, select the Create custom distribution check box, and then click Install. 4. In the Custom Distribution Options panel, select Create silent configuration file, and then specify the path to the silent installation file, for example, silent.xml. The specified path must be to an existing directory and the file name must end in.xml. 5. Proceed through the remaining panels to complete the Teamcenter installation. Teamcenter Environment Manager creates the silent installation file you specified in step 4. This file records your settings and selections during the installation. You can use this file to silently install Teamcenter on another host with the same settings. Caution If you install a rich client silently using a compact distribution and your silent configuration file requires features not included in the compact distribution, the silent installation fails. To avoid this, make sure your silent configuration requires only features in the compact distribution, or install using a full Teamcenter software distribution image. For more information about creating a compact distribution, see Create a compact distribution. Launch a silent installation To launch a silent installation, type the following command: tem.sh s file-name.xml Replace file-name with the name of the silent installation configuration file. After installation is complete, you can view a log of the installation in the installxxx.log file under the install directory in the Teamcenter application installation directory. Note For information about creating a silent distribution of Teamcenter, see Create a silent installation configuration file. Modify the silent installation configuration file The silent installation configuration file is XML-based, as shown in Sample silent installation configuration file. After creating the file and establishing the file structure using Teamcenter Environment Manager, you can change the installation 18-2 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

273 Creating a custom distribution by manually modifying the values of the XML elements described in the following table. Caution Element features feature data Siemens PLM Software recommends using an XML editor to ensure well-formed XML code. Do not change the XML structure of the file. If XML file structure is incorrect, or the XML code is not well-formed, installation fails. Description Lists all the Teamcenter modules and features to be installed. These are selected on the Features panel of Teamcenter Environment Manager. Specifies one feature of a Teamcenter module. The code attribute identifies the feature. To define whether Teamcenter Environment Manager installs the feature, set the selected attribute to either true or false. Lists all Teamcenter Environment Manager Java classes and values defining aspects of installation, such as the path to the installation directory for Teamcenter application files. For additional information, see the comments in the configuration file. The comments describe the class and valid values. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 18-3

274 Chapter 18 Creating a custom distribution <?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> - <root> <tem engine=" " /> - <settings> <installdir value="c:\\program Files\\Siemens\\Teamcenter10" /> <sourcedir value="c:\\tc\\tc900_win" /> <application value="tceng" /> <silentmaintenance value="false" /> <installinguser value="tc_user" /> <installlanguage value="english" /> <version value=" " /> </settings> - <config name="my Configuration 1" id="config1"> - <mode type="install"> - <checkpoints> - <checkpoint value="featureproperties"> <point value="coretemplate:foundation_template.xml" /> <point value="mindb2version:9.5" /> <point value="feature_id:datamodel,rtserver" /> <point value="template_file:foundation_template.xml" /> <point value="minoracleversion: " /> <point value="minmssql2005version:9.0" /> <point value="template_name:foundation" /> <point value="typeanalysis:true" /> </checkpoint> </checkpoints> </mode> <comments /> - <data> - <adminuser guid="2e53cf5e50fc3ac707d1d0566f0f213b"> <password value="encrypted:1c8c4cdcccded2c2" /> <user value="infodba" /> </adminuser> - <director guid="661aa614566ca975d92a7ebe985f3ea3"> <status value="0" /> - <script> <tembase /> <copyfeature guid="a0cf70eb869c3a0bc6171bd22667ea52" /> <copyfeature guid="90c2aaf88a1ca61fab397b96f6e4aac1" /> <copyfeature guid="8c061d687b13e0cb9dc4a3348be" /> <copyfeature guid="b176f6b6e92010fe91d9804efb0dd613" /> <unpack feature="a0cf69c22667e3a0bc61770eb81bda52" /> <unpack feature="90c2a1c1fab397af88abe96f6a64aac1" /> <unpack feature="8c061d87b1a3d51e13e0cb9dc46348be" /> <unpack feature="b176fb0d2016b6e9e91d9804ef0fd613" /> <preinstall feature="a0cf69c3a0bc61770eb81bd22667ea52" /> <preinstall feature="90c2a1c96f6a61fab397af88abe4aac1" /> <preinstall feature="8c061dd51e13e0cb9dc4687b1a3348be" /> <preinstall feature="b176f6b6e9e91d9804efb0d2010fd613" /> <install feature="a0cf69c3a0bc61770eb81bd22667ea52" /> <install feature="90c2a1ab397ac96f6a61ff88abe4aac1" /> <install feature="8c061dd51e13e0cb9dc4687b1a3348be" /> <install feature="b176f6b6e9e91d9804efb0d2010fd613" /> <postinstall feature="a0cf69c3a0bc61770eb81bd22667ea52" /> <postinstall feature="90c2a1c96b397af88abf6a61fae4aac1" /> <postinstall feature="8c061dd51e13e0cb9dc4687b1a3348be" /> <postinstall feature="b176f6b6e9e91d9804efb0d2010fd613" /> <featureinstalled feature="a0cf69c3a0bc61770eb81bd22667ea52" /> <featureinstalled feature="90c2a1c96f6a61fab397af88abe4aac1" /> <featureinstalled feature="8c061dd51e13e0cb9dc4687b1a3348be" /> <featureinstalled feature="b176f6b6e9e91d9804efb0d2010fd613" /> </script> </director> - <FSCService guid="f2fcbc1e3a11eec03dff7f9dc9b64bd2"> <fscreadcachedir value="$home\\fsccache" /> <fscwritecachedir value="$home\\fsccache" /> <addtobootstrap value="true" /> <fscreadcachesize value="10" /> <serverid value="fsc_myfsc" /> <log value="" /> <fscwritecachesize value="10" /> </FSCService> - <FSCMasterSettings guid="ebc3422f7e0e3a827c6bf18f1efe1134"> <mastermodel value="simple Model" /> </FSCMasterSettings> - <FscSiteImport guid="630bec48a9748f927ec742a76d5868da"> <remotesites value="" /> </FscSiteImport> Sample silent installation configuration file (Continued) 18-4 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

275 Creating a custom distribution - <tcdata guid=" e2be24bf0dd6abf31eba01088"> <path value="c:\\program Files\\Siemens\\tcdata1" /> <create value="true" /> </tcdata> - <FSCServiceFCCDefaults guid="7311dc5e94724bed0dd7419fcde055cf"> <writecachesize value="1000" /> <readcachesize value="1000" /> <cachedirunix value="/tmp/$user/fcccache" /> <partialreadcachesize value="3000" /> <cachedirwin value="$home\\fcccache" /> </FSCServiceFCCDefaults> - <FccSite guid="35ee6a6b3d91876b85467d5ede51eace"> <siteliststring value="" /> </FccSite> - <FSCServiceConnections guid="e4bda0b52e123c9f1cb10a49f0c326f1"> <connections value="http,4545,;" /> </FSCServiceConnections> - <OSUser guid="ca769d31fd7e1a0bbbd722e5e509e809"> <password value="encrypted:3448ee60e4c8a0c248" /> <user value="lm6s003\\yytcadm" /> </OSUser> - <flexclient guid="7221ecfbc9555cdf997fc3f "> <nx5string value="28000@svnxflex1;28000@svnxflex2" /> <port value="27000" /> <nx4string value="27000@trlic001;27000@trlic002" /> <nx5port value="28000" /> <host value="trlic001" /> <nx5checkbox value="true" /> <nx5host value="svnxflex1" /> <envserverstring value="28000@svnxflex1;28000@svnxflex2" /> </flexclient> - <foundationsettings guid="lhby67hdndhfjtzymyhsked26fzd84i7"> <genclientcache value="delete" /> <genservcache value="" /> <enablegenservcache value="true" /> </foundationsettings> - <transientvolume guid=" ff188a8c4bf08e8168a32a8"> <windowsvolume value="c:\\temp\\transientvolume_tc_user" /> <unixvolume value="/tmp/transientvolume_tc_user" /> </transientvolume> - <TcOracleSystem guid="1ef0859ac04962cbfa41c4c8c84499a1"> <password value="encrypted:3448ee60e4c8a0c248" /> <user value="system" /> <tablespaces value="tc_user_idata:90;tc_user_ilog:5;tc_user_indx:5;tc_user_temp:5" /> <tablespacepath value="c:\\tc_mydata" /> </TcOracleSystem> - <volume guid="1f de44c0c7827f800ee4aef8"> <port value="4545" /> <fscmodel value="simple Model" /> <location value="c:\\program Files\\Siemens\\volume1" /> <name value="volume" /> <hostname value="lm6s003" /> <fscid value="fsc_myfsc" /> </volume> - <TcOracleEngine guid="f4f7c0852b27d6e56b8c64be77ffa14c"> <port value="1521" /> <createuser value="true" /> <host value="lm6s003" /> <flush value="false" /> <populate value="true" /> <service value="tc" /> <password value="encrypted:34eae6cae4e8c6be" /> <user value="tc_user" /> <create value="true" /> </TcOracleEngine> </data> - <features> <add feature="a0cf69c3a0bc61770eb81bd22667ea52" name="vc 2005/2008 Redistributables" /> <add feature="90c2a1c96f6a61fab397af88abe4aac1" name="fms Server Cache" /> <add feature="8c061dd51e13e0cb9dc4687b1a3348be" name="teamcenter Foundation" /> <add feature="b176f6b6e9e91d9804efb0d2010fd613" name="nx Integration" /> </features> </config> <updatemanager /> <webappmanager /> </root> Sample silent installation configuration file Create a compact distribution Create a compact distribution, a Teamcenter installation package that contains selected features, using Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM). PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 18-5

276 Chapter 18 Creating a custom distribution Note Compact distribution is recommended only for Teamcenter client configurations, not for servers. 1. Log on to the Teamcenter corporate server host and change to the root directory of the Teamcenter software distribution image. 2. Start TEM (tem.sh) from the Teamcenter software distribution image. 3. In the Welcome to Teamcenter panel, select the Create custom distribution check box, and then click Install. 4. In the Custom Distribution Options panel, select Create compact deployable media. Enter the path in which to create the compact distribution and a file name for the package, for example, temp/tc.zip. The specified path must be to an existing directory and the file name must end in.zip. 5. Proceed through the remaining panels to complete the Teamcenter installation. TEM creates the compact distribution file you specified in step 4. You can use this file to install Teamcenter clients on other hosts. Caution If you install a rich client silently using a compact distribution and your silent configuration file requires features not included in the compact distribution, the silent installation fails. To avoid this, make sure your silent configuration requires only features in the compact distribution, or install using a full Teamcenter software distribution image. For more information about creating a silent distribution, see Create a silent installation configuration file Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

277 Chapter 19 Installing Teamcenter patches Installing Teamcenter patches Distribution of Teamcenter updates Downloading Teamcenter patches Patch Teamcenter Environment Manager Install patches on the corporate server Patching the rich client Patch the rich client using TEM Patch the rich client silently Patch the rich client using the Over-the-Web Installer Patch Lifecycle Visualization Patch the Web tier Review the README file PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide

278

279 Chapter 19 Installing Teamcenter patches Installing Teamcenter patches On Teamcenter servers and two-tier rich clients, you install patches using the Updates Manager, a feature of Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM). Patches to the Teamcenter J2EE Web tier you install using the Web Application Manager. Teamcenter updates (maintenance packs and patches) are posted for download on GTAC when available. Distribution of Teamcenter updates Teamcenter 10.1 updates are delivered in patches and in maintenance packs (MP). Patches to Teamcenter servers and two-tier rich clients are applied using the Updates Manager in Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM). Patches to the J2EE Web tier and over-the-web (OTW) distribution servers are applied using the Web Application Manager. Teamcenter patches are named using the following convention: product-level_number_platform.zip Contains the server, TEM rich client, and Web tier patches product-level_number_otw.zip Contains the OTW rich client patches and distribution server patches product-level_number_pv_all.zip Contains the Teamcenter Visualization patches product-level_number_install.zip Contains the TEM updates Downloading Teamcenter patches 1. Locate the patches you want to apply in the Product Updates area on GTAC. 2. Download the patch files to a temporary location on your host. Note Make sure you download the appropriate patch file for your platform. Before you apply downloaded Teamcenter 10.1 patches to your server, you must do the following: PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 19-1

280 Chapter 19 Installing Teamcenter patches Install the base Teamcenter 10.1 release. Stop all Teamcenter 10.1 related processes and services (such as FSC, database daemons, and so on). Note TEM does not allow you to install patches for a version of Teamcenter that is earlier than your current installation. For example, you cannot apply a Teamcenter patch to a Teamcenter 10.1 installation. Patch Teamcenter Environment Manager If the patch you downloaded contains an updated installer file (install.zip), expand this file into your installed Teamcenter environment to update Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM) to the latest version. 1. Copy the patch-id_install.zip file to your TC_ROOT/install directory. 2. Open a command prompt. 3. Change to the TC_ROOT/install directory. 4. Enter the following command to expand the install.zip file, overwriting existing files: unzip o install.zip Note If errors occur while expanding the file, do one of the following tasks: Add the path to your TC_ROOT/install/install directory to your PATH environment variable and enter the unzip command again. Enter the unzip command with the full path to your TC_ROOT/install directory, for example: TC_ROOT/install/install/unzip o install.zip 5. Add execute permissions back to the tem.sh shell script with the following command: chmod 755 tem.sh Install patches on the corporate server 1. Expand the product-level_number_platform.zip file to a temporary location. 2. Stop all Teamcenter services before you begin the update process. 3. If your configuration includes Dispatcher Server, remove Dispatcher services (scheduler, module, Dispatcher client) before installing patches. 4. Launch TEM (TC_ROOT/install/tem.sh). Note If you patched TEM in Patch Teamcenter Environment Manager, make sure you launch the patched TEM Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

281 Installing Teamcenter patches 5. In the Maintenance panel, choose Updates Manager and click Next. 6. In the Apply Updates panel, enter the following values. a. Update kit location Enter the location of patch files you expanded in step 1. b. Backup directory Enter the location in which you want to store backups of files replaced during the update process. Click Next. Note All users logged on to the environment are notified that it will not be available until the update process is complete. Make sure all Teamcenter clients and processes on the host are stopped before you continue. If Teamcenter services or processes are running, the update may fail because TEM cannot copy replacement files from the patch to the installed location. 7. In the Confirmation panel, click Start to begin patching the server. 8. Once the server is successfully patched, you must manually update your TC_DATA directories. a. Create backups of your current TC_DATA directories. b. Extract the platform/tc/data.zip file from the temporary location you created in step 1. c. Copy the expanded contents of the data.zip file to your TC_DATA directories, overwriting existing files. d. Copy the tc_profilevars file from the backup to the TC_DATA directory. 9. Follow the instructions in the patch s README file for any additional steps required to complete the patch. 10. If you use Dispatcher, reinstall Dispatcher services (scheduler, module, Dispatcher client). For more information, see the Dispatcher Server Installation Guide. Restart all Teamcenter-related processes and services (such FSC, database daemons, and so on). Note Each time you add a new feature to your installation, reapply installed patches because the added feature s files may have been patched previously. Adding a feature can overwrite that feature s patched files with the older files from the original software distribution image. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 19-3

282 Chapter 19 Installing Teamcenter patches Patching the rich client There are multiple methods for patching the rich client. Choose a patching method according to how you installed the client. If you installed the rich client during your server installation with the TEM, follow the steps in Patch the rich client using TEM. If you installed the rich client using the Over-the-Web Installer distribution server with one or more distribution server instances, patch each distribution server instance by following the steps in Patch the rich client using the Over-the-Web Installer. To patch Lifecycle Visualization using the Over-the-Web Installer, follow the steps in Patch Lifecycle Visualization. Patch the rich client using TEM Patch the rich client using the steps in Install patches on the corporate server. If the rich client was installed as a part of the same environment as the corporate server, the rich client is updated at the same time as the corporate server. Patch the rich client silently Teamcenter Environment Manager allows you to install patches silently, with no prompts or user interface: 1. Patch Teamcenter Environment Manager as described in Patching Teamcenter Environment Manager. 2. Expand the patch-id.zip file to a directory on your local host. 3. Open a command prompt. 4. Change to the TC_ROOT\install directory (on Windows systems) or the TC_ROOT/install directory (on UNIX/Linux systems). 5. Type the following command: tem.sh p "patch-path/patch-directory" Replace patch-path and patch-directory with the full path to the location in which you expanded the patch-id.zip file. This procedure launches TEM and applies the patch with no user interaction required. Note You must enclose the path to the patch in quotation marks (") for paths that contain spaces in them. For example: tem.sh p "/../Teamcenter patches/patch-location" Patch the rich client using the Over-the-Web Installer The patch files for any rich client installed using the OTW installer are in the Teamcenter9_patch-ID_OTW.zip file. Instead of patching the rich client at all installed locations, you can patch any or all distribution server instance installations that were installed using the Web Application Manager. To ensure all rich clients installed from the patched distribution server instance download the patched files automatically the next time they are launched: 19-4 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

283 Installing Teamcenter patches 1. Download and unzip the Teamcenter9_patch-ID_OTW.zip file to your computer. 2. Shut down the distribution server. 3. Launch the Web Application Manager (insweb). 4. Click the Copy ICD button. Browse to the expanded patch location to select the icd directory, and then click OK to copy the ICD files to the Web Application Manager. 5. Select the installed rich client instance you want to patch and click Modify. The Web Application Manager displays the Modify Web Application dialog box. 6. Click Modify Disk Locations. 7. Click Add and add the patch location to list of disk locations for install images. 8. Select and install patches. If you add patches to a previously patched instance, the steps differ from the first patch installation. Initial patch a. Click Add Solutions. b. Select Rich Client Patch and click OK. c. In the Modify Web Application dialog box, click OK to begin patching. d. After the patch is installed, click OK to close the Progress dialog box. Additional patches a. Click Reinstall Solutions. b. In the Reinstall Solution dialog box, click OK. 1 c. In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes. d. In the Modify Required Context Parameters dialog box, click OK to begin patching. e. After the patch is installed, click OK to close the Progress dialog box. 9. In the Modify Web Application dialog box, click OK. 10. Exit the Web Application Manager. 11. Copy the otwweb directory from your WEB_ROOT/staging-location/webapp_root directory to your Web server. 12. Restart the distribution server. After the installation is complete, the instance and the modified instance contains the patch. Any rich clients previously installed from this instance has the patch 1. Adding patches reinstalls the patch solution with the newer files. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 19-5

284 Chapter 19 Installing Teamcenter patches applied the next time the rich client is launched. Future rich client installations are installed with the patch. Note Customer-specific patches are not cumulative like general Teamcenter patches and business urgent patches are. To install customer-specific patches to the rich client using the Over-the-Web Installer, perform the following steps: 1. Install a single customer-specific patch. 2. Deploy the rich client distribution instance. 3. Start the rich client on each host so the Over-the-Web Installer downloads and installs the patch updates. 4. Repeat for each additional customer-specific patch. Patch Lifecycle Visualization Download the Lifecycle Visualization patch file (patch-id_pv_all.zip) and expand the ZIP file into a single directory. If prompted, overwrite all files. If you use Lifecycle Visualization as part of a two-tier rich client configuration, run the TcVis_patch-id_win32.exe file to patch Lifecycle Visualization. Otherwise, patch the rich client instance that includes Lifecycle Visualization by performing the following steps: 1. Shut down the distribution server. 2. Launch the Web Application Manager (insweb). 3. Click the Copy ICD button. Browse to the expanded patch location to select the icd directory, and then click OK to copy the ICD files to the Web Application Manager. 4. Select the rich client instance that contains the Teamcenter Visualization 8 (Embedded) for Rich Client 4-Tier (Installation and Configuration) solution and click Modify. The Web Application Manager displays the Modify Web Application dialog box. 5. Click Modify Disk Locations. 6. Click Add and add the patch location to list of disk locations for install images. 7. Select and install patches. If you add patches to a previously patched instance, the steps differ from the first patch installation Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

285 Installing Teamcenter patches Initial patch a. Click Add Solutions. b. Select Teamcenter Visualization 8 (Embedded Viewer) for Rich Client 4-Tier (installation and Configuration) Patch and click OK. c. In the Modify Web Application dialog box, click OK to begin patching. d. After the patch is installed, click OK to close the Progress dialog box. Additional patches a. Click Reinstall Solutions. b. In the Reinstall Solution dialog box, click OK. 2 c. In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes. d. In the Modify Required Context Parameters dialog box, click OK to begin patching. e. After the patch is installed, click OK to close the Progress dialog box. 8. In the Modify Web Application dialog box, click OK. 9. Exit the Web Application Manager. 10. Restart the distribution server. After the installation is complete, the instance and the modified instance contains the patch. Any rich clients previously installed from this instance has the patch applied the next time the rich client is launched. Any future rich client installations are installed with the patch. Patch the Web tier To install the Web tier, you must expand the INSTALL_TCWEB.TZ/EXE image from the base release CD to a local directory on your machine and then run the Web Application Manager (insweb) from that local directory. You then must generate a deployable (EAR or WAR) file and deploy that file on your Web application server. The local directory in which you ran the Web Application Manager utility is called WEB_ROOT. Unzip the patch file (product-level_number_platform.zip ) to a temporary location. This location is referenced in this procedure as WEB_FILES_LOC. 1. In Windows Explorer, browse to the WEB_FILES_LOC\Web_tier directory and look at its contents. 2. Open the WEB_ROOT directory and run the Web Application Manager (insweb). 3. Click Copy ICDs. 4. Browse to the WEB_FILES_LOC\Web_tier\icd directory and click OK. 2. Adding patches reinstalls the patch solution with the newer files. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 19-7

286 Chapter 19 Installing Teamcenter patches 5. Select the Web application in the list corresponding to your Web tier installation and click Modify. 6. In the Modify Web Application dialog box, click Modify Disk Locations. 7. In the Modify Disk Locations dialog box, click Add button to add the WEB_FILES_LOC\Web_tier directory to the Disk Locations for Install Images list. 8. In the Modify Disk Locations dialog box, click OK. 9. In the Modify Web Application dialog box, click Reinstall Solutions. 10. In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes to confirm the changes to the disk location list prior to opening to the Reinstall Solutions dialog box. 11. In the Reinstall Solutions dialog box, click OK. 12. If the Modify Required Context Parameters dialog box appears, type the appropriate values for any required context parameters and click OK. 13. The Web Application Manager regenerates the Web tier web application with the patched files. Make sure a deployable file (EAR or WAR) is generated during this process. If it is not, click Generate Deployable File in the Modify Web Application dialog box. 14. After the deployable file is generated, go to the Web tier Web application s staging directory and find the deployable file (EAR or WAR) under the deployment directory. 15. Take the new deployable file and deploy it to your Web application server, replacing the previous deployment. The new deployable file contains the Web tier patches. Review the README file The patch-id_pub.zip file includes a release_info directory that contains the patch set README file. Review this README file for information about the patch and possible additional steps required to complete the patch installation Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

287 Chapter 20 Uninstalling Teamcenter Uninstalling Teamcenter Uninstall Teamcenter configurations and installations Uninstall TCCS Uninstalling DB Remove DB2 instances Remove DB2 software on UNIX and Linux systems Remove DB2 software on Windows systems Uninstall Oracle PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide

288

289 Chapter 20 Uninstalling Teamcenter Uninstalling Teamcenter If you need to uninstall a Teamcenter installation, remove Teamcenter configurations using Teamcenter Environment Manager. You can then remove your database server. Uninstall Teamcenter configurations and installations Using Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM), you can remove a single Teamcenter configuration or all Teamcenter configurations and software. Remove a configuration. To remove a single Teamcenter configuration, use the Remove configuration option in the Configuration Maintenance panel in TEM. For more information, see Teamcenter Environment Manager Help. Remove the entire Teamcenter installation. To completely uninstall Teamcenter, use the Uninstall Teamcenter option in the Maintenance panel in TEM. This option uninstalls the following: o o o o o o All Teamcenter configurations All databases created during Teamcenter installation All Teamcenter volumes All Teamcenter client communication system (TCCS) environments TCCS cache files (cache files generated by the FSC or FCC) are not deleted. After Teamcenter uninstallation, you can manually delete these cache files. Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM) TC_ROOT and TC_DATA directories If you shared TC_ROOT or TC_DATA directories, TEM may not completely remove these directories because they may be locked by sharing. To completely uninstall these directories, you must unshare these directories before you begin uninstallation. To remove an entire Teamcenter installation, perform the following steps: 1. Log on to the operating system using the user account under which you installed Teamcenter. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 20-1

290 Chapter 20 Uninstalling Teamcenter 2. Start Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM): a. Change to the install directory in the Teamcenter application root directory for your Teamcenter installation. b. Run the tem.sh script. 3. In the Maintenance panel, select Uninstall Teamcenter, and then click Next. 4. The Configuration Display panel shows all configurations in the Teamcenter installation. Review the configuration details, and then click Next. 5. In the Uninstall panel, select Yes to confirm that you want to uninstall all configurations and Teamcenter software. Click Next. 6. In the Confirmation panel, click Start to begin the uninstallation. TEM removes the Teamcenter installation. If the uninstallation is not successful, TEM stops processing when it encounters the error and displays a message indicating the location of the log file containing the error. 7. If you selected the option in TEM to remove the Teamcenter database, the database is moved to the Oracle recycle bin. To permanently remove the database, launch SQL*Plus and enter the following command: PURGE RECYCLEBIN; Uninstall TCCS If you installed Teamcenter client communication system (TCCS) as part of an installation of the rich client or Teamcenter Microsoft Office interfaces, uninstalling those clients automatically uninstalls TCCS from your system. If you installed TCCS using the stand-alone installation wizard, perform the following steps to uninstall TCCS. 1. Stop the FMS client cache (FCC) process: a. Change to the bin directory in the TCCS installation directory. b. Type the following command to stop the FCC process: fccstat -stop 2. Change to the _uninst directory in the TCCS installation directory. 3. Type the following command: uninstaller.bin This launches the TCCS uninstallation wizard. Follow the instructions in the wizard to uninstall TCCS. 4. Log off and log back on to the system to unset the FMS_HOME environment variable Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

291 Uninstalling Teamcenter Uninstalling DB2 If you no longer use your existing your DB2 instances and databases, you can remove them. If you want to uninstall your default DB2 copy but want to keep other DB2 copies on your system, use the db2swtch command to choose a new default copy before you proceed with the uninstallation. Also, if your database administration server (DAS) is running under the copy you want to remove, move your DAS to a copy that is not being removed. Otherwise, you must re-create the DAS using the db2admin create command after the uninstall, and you may need to reconfigure the DAS for some functionality to work. Remove DB2 instances 1. Log on as a user with root privileges. 2. Type the following command: Windows systems: DB2-HOME\sqllib\bin\db2idrop instance-name UNIX and Linux systems: DB2-HOME/instance/db2idrop instance-name Replace DB2-HOME with the DB2 installation directory you specified during the DB2 installation. Replace instance-name with the login name of the DB2 instance. Note On UNIX systems, the default installation path is /opt/ibm/db2/vversion. On Linux systems, the default installation path is /opt/ibm/db2/vversion. The db2idrop command removes the instance entry from the list of instances and removes the instance-home/sqllib directory. If you store any files in sqllib directory, these files are removed by this action. If you still need these files, make a copy of them before you remove the instance. Optionally, as a user with root privileges, remove the instance owner s user ID and group (if used only for that instance). Do not remove these if you plan to re-create the instance. Remove the database files from the system or drop the databases before dropping the instance if you no longer need the databases. After you drop the instance, the database files remain intact. This step is optional because the instance owner and the instance owner group may be used for other purposes. Remove DB2 software on UNIX and Linux systems 1. Optionally, drop all databases. You can drop databases using the Control Center (on Linux platforms only) or the database drop command. Note If you drop databases without dropping instances first, database files remain on your file systems. 2. Stop the DB2 Administration Server. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 20-3

292 Chapter 20 Uninstalling Teamcenter a. Log on as the DB2 administration server owner. b. Stop the DB2 administration server by entering the db2admin stop command. 3. Remove the DB2 administration server (DAS) by entering the following command: DB2-HOME/instance/dasdrop Replace DB2-HOME with the DB2 installation directory you specified during the DB2 installation. Note On UNIX systems, the default installation path is /opt/ibm/db2/vversion. On Linux systems, the default installation path is /opt/ibm/db2/vversion. 4. Stop DB2 instances. a. To obtain a list of the names of all DB2 instances associated with your current DB2 copy, enter the following command: b. Log off. DB2-HOME/bin/db2ilist c. Log on again as the owner of the instance you want to stop. d. If the DB2 instance startup script is not included in the.profile file, enter one of the following commands to run the startup script. Bash, Bourne, or Korn shells:. instance-home/sqllib/db2profile C shells: source instance-home/sqllib/db2cshrc Replace instance-home with the home directory of the DB2 instance. If you want to keep a copy of the database configuration settings, save the database manager configuration file, db2systm, the db2nodes.cfg file, or user-defined function or fenced stored procedure applications in instance-home/sqllib/function. e. Stop the DB2 database manager by entering the db2stop force command. f. Verify that the instance is stopped by entering the db2 terminate command. 5. Remove DB2 instances as described in Remove DB2 instances. 6. Remove DB2 products. a. Log on as a user with root privileges. b. Access the path where the DB2 products are located. For information about how to locate the path of the DB2 product to remove using the db2ls command, see Listing DB2 products installed on your system in the IBM DB2 Information Center Web site Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

293 Uninstalling Teamcenter c. Run the db2_deinstall a command from the DB2-HOME/install directory or the doce_deinstall a command from the DB2-HOME/doc/install directory. Remove DB2 software on Windows systems 1. Optionally, drop all databases. You can drop databases using the DB2 Control Center or the database drop command from a command prompt. Note Warning If you drop databases without removing instances first, database files remain on your file systems. Dropping databases after removing database instances permanently deletes data. 2. Stop all DB2 processes and services. This can be done through the Windows Control panel or by issuing the db2stop command from a command prompt. If you do not stop DB2 services and processes before attempting to remove DB2 software, DB2 displays a warning that lists processes and services holding DB2 DLLs in memory. 3. Remove DB2 software by one of the following methods: Remove DB2 software using the Add/Remove Programs feature in the Windows Control Panel. Open a command prompt and type the db2unins command. To remove multiple DB2 products, use the /p argument: ddb2unins /p To remove DB2 software silently, use the /u argument: ddb2unins /u For more information, see the IBM DB2 documentation for the db2unins command. In some cases, neither of these methods successfully removes DB2 software. If this happens, you can force removal of DB2 software by typing the following command: ddb2unins /f Caution This command removes all DB2 software and databases from your system. Use this command only if other methods fail. Uninstall Oracle For information about uninstalling Oracle, see the Oracle installation guide on the appropriate Oracle CD-ROM. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide 20-5

294

295 Part VII Appendixes Troubleshooting A-1 Distribution media B-1 Solutions and features reference C-1 Web tier context parameters D-1 Glossary E-1 PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide

296

297 Appendix A Troubleshooting Troubleshooting A-1 Troubleshooting Teamcenter server installation A-1 Installation log files A-1 Problems/error messages A-2 Troubleshooting Teamcenter online help A-3 Update Manager FTP errors A-3 Resolving Web tier connection problems A-3 Change the deployable file name on the corporate server A-4 Change the deployable file name on the Web tier A-4 Web Application Manager needs location of Java file when installing rich client A-4 Make the Java jar file available for the four-tier rich client A-4 Import of UGMASTER PDI part in GM Overlay fails A-5 Troubleshooting four-tier architecture deployment A-6 Troubleshooting Oracle A-11 View additional information about an Oracle error message A-11 Troubleshooting document rendering A-11 Troubleshooting Teamcenter Integration for NX A-14 Recovering from a corrupted database A-14 Recovering from a corrupted IBM DB2 database A-15 Recovering from a corrupted Oracle database A-15 PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide

298

299 Appendix A Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Troubleshoot problems you encounter during Teamcenter server installation. Troubleshooting Teamcenter server installation Installation log files Teamcenter Environment Manager generates files in the install directory under the Teamcenter application root directory. installdate-time_configuration-id.log Teamcenter Environment Manager generates a log file for each installation and configuration you create. The log file contains a record of activities performed by Teamcenter Environment Manager. Keep these files to maintain a complete history for troubleshooting purposes. insautonomy.log This file contains an installation record for Autonomy Intelligent Data Operating Layer (IDOL) server, the default full-text search engine. configuration.xml This file contains a record of the Teamcenter installation. Teamcenter Environment Manager uses the configuration file to enable you to maintain the installation, including adding and removing components, patching installations, and upgrading installations. Caution uninstall.xml Do not remove the configuration.xml file. Removing the configuration.xml file results in the inability to modify the installation using Teamcenter Environment Manager. This file contains a record of the Teamcenter uninstallation. In addition, auxiliary programs called by Teamcenter Environment Manager generate files in the logs directory under the Teamcenter application root directory. Most files have the format: program-name.syslog program-name.log PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide A-1

300 Appendix A Troubleshooting Of these files, the system log (.syslog) files usually contain the most relevant error data. Problems/error messages See the following information for help resolving errors encountered during Teamcenter installation. Problem/error message Possible cause Solution During an installation or upgrade, the FMS server cache (FSC) reports a startup failure with a message similar to the following: Installation interrupted due to the following reason: Processing <upgrade> of feature FMS Server Cache failed: FSC service failed to start with an error 1 Another service on the same host was running on the same port that the FSC is configured to use. This causes a fatal error to the FSC and the FSC startup log shows a bind exception on the port. Some services, such as JBoss, allow the FSC to bind to its port, resulting in failure of the FSC to start, but no errors in the FSC log. Change the FSC settings to use a different port. However, the FSC startup log shows no errors and indicates the FSC is left running. <<null>>\\<<null>> on host host-name does not have administrator privileges This error most likely indicates you attempted to start Teamcenter Environment Manager using the Windows runas command or the Run as menu command. Teamcenter Environment Manager cannot be started as a user other than the user logged on to the operating system. Start Teamcenter Environment Manager as a user logged onto the system with Administrator group privileges and the Log on as a service right. For more information, see Required operating system and user accounts. Client credential too weak This problem can occur on SUSE Linux 11 when executing the following ODS startup command: /ods -u=infodba -p=infodba -g=dba The command shell displays the following error: Cannot register service: RPC: Authentication error; why = Client credential too weak pid = 31635, unable to register (ODSPROG = , ODSVERS = 1) This problem can also occur when the idsminetd program is used for custom Multi-Site configuration. Restart the remote procedure call (RPC) portmapper service (rpcbind) with the following options: kill -15 rpcbind-process rpcbind i w A-2 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

301 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Teamcenter online help Problem Online help installed for thin client does not display. Solution The WEB_core_help_server and WEB_help_server preferences were not set correctly by the installation program or the installer. Set the WEB_core_help_server preference to the full path to the location of the online help help/index.htm file. Set the WEB_help_server preference to the full path to the location of the online help help/thin_client_dhtml/ book.html file. Online help installed for rich client does not display when accessing help over a network file system (direct file access). Teamcenter Environment Manager did not update the portalhelppage property in the site_specific.properties file. Check the portalhelppage property in the site_specific.properties file. If the path is not present or incorrect, manually correct it to refer to the location of the online help files in the file system. Update Manager FTP errors The following table describes errors that can occur while connecting to the update server or while downloading updates. Error Cannot contact server Cannot log on Incorrect Path Timeout Error Transfer Error Resolution Host or port may be incorrect. Check Host and Port values and try again. User name or password may be incorrect. Check User and Password values and try again. Path to the directory on the update server may be incorrect. Check the path and try again. The update manager received no response from the update server. Try connecting later or contact your system administrator for assistance. Contact with the update server was interrupted. Try your operation again or contact your system administrator for assistance. Resolving Web tier connection problems If the Teamcenter Web tier and the corporate server do not reference the same Web application name, the Web tier cannot connect to the Teamcenter server. The Web application name specified in the Teamcenter Web tier must match the Web application name specified on the corporate server. During installation of the Teamcenter corporate server, you specify this value in the Web Application Name box in the Default Site Web Server panel of Teamcenter Environment Manager. The default Web application name is tc. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide A-3

302 Appendix A Troubleshooting During installation of the Teamcenter Web tier, the Web Application Manager assigns the Web application the default name of tc. If you specify a Web application name other than tc during corporate server installation, you must change the corresponding value during Web tier installation. If the Web tier and the corporate server do not reference the same Web application name, the Web tier cannot connect to the Teamcenter server. To ensure the Web tier and the corporate server reference the same Web application name, perform one of the following procedures: Change the deployable file name on the corporate server Using Teamcenter on a two-tier rich client host, set the WEB_default_site_deployed_app_name preference to reflect the deployable file name specified in Web Application Manager. (Alternatively, you can set this preference using the preferences_manager utility from a command prompt.) For more information about the WEB_default_site_deployed_app_name preference, see the Preferences and Environment Variables Reference. For information about setting preferences, see Getting Started with Teamcenter. Change the deployable file name on the Web tier 1. In Web Application Manager, select your Web application and click Modify. 2. In the Modify Web Application dialog box, click Modify Web Application Information. 3. Change the value in the Deployable File Name box to reflect the Web application name you entered during corporate server installation. 4. Click Generate Deployable File to rebuild your Web application. 5. Deploy the rebuilt Web application on your Web application server. Web Application Manager needs location of Java file when installing rich client Under certain circumstances, the Web Application Manager does not find the Java jakarta-regexp-1.3.jar file required to install the four-tier rich client. To resolve this problem, make the jakarta-regexp-1.3.jar file available to the Web Application Manager. Make the Java jar file available for the four-tier rich client 1. Locate the bmide/compressed_files directory in the Teamcenter software distribution image. 2. Expand the bmide.zip file to a temporary directory. (This file contains the jakarta-regexp-1.3.jar file.) 3. Add the temporary directory to the list of Disk Locations for Install Images in the Web Application Manager. A-4 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

303 Troubleshooting 4. Build your Web application EAR file using the Web Application Manager. 5. Deploy your EAR file as described in the Web Application Deployment Guide. Import of UGMASTER PDI part in GM Overlay fails If you attempt to create a CORP_ item, it sometimes fails in GM Overlay databases upgraded from Engineering Process Management or Engineering Process Management 2005 to Teamcenter This occurs when legacy action rules are not removed from the database during the upgrade. After upgrading to Teamcenter 10.1, follow the instructions in the Business Modeler IDE Guide to migrate the GM Overlay action rules to extension rules and delete the action rules. Some GM Overlay action rules have already been migrated to extension rules and are shipped as part of the Teamcenter Automotive Edition and GM Overlay templates. After you extract your database in step 2 of Convert action rules to extension rules, verify the extracted action rules against the extensions in the template. If there are no additional action rules to be converted in the Business Modeler IDE templates, you can skip steps 3 5 in the procedure. Some of the GM Overlay action rule names are modified in Teamcenter The table shows the mapping of action rules to extension rules. Engineering Process Management GM Overlay action rules GMPDM_CM_baseline_preaction GMPDM_CM_set_pdi_comments CUSTOM_CM_validate_sec_objs GMPDM_check_gm_bldintent_rel GMPDM_ask_gm_buildintent_props GMPDM_CM_copy_forward_attrs GMPDM_CM_cond_create_pwt_forms GMPDM_CM_cond_saveas_pwt_forms GMPDM_CM_copy_pwt_part_forms PWT_reset_actual_mass GMPDM_CM_copy_cost_forms GMPDM_CM_delete_cost_form GMIMAN_notifyIRCreation GMPDM_delete_product_def_form GMPDM_validate_product_def Teamcenter 2007 GM Overlay method extensions GMO_check_baseline_preaction GMO_set_baseline_comments GMO_validate_sec_objs GMO_check_gm_bldintent_rel GMO_ask_gm_buildintent_props GMO_CM_copy_forward_attrs GMO_cond_create_pwt_forms GMO_cond_saveas_pwt_forms GMO_copy_pwt_part_forms GMO_PWT_reset_actual_mass GMO_CM_copy_cost_forms GMO_CM_delete_cost_form GMO_notify_on_ir_creation GMO_delete_product_def_form_ptr GMO_validate_product_definition_entries Note Deleting the legacy action rules after successfully upgrading the GM Overlay may change expected behavior in some areas of the GM Overlay. For example, you cannot create item types like CORP_Part, CORP_Install, CORP_Product, and CORP_Software. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide A-5

304 Appendix A Troubleshooting Troubleshooting four-tier architecture deployment Identify the problem you encountered in your four-tier rich client architecture and perform the solution described. Problem Web tier application fails during initialization with an error containing the following: Error during login. com.teamcenter.presentation. webclient.actions com. teamcenter.jeti.util. JetiResourceConfiguration Exception: TreeCache initialization failed Error indicating no server pool Delays in opening a connection from the Web tier to a Teamcenter server Solution When a host has multiple IP addresses, the JGroups software and JDK software arbitrarily choose one of them to use as the address to bind to for a server connection port. In some situations, as when using a Windows Network Load Balancer, not all local IP addresses are accessible to other hosts on the network. If the chosen IP address is not accessible, other cluster peers are not able to open sockets to that port. To avoid this error, specify a particular bind address using the bind.address Java system property, for example: Dbind.address= Java arguments can be specified in different ways on different application servers. For example, for a WebLogic managed server, use the WebLogic console server/configuration/server Start/Arguments field. For more information, consult the application server s documentation. Either the server manager is not started or TreeCache communication is not occurring. Ensure that you correctly coordinated the server manager and Web tier TreeCache configuration settings. For information about coordinating these settings, see the description of the server manager context parameters in Web tier required parameters. If you are using TCP communication, look for the GMS address during both application server startup and server manager startup. The GMS address indicates the service port obtained. It should be within the range of ports pinged by TreeCache peers. The Web tier may be attempting a connection to the Teamcenter server on an IP address that is unavailable. If the SERVER_HOST parameter is not specified in the server manager configuration, the Teamcenter server writes all IP addresses found in the host s network configuration to its CORBA interoperable object reference (IOR). If the host has multiple addresses and the primary address is not reachable, the Teamcenter Web tier logs the following warning: The connection to the pool with ID pool ID is not available. Primary Address Host is IP-address and the Primary Address Port is port; In addition to the Primary Address, additional address(es) were found. Please ensure that the Primary Address used A-6 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

305 Troubleshooting Problem Warnings of discarded messages Error messages about the server manager pool ID handlejoin errors occur at startup Solution is the right one. This address can be changed by configuring the SERVER_HOST parameter. Inspect the Web tier log file for status messages reported during server manager startup. If the server manager log contains a message similar to this, set the SERVER_HOST parameter in the serverpool.properties file to the correct IP address for the host. These warnings indicate that you have two clusters on the same port (multicast) or set of ports (TCP). Your environment is working because you used different names for each cluster, but this is not an optimal environment for performance. Siemens PLM Software recommends configuring a different port or set of ports for each environment. These messages indicate that the pool ID is in use by another server manager in the TreeCache cluster. Either place the server managers in different clusters or configure a distinct pool ID. Occasionally, TreeCache instances fail to accept connections and report handlejoin errors. Typically this error disappears if you restart one or more cluster members. To get additional information, increase the logging level for the tree cache and jgroups classes for both the application server and server manager: 1. Copy the log4j.xml file in the server manager run-time directory (TC_ROOT/pool_manager) to the application server instance startup directory. By default, the server manager run-time directory includes a log4j.xml file, but it logs only the warning level information. The default configuration sends log output to the console and the following files: TC_ROOT/pool_manager/logs/ServerManager/ process/servermanager.log APPSERVER_ROOTlogs/WebTier/processWebTier.log 2. Edit log4j.xml so that more information is logged at run time. For example, to increase the log4j output for the JBossCache and jgroup classes to the INFO level, edit the file: <logger name="org.jboss.cache" additivity="false"> <level value="info"/> <appender-ref ref="webtierappender"/> <appender-ref ref="processconsoleappender"/> </logger> <logger name="org.jgroups" additivity="false"> <level value="info"/> <appender-ref ref="webtierappender"/> <appender-ref ref="processconsoleappender"/> </logger> PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide A-7

306 Appendix A Troubleshooting Problem Solution Configuration is correct, but run-time errors occur Either the server manager fails to start when employing multicast TreeCache mode or the following error message is received: Exception in thread "main" java.net.socketexception: Can t assign requested address. The JMX HTTP adaptor allows you to view the status of the server pool and dynamically change the pool configuration values (the values are not persistent). Access this functionality from the following URL: Replace host-name with the name of the host running the server manager. Replace jmx-port with the number of the port running the JMX HTTP adaptor. This port number is defined on the JMX HTTP Adaptor Port parameter when you install the server manager. Determine from logs whether users are frequently losing a server due to the server timing out and are then having a new server assigned. Server startup can consume a great amount of CPU. Consider increasing timeout values and/or the pool size. Check the internet protocol configuration on the server manager host and the Web tier host and ensure that they match. Some application servers configure the Java virtual machine (JVM) to prefer the IPv4 stack. This is the case with recent versions of JBoss. Therefore, you must alter the preferipv4stack Java property on the server manage host to match the Web tier configuration. By default, Java prefers to use Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) addresses. Incomplete IPv6 configuration can cause Java socket exceptions that prevent the server manager from starting. For example, an IBM AIX server might be configured to have an IPv6 loopback address ::1 but no IPv6 ethernet address. Detect this problem on AIX with the command: netstat ni If this is the case, either complete the IPv6 upgrade configuration as documented in the IBM System Management Guide or uncomment the following line in the mgrstart script: #JVM_ARGS="${JVM_ARGS} -Djava.net.preferIPv4Stack=true" This line adds the Djava.net.preferIPv4Stack=true Java option, instructing the JVM to use IPv4 addresses for the server manager. Note If the Web application server is running on the same host as the server manager, add this Java option to the Web application startup script also. On a machine with multiple IP addresses, it may be necessary to configure the address used by the TreeCache. This A-8 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

307 Troubleshooting Problem Out-of-memory messages from Web application server running on HP-UX platform TreeCache connection failure after restarting or redeploying Solution address can be added to the TreeCacheTCP.xml file (for TCP mode) or the TreeCacheMcast.xml file (for Mcast mode). In the server manager, this file can be found in the TC_ROOT/pool_manager directory. In the J2EE application it can be found in the file JETIServerAccessor.jar in the staging area of the Web Application Manager. For Mcast mode, locate the UDP configuration line and add bind_addr=desired-address. For TCP mode, locate the TCP configuration line and add bind_addr=desired-address. Review and adjust as necessary the settings for the following kernel parameters: max_thread_proc maxfiles maxusers Particularly, the default max_thread_proc value of 64 is not sufficient for running the Web application server. The optimum values depend on the traffic level and machine capabilities. Terminating a server manager instance by sending it a signal does not clean up the TreeCache data stored in other four-tier components regarding the terminated pool. When this server manager is restarted, it cleans up this information. However, termination of a server manager in this way sometimes leaves the TreeCache communication mechanisms in a corrupted state and the server manager is not able to rejoin the TreeCache cluster. The problem can be resolved by stopping all four-tier components (the application servers and server managers) in the TreeCache cluster and then restarting them all. This problem can usually be avoided by shutting the server manager down cleanly through the server manager Administrative Interface. For information about using the server manager administrative interface, see the System Administration Guide. A similar problem can occur after the Teamcenter Web tier application is redeployed on the application server without stopping and restarting the application server. In this case, an extra TreeCache instance from the earlier deployment might still be running in the application server and this can interfere with proper functioning of the TreeCache. This can usually be resolved by stopping and restarting the application server. Due to a Java run-time issue on Linux, these problems are more likely if the four-tier component is run with the nohup command on Linux and the process is terminated by sending it a signal. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide A-9

308 Appendix A Troubleshooting Problem JBoss GA displays an error message during startup when installed on Sun Solaris operating system. Solution The following error message displays during JBoss startup: AttachmentStore MC bean (org.jboss.system.server.profileservice. repository.abstractattachmentstore)configuration does not specify the parameter type for constructor This is a known JBoss bug (JBAS-6981). You must edit the profile.xml file for your application server instance. Using the default server as an example, edit the {jboss gs}/server/default/conf/boodstrap/profile.xml file as follows: 1. Locate the following parameter element in the file: <!-- The attachment store --> <bean name="attachmentstore" class="org.jboss.system.server.profileservice. repository.abstractattachmentstore"> <constructor> <parameter> <inject bean="bootstrapprofilefactory" property="attachmentstoreroot" /> </parameter> </constructor> <property name="maindeployer"> <inject bean="maindeployer" /> </property> <property name="serializer"> <inject bean="attachmentsserializer" /> </property> <property name="persistencefactory"> <inject bean="persistencefactory" /> </property>. 2. Update the parameter element to include a class attribute: <parameter class="java.io.file"> During successive calls to get activity status in the Global Services user interface, out of memory errors are displayed. 3. Save the file and restart the application server. During large Global Services transactions, such as a replication manager transaction during site consolidation orchestration, you may encounter a Java out of memory error from the application server. This usually is caused by repeated checks on activity status (AuditActivity business object) from the Global Services user interface. The Java virtual machine (JVM) size grows with each call to get the status. To avoid this, reduce the application server s Java memory property to between 1200m and 1500m (-Xmx1200m or -Xmx1500m, respectively). A-10 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

309 Troubleshooting Problem Teamcenter Web application fails to deploy on JBoss with the following error messsage: Did not receive a response to the deployment operation within the allowed timeout period [60 seconds]. Check the server configuration file and the server logs to find more about the status of the deployment. Solution The Teamcenter Web application takes longer than the default 60 seconds the JBoss deployment scanner allows for deployments. Add the deployment-timeout attribute to the deployment-scanner element and set the value to at least 600 seconds before attempting to deploy the Web application. <subsystem xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:deployment-scanner:1.1"> <deployment-scanner path="deployments" relative-to="jboss.server.base.dir" s scan-interval="5000" deployment-timeout="600"/> </subsystem> For more information, see the JBoss deployment procedure for Teamcenter in the Web Application Deployment Guide. Troubleshooting Oracle When Oracle detects an error, an error code is displayed in the system console window and written to the Teamcenter trace and log files. To assist troubleshooting, Oracle embeds object names, numbers, and character strings in error messages. The oerr utility provides additional troubleshooting information. Often, the additional information offers a solution to the problem. View additional information about an Oracle error message 1. Manually set the Oracle environment by entering the following command: export ORACLE_HOME=/u01/app/oracle/product/oracle-version Replace oracle-version with the installed Oracle version, for example, Enter the following command: $ORACLE_HOME/bin/oerr facility error-number Replace facility error-number with the Oracle error code, for example ORA ORA is the facility and 7300 is the error number. This command displays cause and action messages that you can use to troubleshoot the problem. Troubleshooting document rendering If you are not successful rendering document revisions to translate dataset files, your administrator should review your installation and configuration systematically and verify the following requirements are met. Installation of Teamcenter lifecycle visualization Convert software is required by the previewservice feature. o You must select the Convert feature; the Print feature is optional. o The destination installation directory name must not contain spaces. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide A-11

310 Appendix A Troubleshooting o o To accommodate high levels of input and output, modify the vvcp.ini file on Windows systems, or the vvcp.platform.cfg file on UNIX systems. FileCheckWait=600 FileCheckWaitForZero=30 When the installation is complete, verify the Convert option prepare.exe program exists under the VVCP installation directory. For more information about verifying this part of the setup, see the Dispatcher Server Translators Reference Guide. Installation of Ghostscript 8.53 software required by the previewservice feature. o A free Ghostscript installer is available at the following link: o o On UNIX platforms, after you install Ghostscript, set the PSPath setting in the Convert and Print configuration file (vvcp.ini) to the location of the Ghostscript application. For example: *PSPath: /apps/gs853/bin/gs. Set AllowOpenApplication=on to support the use of applications, such as Microsoft Word, that may already be open when the Convert process begins. Installation of the Adobe LiveCycle ES software required by the pdfgenerator utility. Ensure native application support for LiveCycle PDF Generator ES is enabled. When configuring the Result Watched folder directory: o Do not append %Y/%M/%D in the result folder directory. For example: Result Folder: result Include File Pattern: * o o Path Specify the location of the watched folder directory. Adobe LiveCycle creates this directory if it does not already exist; use a short path. Note Wait Time The input directory is created under the specified Path directory location. This is the watched folder input directory. For example, if the path is: D:\LCWatchedFolder The watched folder input directory path is: D:\LCWatchedFolder\input A-12 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

311 Troubleshooting Duration in milliseconds to wait for before picking up the file/folder. Increase this number for large file. o o o Operation Name Select CreatePDF. Input Parameter Mappings For inputdocument, select Variable and enter *.* Output Parameter Mappings For Result, enter %F.pdf After LiveCycle PDF Generator ES is installed, you must create and configure the Adobe LiveCycle Watched Folder Endpoint as described in Adobe LiveCycle Endpoint Management documentation. The specified watched folder input and result directory locations are needed during the installation of PdfGenerator translator. For more information, see the Dispatcher Server Translators Reference Guide. After the watched folder endpoints are set, you may also need to modify the default applications extension file type settings to specify additional filename extensions for file types for generating PDF output. For more information about these configuration tasks, see the Adobe LiveCyle ES documentation. You must enable the RenderMgtTranslator service and one or both of the following services: o PreviewService o PdfGenerator Configure translation services by enabling and configuring translators using TEM. For more information about setting up and configuring translators, see the Dispatcher Server Translators Reference Guide. o o o PreviewService Required Teamcenter Visualization Convert 8. Ghostscript v 8.53, and source authoring applications such as Microsoft Office application (2003, 2007) are also required. PdfGenerator Requires Adobe LiveCycle PDF Generator ES. The configuration file must specify the Adobe watched folder input and watched folder result directory location. Source authoring applications such as Microsoft Office application (2003, 2007) and Adobe Acrobat 8.x are also required. RenderMgtTranslator Required for either PreviewService, PdfGenerator, or any other service to be added. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide A-13

312 Appendix A Troubleshooting Use Business Modeler IDE to set up and deploy IRDC and dispatcher service configuration objects to the Teamcenter database. Troubleshooting Teamcenter Integration for NX Teamcenter Integration for NX may be unresponsive in a four-tier rich client if you specify an incorrect value for Web Application Name during installation of the Teamcenter corporate server. During corporate server installation, TEM prompts for the Web application name in the Default Site Web Server panel. The Web application name you enter is used to populate the WEB_default_site_deployed_app_name preference in the Teamcenter database. When you build the Teamcenter Integration for NX Web application in Web Application Manager, you specify the actual name of the Web application. If the name of the deployed Web application does not match the value specified in TEM, the Web application fails to connect to the Teamcenter server. If you experience problems starting Teamcenter Integration for NX from the four-tier rich client, inspect the ugs_router system log for messages that resemble the following example: INTEROP: Executing: O:\win32\ugnx \ugii\ugraf.exe -pim=yes - http_url= -soa_url= http_cookie=iman= madakash45b765e1cd0ea854705e5f8f; path=/;" - http_vmid=b6e51c5aaaf5b200: :1104f3e3952:-8000 "-role=all" - portalinfo=localhost:2377:process_command_line - invoke=com.teamcenter.rac.commands.objectschanged.objectschangedcommand+-uids=%s+src=madakash@4tier_w NX :madakash@4tier_w NX 4-tier INTEROP: Waiting for UG/Manager V to start up... This message results from the rich client expecting a Web application named tc but being unable to find it. To resolve this problem, set the WEB_default_site_deployed_app_name preference to the correct name of the deployed Web application. You can update this preference using the preferences manager from the command line or from within the rich client. For information about using the preferences manager, see the Preferences and Environment Variables Reference. Recovering from a corrupted database If you attempt to install Teamcenter using a database that is only partially installed, Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM) allows you to drop all existing data before beginning a new installation. If the Teamcenter database is corrupted beyond repair, you can alternatively delete the database and repeat the installation using an empty database. To do this, perform the appropriate procedure, depending on your database vendor: Recovering from a corrupted IBM DB2 database Recovering from a corrupted Oracle database A-14 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

313 Troubleshooting Recovering from a corrupted IBM DB2 database 1. Use either of the following tools to delete a corrupted database in an IBM DB2-based installation: IBM Control Center In the Control Center application, select the database you want to delete from the list of databases, right-click the database and then select Drop. This also deletes the appropriate data files. Command Line Editor tool Start the command line utility and then type the following command: DROP DATABASE TC 2. Create a new DB2 database for Teamcenter. For more information, see Creating a DB2 database for Teamcenter 3. Launch TEM and reinstall Teamcenter. Recovering from a corrupted Oracle database 1. Delete the database using Oracle Database Configuration Assistant (DBCA). 2. Create a new empty database using the appropriate DBCA template file. 3. Launch TEM and reinstall Teamcenter. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide A-15

314

315 Appendix B Distribution media Distribution media B-1 Teamcenter software distribution image B-2 Teamcenter documentation distribution image B-3 PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide

316

317 Appendix B Distribution media Distribution media Siemens PLM Software distributes the following software and documentation images for Teamcenter 10.1: Image Teamcenter software Teamcenter documentation Rich client over-the-web Visualization Description Contains Teamcenter software for your operating system (Hewlett-Packard HP-UX, IBM AIX, Sun Solaris, Linux, Apple Macintosh, or Microsoft Windows). The software distribution image includes Teamcenter installation programs (Teamcenter Environment Manager and Web Application Manager) and required files for Teamcenter features such as Security Services. For a detailed description of the contents of this image, see Teamcenter software distribution image. Note Teamcenter software distribution images can contain multiple ZIP files. For example, the software distribution image for Windows consists of two files named Tcn_win_1_of_2.zip and Tcn_win_2_of_2.zip. If you download software distribution images for Teamcenter, you must download all files in the set to obtain the complete image. After you download files, expand all ZIP files to a common directory to assemble the image before you begin installation. Contains the archive file required for installing Teamcenter online help (tchelp.jar), Teamcenter documentation in PDF format, and Teamcenter documentation in HTML format. For a detailed description of the contents of this image, see Teamcenter documentation distribution image. Contains the files required to install the Teamcenter rich client over-the-web on all supported operating systems, including a rich client distribution server and Over-the-Web Installer. Contains the files required to install Teamcenter lifecycle visualization on all supported operating systems. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide B-1

318 Appendix B Distribution media Image Oracle Description Contains directories, files, and scripts used to install Oracle Enterprise Edition. The contents of this image are identical to the Oracle Enterprise Edition CD-ROM distributed by Oracle. Teamcenter software distribution image The following table describes the directories in the Teamcenter software distribution image: Directory additional_applications additional_documentation advanced_installations bmide cci install localization logmanager mappingdesigner portal tc Web_tier Description Contains directories containing applications such as Teamcenter client communication system (TCCS), Security Services, and the Siemens PLM Software Common Licensing Server. Contains instructions for installing Oracle RDBMS. Contains the resource_management subdirectory that contains Resource Manager application files for Teamcenter manufacturing process management. An additional subdirectory, cc_integration, contains Teamcenter manufacturing process management components required when installing the Multi-Structure Manager integration with Tecnomatix empower. Contains the Business Modeler IDE. Contains the CCI client. Contains files required for installing Teamcenter. Contains localization and internationalization files for the rich client and the thin client. Contains the log manager application. Contains the mapping manager application. Contains Teamcenter rich client files. Contains the Teamcenter software files. Contains the Web Application Manager program and supporting files for generating the Web tier application and the rich client distribution server and instance WAR files. The base directory of the Teamcenter software distribution image also contains Teamcenter Environment Manager program (tem.sh) that installs Teamcenter executables and data directories. B-2 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

319 Distribution media Teamcenter documentation distribution image The Teamcenter documentation distribution image contains Teamcenter online help in HTML and PDF formats. The documentation distribution image contains the following files. File tchelp.jar tcrefs.jar DataModelReport.zip PDF.zip JavaDoc.zip Description Contains the Teamcenter online help library in HTML format. You can install this library using Teamcenter installation tools. You can also install this library manually by expanding the tchelp.jar file to your local host and then opening the index.html file in a Web browser. This archive requires approximately 561 MB of disk space when expanded. Contains the following Teamcenter developer references: C++ API Reference Integration Toolkit (ITK) Function Reference Services Reference This archive requires approximately 629 MB of disk space when expanded. Contains the Teamcenter Data Model Report. This reference contains documentation on standard Teamcenter data model objects, such as business objects, classes, attributes, properties, lists of values (LOVs), and others. This archive requires approximately 3.44 GB of disk space when expanded. Contains the Teamcenter online help collection in PDF format. This archive requires approximately 344 MB of disk space when expanded. Contains documentation for Teamcenter user interface components you can use in your rich client customizations. For more information about this documentation, see the Client Customization Programmer s Guide. The documentation distribution image also contains the following directories. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide B-3

320 Appendix B Distribution media Directory PDF additional_documentation Description Contains the Teamcenter online help library in PDF format. To open the online help library index page, open the index.htm file. A PDF reader or PDF Web browser plug-in is required to view PDF files. If you use Adobe Reader, you can search the complete online help library by clicking the search icon on the online help library index page. Note The PDF directory contains the same contents as the PDF.zip file. Contains additional documentation for use with Teamcenter. This includes guides for using the Siemens PLM Software common licensing server. You can install the Teamcenter online help library in HTML or PDF format to your local host or Teamcenter network. The HTML online help library can be accessed from the Teamcenter rich client and thin client. For information about installing online help, see Install online help. B-4 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

321 Appendix C Solutions and features reference Solutions and features reference C-1 Teamcenter solutions C-1 Teamcenter features C-1 Rich client solutions C-16 PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide

322

323 Appendix C Solutions and features reference Solutions and features reference Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM) provides solutions and features you can include in Teamcenter server or client configurations. The Web Application Manager provides rich client solutions you can add to rich client distribution instance. Teamcenter solutions Solutions are preselected groups of features that provide starting points for recommended Teamcenter configurations. You can add features or deselect features in the Features panel in Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM). For information about a solution, point to the solution name in the list. TEM displays a description. Solution Corporate Server Dispatcher (Dispatcher Server) Volume Server Rich Client 2-tier Rich Client 4-tier Multisite Collaboration Proxy Server Business Modeler IDE Global Services Features Teamcenter Foundation FMS Server Cache NX UG Integration Dispatcher Server FMS Server Cache Teamcenter Rich Client 2-tier Teamcenter Rich Client 4-tier Multisite Collaboration IDSM Service Multisite Collaboration ODS Service Business Modeler IDE Standalone Teamcenter Foundation J2EE Based Server Manager FMS Server Cache Global Services Framework Global Services Preferences Teamcenter features TEM provides the following features and feature groups in the Features panel. Features are grouped by related applications. For information about a feature, point to the feature name in the list. TEM displays a description of the feature. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide C-1

324 Appendix C Solutions and features reference Note Some features are disabled because they require other features. To enable a feature, select its prerequisite features. For information about feature prerequisites, see the feature description. Some features cannot be installed in the same configuration, so selecting one disables the other. Teamcenter features Feature/Subfeature Base Install Teamcenter Foundation Description Base Teamcenter server and client components. Installs the complete Teamcenter application root directory (TC_ROOT), including the Teamcenter server process (tcserver), and either creates a data directory for storing database-specific files or configures this installation to connect to an existing data directory. If you create a data directory, you also provide information about the database to use with this installation. If you specify a new database, Teamcenter Environment Manager populates the database and creates a volume. Installing Teamcenter Foundation is optional only when you install the following components: the Multi-Site Collaboration proxy servers, File Management System, online help, or sample files. When you install these components, Teamcenter Environment Manager creates an TC_ROOT directory, but populates it with only the subdirectories necessary for these components to run. Teamcenter Rich Client (Shared Disk Deployment) Teamcenter Rich Client 2-tier Teamcenter Rich Client 4-tier Business Modeler IDE 2-tier Business Modeler IDE 4-tier Business Modeler IDE Standalone Teamcenter Rich Client (Lite Edition) Server Enhancements J2EE Based Server Manager Installs the rich client in a shared location. This client can be run from multiple hosts. Installs a two-tier rich client and optionally configures it for use with additional features and applications, such as Teamcenter lifecycle visualization and NX Manager. Installs a four-tier rich client and optionally configures it for use with additional features and applications, such as Teamcenter lifecycle visualization and NX Manager. Installs the two-tier Business Modeler IDE client. This client connects to the Teamcenter server using IIOP. Installs the four-tier Business Modeler IDE client. This client connects to a Teamcenter server in a four-tier environment using HTTP. Installs only the Business Modeler IDE client without requiring a connection to a Teamcenter server. Installs a rich client and configures it for use with the NX Manager feature. This feature requires NX Manager for Rich Client. Additional features for Teamcenter servers. Installs the process that manages the pool of Teamcenter server processes. This option is applicable only when you are deploying the Web tier. This feature requires Teamcenter Foundation and FMS Server Cache features. For a smaller site, you can install the server manager and Teamcenter servers on the same host as the Web tier application. For deployment options for larger sites, you can install the server manager on a separate host..net Based Server Manager Installs the process that manages the pool of Teamcenter server processes. This option is applicable only when you are deploying the Web tier. This feature requires Teamcenter Foundation and FMS Server Cache features. C-2 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

325 Solutions and features reference Teamcenter features Feature/Subfeature Full Text Search Engine Description Installs Autonomy Intelligent Data Operating Layer (IDOL) server, the default full-text search engine, and configures searching for the local database. Autonomy IDOL enables users to retrieve objects from the Teamcenter database based on search criteria. It allows users to specify searches on metadata values, as well as full text retrieval searches on both metadata and common forms of text data. IDOL works with the IDOL server, DiSH server and File System Fetch as three services installed. The IDOL installer does not support the silent install option. Online Help Installs the Teamcenter Help Library files on the local host: When TEM prompts you for the location of the Teamcenter help files, enter the path to the Teamcenter documentation distribution image, which contains the online help files (tchelp.jar). Note For information about installing online help using as part of a Web tier application, see Installing Teamcenter online help. Sample files Installs sample source code for customizing Teamcenter and generating reports. This component is optional. You can install the sample files individually; you need not install any other components. Teamcenter Security Services Configures Security Services for Teamcenter. These services eliminate prompts for logon credentials when users switch Teamcenter products within a user session. Prerequisite: Installation and configuration of Security Services. For information about Security Services, see the Security Services Installation/Customization guide. Required information: Application ID for this instance of Teamcenter in the Security Services application registry. Complete URL of the Security Services logon Service Web application. Database Daemons Action Manager Service Complete URL of the Security Services Identity Service Web application. Optional database support services. Monitors the database for the creation of action objects and dispatches events that have a specific execution time and events the Subscription Manager daemon fails to process. Installing the Action Manager service is required to enable the rich client Subscription Monitor application. Subscription Manager Service Monitors the database event queue for the creation of subscription event objects. Installing the Subscription Manager service is required to enable the rich client Subscription Monitor application. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide C-3

326 Appendix C Solutions and features reference Teamcenter features Feature/Subfeature Task Manager Service Description Checks user inboxes for tasks that have passed due dates, notifies the delegated recipients, and marks those tasks as late. Installing the Task Monitor service is required to enable notification of late tasks. Tesselation Manager Service Tessellates UGMASTER and UGALTREP datasets to the JT (DirectModel) dataset and attaches the JT dataset back to the item revision and UGMASTER and UGALTREP dataset. Installing the Tessellation service is required to create the tessellated representations in Repeatable Digital Validation (RDV) that enable users of the DesignContext application to quickly visualize components in context. The tessellated representations are created during the workflow release process, ensuring that JT files of the DirectModel datasets are updated as the NX files are released. Teamcenter Shared Metadata Cache Service File Management FMS Server Cache Installs the Shared Metadata Cache Service. File management features. Installs the File Management System FSC server and file caches. You must install an FSC server on each host that runs a server manager and on each host that is to provide volume services. You can optionally choose to install the FSC as a configuration server or a performance cache server. Hierarchical Storage Management (HSM) Teamcenter Web Tier ASP.NET State Service Web Tier for.net Extensions 4D Planning Adds support for third-party hierarchical storage management software. Features to support the Teamcenter.NET Web tier. Installs the middle tier processes that communicate with Teamcenter server processes. Installs the middle tier processes that communicate with Teamcenter server processes. Extensions to Teamcenter server and client functionality. Installs the 4D Planning feature. 4D Planning is the capability to add a time component to process planning to simulate and visualize construction over an extended period of time. For more information, see Getting Started with Manufacturing. Simulation Process ManagementSimulation Process Management Installs Simulation Process Management, a packaged solution that provides unique simulation process and data management capabilities for CAE engineers and CAE analysts performing analysis work. For more information, see the Simulation Process Management Guide Teamcenter Integration for NX Weld Management Teamcenter Integration for NX-4th Generation Design Installs Teamcenter Integration for NX. This feature requires a local installation of NX and it is supported with the two-tier rich client architecture only. For more information, see Install NX and Teamcenter Integration for NX or NX Integration. Installs the template that manages NX welding features in Teamcenter. Installs 4th Generation Design (4GD) support for Teamcenter Integration for NX. 4GD allows users of NX CAD or Lifecycle Visualization to cooperate in real time during the design cycle of a product. For information about 4GD, see the 4th Generation Design Guide. C-4 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

327 Solutions and features reference Teamcenter features Feature/Subfeature Advanced PLM Services 4th Generation Design Description 4th Generation Design features. Installs 4th Generation Design (4GD) functionality for the Teamcenter server. 4GD allows users of NX CAD or Lifecycle Visualization to cooperate in real time during the design cycle of a product. For information about 4GD, see the 4th Generation Design Guide. 4th Generation Design Change Management Integration Installs 4th Generation Design functionality for Change Manager. This feature requires Teamcenter Foundation and Change Management. For information about this feature, see the 4th Generation Design Guide. 4th Generation Design Issue Management Installs 4th Generation Design functionality for Issue Manager. This feature requires Teamcenter Foundation and Issue Management. For information about this feature, see the 4th Generation Design Guide. Aerospace and Defense Aerospace and Defense Foundation Aerospace and Defense features. Installs Aerospace and Defense functionality for the Teamcenter server. This feature requires Teamcenter Foundation and Vendor Management. For more information about this feature, see the Aerospace and Defense Solution Guide. Aerospace and Defense Change Management Installs the change management functionality for the Aerospace and Defense Foundation feature. This feature requires Teamcenter Foundation and Aerospace and Defense Foundation. For more information about this feature, see the Aerospace and Defense Solution Guide. Aerospace and Defense Foundation Training Automotive Teamcenter Automotive Edition GM Overlay Installs the Aerospace and Defense Foundation training program for the Aerospace and Defense Foundation feature. This feature requires Teamcenter Foundation, Vendor Management, and Aerospace and Defense Foundation. For more information about this feature, see the Aerospace and Defense Solution Guide. Teamcenter Automotive Edition and additional supporting features. Installs the optional Teamcenter Automotive Edition application. Installs the Teamcenter Automotive Edition GM Overlay application. Installing GM Overlay requires that you also install Teamcenter Automotive Edition. Configure AutoCAD Integration for GM Overlay GM Customization for DPV Wire Harness Configuration in GM Overlay GM PAD/TWP Customization Configures AutoCAD Integration/AutoCAD Manager to operate in a Teamcenter Automotive Edition GM Overlay environment. Choose this option only when you add GM Overlay to a Teamcenter environment that includes AutoCAD Integration. If you attempt to include this configuration before installing GM Overlay and the standard AutoCAD Integration, the install fails. Both GM Overlay and the base AutoCAD integration must be installed and functioning before you choose this option. Requires Teamcenter Foundation and GM Overlay. Installs GM-specific LOVs and GRM rules for DPV. Configures wire harness configuration for a Teamcenter Automotive Edition GM Overlay environment. Requires Teamcenter Foundation, Wire Harness Configuration, Teamcenter Automotive Edition, and GM Overlay. Installs additional GM data types for PAD/TWP Customization. This feature requires Teamcenter Foundation, GM Overlay, Customization for em-server Integration, and PAD/TWP Customization. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide C-5

328 Appendix C Solutions and features reference Teamcenter features Feature/Subfeature BOM Management Product Master Manager Description Features that support Product Master Management. Installs Product Master Manager, a rich client application that allows users to view and manage a complete set of LOUs, LOAs, and parts for a vehicle program. Users work with items in a work in progress (WIP) area and optionally add them to a package to allow effective collaboration with other users. Note This feature requires postinstall setup to complete configuration. For more information about installing Product Master Manager, see Installing and Upgrading Product Master Management in the Product Master Management online help collection. CAD-BOM Alignment Configures the Teamcenter installation to interact and share visual data with Product Master Management. Configuring this feature allows designs managed by this installation of Teamcenter to be related to parts and use or parts in products that are managed by Product Master Management. Note This feature requires postinstall setup to complete configuration. Behavior Model Management Common Framework Features that support behavior model management. Features that provide the core behavior modeling functionality. For more information about these features, see the Behavior Modeling Tool Integration Guide. Behavior Modeling Common Client Teamcenter Behavior Modeling Framework MATLAB Integration Installs the behavior modeling framework that provides integration to the behavior modeling tool. For more information about these features, see the Behavior Modeling Tool Integration Guide Installs the behavior modeling framework that provides integration to the Teamcenter behavior modeling tool. This feature requires Teamcenter Foundation or a rich client or a two-tier Business Modeler IDE client. Features that provide the Teamcenter integration to MATLAB, which allows you to manage your MATLAB model data in Teamcenter. For more information about these features, see the Behavior Modeling Tool Integration Guide. MATLAB Integration Connector Teamcenter MATLAB Integration Consumer Packaged Goods Brand Management Installs the MATLAB integration connector that allows you to manage MATLAB models in Teamcenter. This feature requires the Behavior Modeling Common Client feature. Installs the Teamcenter MATLAB integration data model. This feature requires the Teamcenter Behavior Modeling Framework feature and also Teamcenter Foundation or a rich client or a two-tier Business Modeler IDE client. Features to support Consumer Packaged Goods. Installs the Brand Management template for Consumer Packaged Goods. For information about installing this feature, see Getting Started with Consumer Packaged Goods. C-6 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

329 Solutions and features reference Teamcenter features Feature/Subfeature CPG Materials Finished Product Management Packaging and Artwork Description Installs Consumer Packaged Goods objects such as raw materials, formulated materials, and so on. For information about installing this feature, see Getting Started with Consumer Packaged Goods. Installs the Finished Product Management functionality for Consumer Packaged Goods. For information about installing this feature, see Getting Started with Consumer Packaged Goods. Installs packaging and artwork functionality for Consumer Packaged Goods. For information about installing this feature, see Getting Started with Consumer Packaged Goods. Specification Manager Finished Product Management to CPG Materials Bridge Packaging and Artwork to Finished Product Management Bridge Installs the Specification Manager feature. For more information about installing this feature, see the Specification Manager Guide. Provides a bridge between finished products and Consumer Packaged Goods materials. For information about installing this feature, see Getting Started with Consumer Packaged Goods. Provides a bridge between Packaging and Artwork and Finished Product Management for Consumer Packaged Goods. For information about installing this feature, see Getting Started with Consumer Packaged Goods. Content and Document Management Acrobat/Reader Plugin Content and document management features. Installs the Teamcenter plug-in for Adobe Acrobat and Adobe Acrobat Reader. This solution is optional. For information about using the Adobe Acrobat/Reader plug-in, see Getting Started with Document Management. Content Management Base Installs the data model for Content Management. For information about configuring this feature and using Content Management, see the Content Management Guide. Content Management DITA Enables management of documentation for the DITA standard in Content Management. For information about configuring this feature and using Content Management, see the Content Management Guide. Content Management S1000D Enables management of documentation for the S1000D standard in Content Management. For information about configuring this feature and using Content Management, see the Content Management Guide. Content Management S1000D 4.0 Engineering Process Management Enables management of documentation for the S1000D 4.0 standard in Content Management. For information about configuring this feature and using Content Management, see the Content Management Guide. Engineering Process Management features. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide C-7

330 Appendix C Solutions and features reference Teamcenter features Feature/Subfeature NX Integration NX Manager for Rich Client Spatial Search Description Installs default data types and loads template NX data to support Teamcenter Integration for NX/NX Integration, the Teamcenter integration with Siemens PLM Software NX. Installs Teamcenter Integration for NX for the rich client. This feature requires Teamcenter Rich Client 2-tier or Teamcenter Rich Client 4-tier. Installs Spatial Search capabilities of the cacheless search engine. For more information about configuring and using Spatial Search, see the Getting Started with RDV guide. This feature requires Dispatcher Server. Note Cacheless search is installed with Teamcenter Foundation, but its capabilities must be enabled through TEM. For more information, see the Cacheless Search Deployment Guide. Bounding box generation from JT Enables generation of bounding box data from JT files, providing secondary data for the cacheless search engine. For more information about configuring and using cacheless search, see the Getting Started with RDV guide. This feature requires Dispatcher Server. Also, during Teamcenter installation, you must install the Spatial Search translator (JtToBboxAndTso). Note Cacheless search is installed with Teamcenter Foundation, but its capabilities must be enabled through TEM. For more information, see the Cacheless Search Deployment Guide. Trueshape generation from JT Enables generation of Trushape data from JT files, providing secondary data for the cacheless search engine. For more information about configuring and using cacheless search, see the Getting Started with RDV guide. This feature requires Dispatcher Server. Also, during Teamcenter installation, you must install the Spatial Search translator (JtToBboxAndTso). Note Cacheless search is installed with Teamcenter Foundation, but its capabilities must be enabled through TEM. For more information, see the Cacheless Search Deployment Guide. Bounding box generation from NX Enables generation of bounding box data when saving NX files, providing secondary data for the cacheless search engine. Note Cacheless search is installed with Teamcenter Foundation, but its capabilities must be enabled through TEM. For more information, see the Cacheless Search Deployment Guide. C-8 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

331 Solutions and features reference Teamcenter features Feature/Subfeature QPL for Repeatable Digital Validation Description Installs and configures QPL files used in conjunction with the rich client DesignContext application. For QPL-based DesignContext, installing Repeatable Digital Validation (RDV) services is required. For Appearance-based DesignContext, installing RDV services is not required. QPL is not required if you use cacheless search. Required information: The path to the location of an installed NX application. The type of search engine to use, either an NX-based engine or a JT-based engine. Database configuration for use with Repeatable Digital Validation. DesignContext is available for both the rich client and thin client. Note Cacheless search is installed with Teamcenter Foundation, but its capabilities must be enabled through TEM. For more information, see the Cacheless Search Deployment Guide. Enterprise Knowledge Foundation Remote Workflow Enterprise Knowledge Foundation features. Configures linking between Teamcenter sites for remote workflow operations. This option is applicable only when you are deploying the four-tier architecture. Prerequisites: Remote Workflow components, including Application Registry, must be separately installed and configured. The Web tier application, including the optional Remote Workflow parameters, must be installed and configured as described in Installing rich client Web applications. Required information: Host name and port number of the Java servlet running the Teamcenter Application Registry. The host name and port number of the host running a Web tier application. If you are linking to Teamcenter portfolio, program and project management, the chooser servlet name. Teamcenter Client for Microsoft Office Installs the Teamcenter Client for Microsoft Office. For information about installing this feature, see the Installation on Windows Clients Guide. Dispatcher Client for Rich Client Installs Dispatcher Client for the rich client. This feature requires Teamcenter Rich Client 2-tier or Teamcenter Rich Client 4-tier. For information about installing this feature, see Getting Started with Dispatcher (Translation Management). PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide C-9

332 Appendix C Solutions and features reference Teamcenter features Feature/Subfeature Render Document for Rich Client Description Provides Render Management capabilities for the rich client. This feature requires Dispatcher Client for Rich Client. For more information about configuring and using Render Management capabilities, see the My Teamcenter Guide. For information about installing Dispatcher features, see Getting Started with Dispatcher (Translation Management). For information about installing and configuring file translators for the Dispatcher Server, see the Dispatcher Server Translators Reference Guide. Change Management Provides a flexible change management framework that integrates with other Teamcenter products. For more information about using Change Management, see the Change Manager Guide. Note If you install this feature, you may need to set the HiddenPerspectives preference in the rich client. For more information, see the Preferences and Environment Variables Reference. Contract Data Management Installs Contract Data Management, which allows you to manage, initiate review processes, and monitor correspondence for procurement documents, such as design information, drawings, status reports, purchase orders, and so on. For more information about Contract Data Management, see the Aerospace and Defense Solution Guide. Dispatcher Server Finish Management Materials Management Installs the following Dispatcher Server components: scheduler, module and administration client. For information about installing this feature, see Getting Started with Dispatcher (Translation Management). Installs Finish Management for Teamcenter. A finish represents a finishing process on a part. It may be used to improve appearance, adhesion, corrosion resistance, tarnish resistance, chemical resistance, wear resistance, and remove burrs and so on. For more information about finishes, see the Aerospace and Defense Solution Guide. Installs the Materials Management solution, which stores approved material and substance information imported from a third-party database (for example, Granta, IMDS) into a material library in the Teamcenter database. For more information, see the Materials Management Solution Guide. Stock Material Installs the Stock Material feature for Teamcenter. Many parts are made from stock materials such as bar stock, tubing stock and sheet stock. This features enables you to manage stock materials in Teamcenter, performing actions like creating libraries of stock materials and assigning stock materials to parts. For more information about stock materials, see the Aerospace and Defense Solution Guide. C-10 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

333 Solutions and features reference Teamcenter features Feature/Subfeature Work Package Management Description Enables management of work packages Teamcenter. Work packages or packages are typically collections of CAD files and documentation that outsourcing partners require to build, test or maintain components or subassemblies of larger products. Packages serve as revisable collections of product information that can be used in a variety of contexts. For more information about packages, see the Aerospace and Defense Solution Guide. Change and Schedule Management Interface Installs the Change and Schedule Management interface, which enables you to selectively propagate the problem, impact, solution, and reference items related to a change object to the related plan items (schedules) leaf-level schedule tasks. For more information, see the Change Manager Guide. Dispatcher Client Issue Management Penetration Request Management Installs an integration of the Dispatcher Server and Teamcenter that enables rich client users to translate Teamcenter data files to various visualization format for viewing in Teamcenter. This feature requires Teamcenter Foundation. For information about installing this feature, see Getting Started with Dispatcher (Translation Management). Installs Issue Manager, which allows you to track problems, or issues, with products by managing the review, approval, and implementation of issues. For more information, see the Issue Manager Guide. Installs the penetration request management feature. This feature requires the Change Management and Issue Management features and also Teamcenter Foundation or a rich client. Lifecycle Visualization Teamcenter Visualization (Embedded) for Rich Client Teamcenter Visualization (Stand-alone) for Rich Client Localization Classification L10N Features to support Lifecycle Visualization. Installs the embedded viewer for the rich client. This feature requires Teamcenter Rich Client 2-tier or Teamcenter Rich Client 4-tier. Installs stand-alone application viewer for the rich client. This feature requires Teamcenter Rich Client 2-tier or Teamcenter Rich Client 4-tier. Features that support localization of Teamcenter. Installs the classification localization template, which enables localization in the Classification environment. For more information, see the Localization Guide. Note The classification localization template is not supported with IBM DB2 databases. Maintenance Repair and Overhaul Teamcenter maintenance, repair, and overhaul features. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide C-11

334 Appendix C Solutions and features reference Teamcenter features Feature/Subfeature As-Built Management Description Installs the As-Built template for Teamcenter maintenance, repair, and overhaul. For information about installing, configuring, and using this feature, see the As-Built Manager Guide. If you select this feature and you use the Over-the-Web Installer to install the rich client, include the As-Built Manager solution in your rich client distribution instance. 1 As-Maintained Management Installs the As-Maintained feature to support the As-Maintained physical structure management For information about installing, configuring, and using this feature, see the Service Manager Guide. If you select this feature and you use the Over-the-Web Installer to install the rich client, include the As-Maintained Management for Service Manager solution in your rich client distribution instance. 1 Service Planning Installs the Service Planner application that supports service planning capabilities within Teamcenter. Service Planner requires a separate license and is installed as an optional overlay to standard Teamcenter. If you select this feature and you use the Over-the-Web Installer to install the rich client, include the Service Planning solution in your rich client distribution instance. 1 As-Built and As-Maintained Alignment For information about using Service Planner, see the Service Planner Guide. Enables interoperability of data created by the As-Built Management and As-Maintained Management features. If you select this feature and you use the Over-the-Web Installer to install the rich client, include the As-Built and As-Maintained Alignment for Service Manager solution in your rich client distribution instance. 1 For information about installing, configuring, and using this feature, see the As-Built Manager Guide. For information about the As-Maintained feature, see the Service Manager Guide. Service Event Management Installs Service Event Management to support service process management for Teamcenter maintenance, repair, and overhaul. If you select this feature and you use the Over-the-Web Installer to install the rich client, include the Service Event Management Extensions for Service Manager solution in your rich client distribution instance. 1 For more information about using Service Manager, see the Service Manager Guide. Service Planning and Service Processing Alignment If you select this feature and you use the Over-the-Web Installer to install the rich client, include the Service Processing Extensions for Service Manager solution in your rich client distribution instance For more information about installing rich client distribution instances, see Install a rich client distribution instance C-12 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

335 Solutions and features reference Teamcenter features Feature/Subfeature Service Request Processing Description Installs the Service Planning and Service Processing Alignment module to support using discrepancies in Service Planner. If you select this feature and you use the Over-the-Web Installer to install the rich client, include the Service Request Manager solution in your rich client distribution instance. 1 For more information about using Service Planner, see the Service Manager Guide. Service Scheduler Installs Service Scheduler, which supports scheduling within Teamcenter. Service Scheduler lets companies define, schedule, and implement services for their products. Service Scheduler is a separately licensed application that is installed as an optional overlay on top of standard Teamcenter and Service Manager. If you select this feature and you use the Over-the-Web Installer to install the rich client, include the Service Scheduling solution in your rich client distribution instance. 1 For more information about using Service Scheduler, see the Service Scheduler Guide. Manufacturing Process Management Configure Resource Browser and NC Package Browser MTM Data Card Teamcenter manufacturing process management features. Installs libraries for the Resource Browser and NC Package Browser applications. Installs the Methods Time Measurement (MTM) data card system. For more information, see Getting Started with Manufacturing. Customization for Process Simulate Integration Customization for em-server Integration Work Instructions Installs additional data types for Process Simulate Integration Customization. Installs additional data types for Tecnomatix server integration customization. Installs the work instructions feature. For information about using work instructions, see the Manufacturing Process Planner Guide. Database Configuration for DPV ebop reports Customization PAD/TWP Customization Manufacturing support for 4th Generation Design Installs the database configuration for DPV. This feature requires Teamcenter Foundation, GM Overlay, and Customization for em-server Integration. Installs additional data types for ebop Reports Customization. This feature requires Teamcenter Foundation and Customization for em-server Integration. Installs additional data types for PAD/TWP Customization. This feature requires Teamcenter Foundation, GM Overlay, and Customization for em-server Integration. Installs additional data types required to work with 4th Generation Design (4GD) objects in Manufacturing Process Planner. For more information about using Manufacturing Process Planner with 4th Generation Design, see the Manufacturing Process Planner Guide. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide C-13

336 Appendix C Solutions and features reference Teamcenter features Feature/Subfeature Install Libraries for AI SOA Client Description Installs sample source code and executables that assist in developing an Application Interface (AI) service client. For more information about the AI Service, see the Services Reference in the Teamcenter HTML Help Collection. Note The Services Reference is available only in the Teamcenter HTML Help Collection. It is not available in the PDF collection. Mechatronics Process Management EDA for Business Modeler IDE EDA Server Support EMPS - Foundation ESM Base SCM ClearCase for Foundation Features to support Mechatronics Process Management. Integrates Teamcenter EDA with the Business Modeler IDE. Installs the dataset types and transfer modes required to support Teamcenter EDA, the application that integrates ECAD applications with Teamcenter. Installs electronic design and manufacturing types to support ECAD translation and PCB design collaboration using Teamcenter embedded viewer. Installs ESS base types and updates preferences. Without these, ESS operations do not work from any interface (rich client, thin client, custom utilities, and other clients). Installs ClearCase types and sets Teamcenter preferences to enable the integration between Teamcenter and the IBM ClearCase software configuration management (SCM) tool. For more information about installation, see the Teamcenter ClearCase Integration Guide. Wire Harness Configuration Calibration and Configuration Data Management Installs Teamcenter schema support for wire harnesses. Installs the Calibration and Configuration Data Management (CCDM) feature, which allows you to manage the calibration and configuration-related parameter data of embedded systems. CCDM allows you to define, create, view, update, and delete parameter data, and to group related parameter definitions together and associate parameter values to a project. For more information about the CCDM solution, see the Embedded Software Solutions Guide. ECAD Part Library Management ESM Processor ESM Software Embedded Software Design Data Management Platform Extensability Global Services Global Services Framework Global Services Preferences Installs ECAD part types to support ECAD part library management. This feature requires Teamcenter Foundation, Vendor Management, and EDA Server Support. Installs ESS processor types and updates preferences. Without these, ESS operations do not work from any interface (rich client, thin client, custom utilities, and other clients). Installs ESS software types and updates preferences. Without these, ESS operations do not work from any interface (rich client, thin client, custom utilities, and other clients). Installs Embedded Software Design Data Management. For more information about this feature, see the Embedded Software Solutions Guide. Platform extensability features. Global Services features. Creates Global Services Framework. Installs Global Services Preferences. C-14 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

337 Solutions and features reference Teamcenter features Feature/Subfeature Multisite Collaboration IDSM Service Multisite Collaboration ODS Service Global Services Monitoring GUI for Rich Client Mapping Designer Description Installs the distributed services manager (IDSM) required to replicate data between multiple Teamcenter sites, enabling the exchange of data objects with other Teamcenter databases over a wide area network (WAN). Installs the object directory service (ODS) required to replicate data between multiple Teamcenter sites, enabling the exchange of data objects with other Teamcenter databases over a wide area network (WAN). Installs a rich client and configures it for use with the Global Services Monitoring GUI for Rich Client feature. This feature requires Teamcenter Rich Client 2-tier or Teamcenter Rich Client 4-tier. Installs the Mapping Designer client. Mapping Designer is dependent on third-party external eclipse plug-ins from Altova MapForce. The Altova Mapforce eclipse plug-ins are dependent on the MapForce client. Requires MapForce Professional client and MapForce eclipse plug-ins. Download these plug-ins from Altova at the following URL: A valid license for the MapForce client is required to run Mapping Designer. This feature requires the Business Modeler IDE Client feature. Catia Non BOM ERP Connect Portfolio, Program and Project Management Workflow to Scheduling Integration Installs the CATIA Non BOM feature. Installs the ERP Connect Toolkit interface that integrates Teamcenter with other Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP)-supported applications, such as BAAN. Portfolio, Program and Project Management features. Allows workflow to send updates to the related tasks in a schedule. This feature requires a four-tier installation and Dispatcher to be installed/configured. This feature requires Teamcenter Foundation. Note This feature also requires the Schedule Manager translator (SchMgrTrans). For information about installing and configuring this translator, see the Dispatcher Server Translators Reference Guide. Reporting and Analytics Teamcenter for Reporting and Analytics Dashboard Features to support Teamcenter reporting and analytics. Installs the Teamcenter reporting and analytics (TcRA) integration. TcRA is a standalone reporting application that introduces a new folder in Report Builder called TcRA Reports, which contains reports created with TcRA. Installs the Teamcenter reporting and analytics dashboard interface. For more information about installing this feature, see Installing Teamcenter reporting and analytics. Supplier Relationship Management SRM Integration Vendor Management Supplier Relationship Management features. Installs the Supplier Relationship Management integration. For more information about this feature, see the Data Exchange Guide. Installs the optional Vendor Management solution. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide C-15

338 Appendix C Solutions and features reference Teamcenter features Feature/Subfeature Substance Compliance Description Installs the optional Substance Compliance solution, which assists in compliance with environmental laws, regulations, standards, and other requirements for parts and for the parts manufactured or supplied from an external source. This solution requires the Teamcenter materials management solution. For more information about Substance Compliance, see the Substance Compliance Solution Guide. Systems Engineering and Requirements Management Teamcenter Extensions for Microsoft Office Requirements Management Features that support Systems Engineering and Requirements Management. Installs Teamcenter Extensions for Microsoft Office. For information about installing this feature, see the Installation on Windows Clients Guide. Installs the Requirements Management functionality for Systems Engineering and Requirements Management. For information about using Requirements Management, see Getting Started with Systems Engineering. Systems Engineering Installs the Systems Engineering application, which provides capabilities such as functional modeling and budgets. This feature requires the Teamcenter Foundation feature and also a rich client or a two-tier Business Modeler IDE client. For information using Systems Engineering, see Getting Started with Systems Engineering. Rich client solutions You can add rich client solutions to a rich client distribution instance. These solutions add functionality to the four-tier rich client installed using the Over-the-Web Installer. For information about creating a rich client distribution instance, see Install a rich client distribution instance. Solution Over-the-Web Installer Microsoft Visual C /2008/2010 Redistributables Description Installs the program that installs the rich client over the Web. This solution is required. Installs the Microsoft Visual C++ libraries required for the rich client and for the FMS client cache (FCC). C-16 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

339 Solutions and features reference Solution Teamcenter client communication system Behavior Modeling Common Client Office Client for Microsoft Office MATLAB Integration Connector Rich Client 4-Tier 4D Planning solution for Rich Client 4-Tier Description Installs Teamcenter client communication system (TCCS). TCCS contains the FMS client cache (FCC), which uploads files from a Teamcenter client workstation to a Teamcenter volume and also downloads requested files from the volume to a client workstation. An FCC provides the following advantages: Improved file transfer performance File streaming Installing an FCC supports the Lifecycle Visualization file streaming technology, which downloads portions of JT files over the network as they are needed and improves network performance. Installs the behavior modeling framework that provides integration to the behavior modeling tool. For more information about these features, see the Behavior Modeling Tool Integration Guide. Installs Teamcenter Client for Microsoft Office, which provides the capability to manage Teamcenter workspace objects in real time. Client for Office provides access to Teamcenter objects directly through Microsoft Office Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and Outlook in Microsoft Office 2007 or This solution adds a custom Teamcenter ribbon to Microsoft Office applications. For information about features and use of Client for Office, see the Client for Microsoft Office Guide. Installs the MATLAB integration connector that allows you to manage MATLAB models in Teamcenter. This solution requires the Behavior Modeling Common Client solution. For more information about these solutions, see the Behavior Modeling Tool Integration Guide. Installs the rich client software required for the four-tier architecture. This solution is required. Installs 4D Planning functionality. 4D Planning is the capability to add a time component to process planning to simulate and visualize construction over an extended period of time. For more information, see Getting Started with Manufacturing. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide C-17

340 Appendix C Solutions and features reference Solution 4th Generation Design for Rich Client 4-Tier As-Built Manager As-Maintained Management for Service Manager CAD-BOM Alignment (CBAExt) for Rich Client 4-Tier CPG Materials for Rich Client 4-Tier Calibration and Configuration Data Management (CCDM) for Rich Client 4-Tier Description Installs 4th Generation Design (4GD) support for the rich client. 4GD allows users of NX CAD or Lifecycle Visualization to cooperate in real time during the design cycle of a product. For information about 4GD, see the 4th Generation Design Guide. Adds As-Built functionality for the four-tier rich client. As-Built is part of Teamcenter maintenance, repair, and overhaul. For information about installing, configuring, and using this solution, see the As-Built Manager Guide. This solution requires the As-Built Management feature on the Teamcenter corporate server. Installs Service Event Management to support service process management for As-Maintained functionality of Teamcenter maintenance, repair, and overhaul. For information about installing, configuring, and using this feature, see the Service Manager Guide. This solution requires the As-Maintained Management feature on the Teamcenter corporate server. Installs CAD-BOM alignment, which allows Teamcenter to interact and share visual data with Product Master Management. Installs CPG Materials support for Consumer Packaged Goods. For information about installing this solution, see Getting Started with Consumer Packaged Goods. Installs Calibration and Configuration Data Management (CCDM), which allows rich client users to manage the calibration and configuration-related parameter data of embedded systems. CCDM allows you to define, create, view, update, and delete parameter data, and to group related parameter definitions together and associate parameter values to a project. For more information about the CCDM solution, see the Embedded Software Solutions Guide. C-18 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

341 Solutions and features reference Solution Change Management and Schedule Manager Interface Content Management Base +S1000D for Rich Client 4-Tier Contract Management for Rich Client 4-Tier Dashboard Dispatcher Client for Rich Client ESDDM for Rich Client 4-Tier Embedded Software Manager for Rich Client 4-Tier Description Installs the Change Management and Schedule Management interface, which enables you to selectively propagate the problem, impact, solution, and reference items related to a change object to the related plan items (schedules) leaf-level schedule tasks. For more information, see the Change Manager Guide. Installs Content Management and enables management of documentation for the S1000D standard. Content Management is the application used to manage technical documentation using SGML and XML information stored in a Teamcenter database. For information about configuring this feature and using Content Management, see the Content Management Guide. Installs Contract Data Management, which allows you to manage, initiate review processes, and monitor correspondence for procurement documents, such as design information, drawings, status reports, purchase orders, and so on. This solution is optional. For more information about Contract Data Management, see the Aerospace and Defense Solution Guide. Installs the Reporting and Analytics Dashboard interface. For more information about installing this feature, see Installing Teamcenter reporting and analytics. Installs Dispatcher Client for the rich client. For information about using this feature, see Getting Started with Dispatcher (Translation Management). Installs Embedded Software Solutions Design Data Management support for the rich client. For more information about this feature, see the Embedded Software Solutions Guide. Installs Embedded Software Solutions support for the rich client. For more information about this feature, see the Embedded Software Solutions Guide. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide C-19

342 Appendix C Solutions and features reference Solution Finish Management for Rich Client 4-Tier GDIS for Rich Client 4-Tier GM Overlay for Rich Client 4-Tier GS Monitoring GUI for Rich Client 4-Tier MES Integration solution for Rich Client 4-tier MTM Data Card for Rich Client Materials Management for Rich Client 4-Tier NX Manager for Rich Client 4-Tier Description Installs Finish Management for Teamcenter. A finish represents a finishing process on a part. It may be used to improve appearance, adhesion, corrosion resistance, tarnish resistance, chemical resistance, wear resistance, and remove burrs and so on. For more information about finishes, see the Aerospace and Defense Solution Guide. Installs the Global Dimensional Information System plug-in for Dimensional Planning and Validation (DPV). This solution is optional. For more information about this feature, see the Installing the Dimensional Planning and Validation solution in the Dimensional Planning and Validation online help collection. Installs the Teamcenter Automotive Edition GM Overlay application. This solution is optional. Configures the rich client for use with the Global Services Monitoring GUI for Rich Client feature. Installs rich client support for the Manufacturing Execution System Integration (MES Integration), which collects the bill of process, bill of materials, and any relevant work instructions into a work package that is released to the MES system. For information about using MES Integration, see the Manufacturing Execution System Integration Guide. Installs the Methods Time Measurement (MTM) data card system. This solution is optional. For more information, see Getting Started with Manufacturing. Installs rich client support for Materials Management, which stores approved material and substance information imported from a third-party database (for example, Granta, IMDS) into a material library in the Teamcenter database. For more information, see the Materials Management Solution Guide. Configures the rich client to use Teamcenter Integration for NX or NX Integration, the application that integrates Teamcenter with NX. Separate installation of the Teamcenter Integration for NX or NX Integration executables is required (as part of NX installation). This solution is optional. C-20 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

343 Solutions and features reference Solution Product Master Management (PMM) for Rich Client 4-Tier Requirements Management SCM ClearCase for Rich Client 4-Tier SRM Integration for Rich Client 4-Tier Service Planning Specification Manager for Rich Client 4-Tier Description Installs Product Master Manager, a rich client application that allows users to view and manage a complete set of LOUs, LOAs, and parts for a vehicle program. Users work with items in a work in progress (WIP) area and optionally add them to a package to allow effective collaboration with other users. Note This feature requires postinstall setup to complete configuration. For more information about installing Product Master Management, see Installing and Upgrading Product Master Management in the Product Master Management online help collection. Installs Requirements Management functionality for Systems Engineering and Requirements Management. For information about using Requirements Management, see Getting Started with Systems Engineering. Installs the integration between Teamcenter and the IBM ClearCase software configuration management (SCM) tool and configures the rich client for its use. Separate installation of ClearCase software is required. This solution is optional. Installs the Supplier Relationship Management integration. For more information about this solution, see the Data Exchange Guide. Installs the Service Planner application that supports service planning capabilities within Teamcenter. Service Planner requires a separate license and is installed as an optional overlay to standard Teamcenter. This solution requires the Service Planning feature on the Teamcenter corporate server. For information about using Service Planner, see the Service Planner Guide. Installs Specification Manager functionality for the rich client. For more information about this feature, see the Specification Manager Guide. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide C-21

344 Appendix C Solutions and features reference Solution Substance Compliance for Rich Client 4-Tier Systems Engineering Teamcenter Applications for Microsoft Office Teamcenter Visualization (Embedded) for Rich Client 4-Tier Teamcenter Visualization (Stand-alone) for Rich Client 4-Tier Vendor Management for Rich Client 4-Tier Work Instructions Solution for Rich Client 4-Tier ADS Foundation for Rich Client 4-Tier Description Installs rich client support for the Teamcenter substance compliance solution. Substance Compliance assists in compliance with environmental laws, regulations, standards, and other requirements for parts and for the parts manufactured by or supplied from an external source. This solution requires the Teamcenter materials management solution. For more information about Substance Compliance, see the Substance Compliance Solution Guide. Installs the Systems Engineering application, which provides capabilities such as functional modeling and budgets. This feature requires the rich client. For information using Systems Engineering, see Getting Started with Systems Engineering. Installs Teamcenter Extensions for Microsoft Office and the Teamcenter Plugin for Microsoft Project, which allows Microsoft Project users to exchange data directly with Schedule Manager. Separate installation of Microsoft Office is required. For information about installing these features on a rich client host, see the Installation on Windows Clients Guide. Configures the rich client to use the embedded viewer when Teamcenter lifecycle visualization is separately installed on the client workstation. This solution is optional. Configures the Teamcenter lifecycle visualization application (the stand-alone application viewer). Separate installation of Teamcenter lifecycle visualization is required. This solution is optional. Installs Vendor Management support for the rich client. Installs the Work Instructions view for the rich client. For information about using work instructions, see the Manufacturing Process Planner Guide. Installs Aerospace and Defense functionality for the rich client. For more information about Aerospace and Defense, see the Aerospace and Defense Solution Guide. C-22 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

345 Solutions and features reference Solution Content Management DITA for Rich Client 4-Tier Render Document for Rich Client Rich Client 4-Tier Lite Edition Service Processing Extensions for Service Manager As-Built and As-Maintained Alignment for Service Manager Description Enables management of documentation for the DITA standard in Content Management. For information about configuring this feature and using Content Management, see the Content Management Guide. Provides Render Management capabilities for the rich client. This feature requires Dispatcher Client for Rich Client. For more information about installing and configuring Render Management capabilities, see Installing Render Management. For information about installing Dispatcher features, see Getting Started with Dispatcher (Translation Management). Installs the lite edition of the four-tier rich client. This solution is optional. Installs the Service Processing Extensions for the rich client. This functionality is available only if you have purchased and have a license for Service Event Management. This solution requires the Service Planning and Service Processing Alignment feature on the Teamcenter corporate server. For more information about using Service Manager, see the Service Manager Guide. Installs the operability functionality between the As-Built Management and As-Maintained Management applications. This functionality is available only if you have purchased and have a license for As-Built Management and As-Maintained Management. This solution requires the As-Built and As-Maintained Alignment feature on the Teamcenter corporate server. For more information installing and using As-Built, see the As-Built Manager Guide. For more information about using Service Manager, see the Service Manager Guide. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide C-23

346 Appendix C Solutions and features reference Solution Service Event Management Extensions for Service Manager Service Request Manager Service Scheduling Teamcenter MATLAB Integration Description Installs the Service Event Management functionality for the rich client. This functionality is available only if you have purchased and have a license for Service Event Management. This solution requires the Service Event Management feature on the Teamcenter corporate server. For more information about using Service Manager, see the Service Manager Guide. Installs service request processing for Teamcenter maintenance, repair, and overhaul. This solution requires the Service Request Processing feature on the Teamcenter corporate server. For more information about using Service Request Manager, see the Service Request Manager Guide. Installs Service Scheduler, which supports scheduling within Teamcenter. Service Scheduler lets companies define, schedule, and implement services for their products. Service Scheduler is a separately licensed application that is installed as an optional overlay on top of standard Teamcenter and Service Manager. This solution requires the Service Scheduler feature on the Teamcenter corporate server. For more information about using Service Scheduler, see the Service Scheduler Guide. Installs the Teamcenter MATLAB integration data model, which allows you to manage your MATLAB model data in Teamcenter. This feature requires the Behavior Modeling Common Client solution. For more information about these features, see the Behavior Modeling Tool Integration Guide. C-24 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

347 Appendix D Web tier context parameters PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide

348

349 Appendix D Web tier context parameters The following tables describe Web tier context parameters provided by Teamcenter Web tier solutions. Web tier required parameters Parameter DEPLOYABLE-FILE-NAME TcEngEncoding TcEngLocale TreeCache Cluster Name TreeCache Mode Description General parameters Name of the deployable file you are creating for the Web tier application. The name is configurable; Web Application Manager adds the file extension. Teamcenter character encoding set for localization. This value must match the encoding specified for the Teamcenter server. For example, if the Teamcenter server is running using ISO8859_1 encoding, specify ISO8859_1 also for this parameter. Locale of the Teamcenter server for localization of Web tier messages. This locale must match the locale of the Teamcenter server. For example, if Teamcenter server is running in the Russian locale, specify ru_ru for this parameter. TreeCache parameters Name of a cluster of components accessing a shared global server pool. You must supply the same name as specified for the server manager (installed using Teamcenter Environment Manager). Communication protocol mode between TreeCache peers, either TCP or multicast. You must supply the same mode as specified for the server manager (installed using Teamcenter Environment Manager). PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide D-1

350 Appendix D Web tier context parameters Web tier required parameters Parameter TreeCache Cluster Port Local Service Port TreeCache Peers Description Required only when the TreeCache communication mode is Mcast. Port used for multicast communication between the application server and the server manager. You must supply the same port number as specified for the server manager (installed using Teamcenter Environment Manager). When configuring multiple environments, use a different port number for each environment. Required only when the TreeCache communication mode is TCP. Specifies the TCP port at which this TreeCache cluster member provides the TreeCache service. If you install the Web tier application on the same host as the server manager, the local service port for the Web tier application must be different from the local service port for the server manager. Required only when the TreeCache communication mode is TCP. Specifies a list of addresses (host name and port number pairs) to ping for peer members of the TreeCache cluster in TCP communication mode. It is a comma-separated list of the form host1[port1],host2[port2],.. Do not use the form host1:port1,... because the colon character (:) is not permitted. For each host/port pair, this cluster member pings the port you specify. In addition, the TreeCache may find more than one peer based on a single host/port pair (for example, if multiple peers on a single host have the same local service port value). Once established, peers exchange data regarding available server pools. This cluster member pings each host/port pair in the list. To be found, a peer must have a matching service port. (See Local Service Port in this table.) As a minimum, specify the service port for all Java 2 Enterprise Edition (J2EE) application server hosts and server manager hosts you want this Teamcenter server to communicate with. D-2 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

351 Web tier context parameters Web tier required parameters Parameter Description For each host, you can include more than one host/port pair in the list. Connection Timeout MAX_POOL_SIZE It is not necessary to include all members of the cluster in this list. For example, you may include only a subset of the server managers and none of the application servers. In this case, the cluster connects only when one or more of the designated managers is running. This technique reduces pinging and thereby improves performance. For small configurations, all members should be included in the peers list. For larger configurations, it is recommended that the number of pinged ports be limited to no more than six. All members should ping at least the same subset of primary server managers so that TreeCaches connect and data is shared. Required only when the TreeCache communication mode is TCP. Maximum time in milliseconds that a TreeCache cluster member waits for peer responses to TCP pings. The larger the value you specify, the more slowly the first server manager starts. Typically, you supply this same value for the Connection Timeout parameter specified for the server manager (installed using Teamcenter Environment Manager). Specifies the maximum number of concurrent connections to Teamcenter servers allowed by the application server. If you do not specify a value, the Web tier application uses the application server default value. Note This parameter applies to WebLogic, JBoss, and Oracle Application Server. For other application servers, the maximum pool size must be set using the application server console. For information, see the Web Application Deployment Guide. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide D-3

352 Appendix D Web tier context parameters Web tier required parameters Parameter Enterprise Application Registration ID LogVolumeName LogVolumeLocation Description ID used to register the application s EJB and J2C Connector. If you want to deploy multiple Teamcenter Web tier applications in a single application server instance, each application must be assigned a unique ID. Name of the log volume. Log volume location, the root directory under which log files are created. The default location logs represent a child folder beneath the default root directory of the target application server instance. This location varies depending on the application server vendor. IS_SSO_ENABLED SSO_APPLICATION_ID SSO_logon_SERVICE_URL SSO_SERVICE_URL Note Security Services parameters If the path you enter contains backslash characters (\) as path delimiters, use double backslash characters (\\) to represent single backslash characters. Specifies whether Security Services is enabled for this instance of Teamcenter. Application ID assigned to this instance of Teamcenter in the Security Services application registry. This information is required only when you are configuring the optional Security Services. This ID is determined when Security Services is installed and configured. For information, see the Security Services Installation/Customization manual. Complete URL of the Security Services logon Service Web application. This information is required only when you configure the optional Security Services. This URL is determined when Security Services is installed and configured. For information, see the Security Services Installation/Customization manual. Complete URL of the Security Services Identity Service Web application. This information is required only when you configure the optional Security Services. This URL is determined when Security Services is installed and configured. For information, see the Security Services Installation/Customization manual. D-4 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

353 Web tier context parameters Web tier optional parameters Parameter webmaster staticresourceclientcache ExpiryTime compressresponse cachecompressedstatic ResourceOnServer Description General parameters address of the administrator to whom questions and comments about this application are addressed. Maximum time in seconds that a client can use a locally cached static content (for example, images or JavaScript) before requesting a fresh copy from the server. Setting this value too low causes the client to unnecessarily request content. Setting this value too high risks stale content. Typical values range from several hours to one day. Setting the value to 0 is valid and causes the client to always ask for static content. The default value is seconds (8 hours). Specifies whether a response to the client can be compressed if the requesting client supports it. Compressing the response typically yields faster response time to the client but requires additional processing in the Web container. Set this parameter value based on trial and error for your instance of the server, bandwidth, and client access environment. The default value is true. Specifies whether responses for static resources are cached on the server. This parameter is used only when the compressresponse parameter is set to true. If the value is set to true, compressed responses for static resources are cached on the server, memory permitting. If the value is set to false, the compression occurs each time the client requests a static resource. The default value is true. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide D-5

354 Appendix D Web tier context parameters Web tier optional parameters Parameter responsecompression Threshold calculateresponsetime PROCESS_MAX_PER_ USER QUERY_TIMEOUT SOFT_TIMEOUT_EDIT SOFT_TIMEOUT_READ SOFT_TIMEOUT_ STATELESS HARD_TIMEOUT_EDIT HARD_TIMEOUT_READ HARD_TIMEOUT_ STATELESS Description Threshold in bytes beyond which the server should compress responses sent back to the client. Typically compressing smaller responses does not yield much compression - so all responses equal to or smaller than this value will be sent to the client uncompressed. Setting the value to 0 is valid and causes the server to compress every response sent to the client (assuming other parameters permit compression). The default value is 500 bytes. Change this value only if absolutely required. Specifies whether the group of response time filters are on (by setting to true) or off (by setting to false). These filters are used for instrumentation purposes (for example, the average time spent in processing a request from a rich client or thin client). The response time filters should remain turned off unless you are collecting statistics. The default value is false. TreeCache Parameters 1 Maximum number of server processes per user. The default value (0) turns off the constraint, that is, specifies that there is no limit on the number of processes per user. Maximum time in seconds per request. The default value (0) turns off the constraint, that is, specifies that there is no time limit on the request. Time-out for edit mode servers in a busy pool. Time-out for read mode servers in a busy pool. Time-out for stateless servers in a busy pool. Load insensitive time-out for edit mode servers. Load insensitive time-out for read mode servers. Load insensitive time-out for stateless servers. Application Interface Web Service parameters 1. For more information about configuring JBoss Cache TreeCache and setting TreeCache parameters, see The TreeCache implementation also uses the JGroups toolkit. For more information about JGroups, see D-6 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

355 Web tier context parameters Web tier optional parameters Parameter AIWS_teamcenter_linking_ user_name AIWS_teamcenter_linking_ user_passwd requestredirectedto replacementfor CGIBIN_IMAN redirectionwaittime Description Name for user for logging on to Teamcenter on behalf of a remote Teamcenter application. The default value is infodba. Password for user for logging on to Teamcenter on behalf of remote Teamcenter application. Legacy URL support parameters Specifies the protocol and server, port, or domain for accessing the thin client. The default value is the server, port, or domain in the requested, original URL. Use this parameter to change the protocol and server, port, or domain information from the requested, original URL. For example, you could use this parameter to change a requested URL to A typical use for this parameter is in a cluster configuration. Specifies the replacement for cgi-bin/iman in the URL. Do not change the default value of tc/webclient (this value is currently the only supported value). Specifies an integer representing the number of seconds to display the URL message to users before redirecting their requests to the new URL. The default value is 10 seconds. The minimum value is 0. Global Services context parameters Parameter ApplicationInstance SSOAppID LogFileLocation TcGSBOSJNDI Description Specifies the name uniquely identifying the application instance within the application server. Specifies the unique value used to identify the Global Services application to the Security Services single sign-on (SSO) server. Specifies the name and location of the logging configuration file. By default, this is the log4j.xml file. If you are using the standard Global Services logging configuration, do not change parameter value. If you are going to customize the logging configuration, you must create the custom file and provide the complete path, including the file name, as the parameter value. Specifies the Global Services business object server (BOS) connector EJB JNDI name. The default value is typically used. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide D-7

356 Appendix D Web tier context parameters Global Services context parameters Parameter TcGSDORJNDI TcGSJDBCJNDI TcGSMessageServerJNDI TcGSNotifierReactorJNDI TCGS_WS_URL TCGS_ODE_URL global.services.proxy.service.url global.services.proxy.user global.services.proxy.password Description Specifies the data object repository connector EJB JNDI name. This connector is used to manage data in the Global Services datastore. The default value is typically used. Specifies the JDBC connector EJB JNDI name. This connector can be used to manage data in the Global Services datastore or to connect any JDBC compatible database. The default value is typically used. Specifies the Global Services message server EJB JNDI name. The default value is typically used. Specifies the Global Services notifier reactor EJB JNDI name. The default value is typically used. Specifies the URL of the Global Services Web services WAR file within the Global Services Ode BPEL enterprise application, for example: TCGS_WS_URL = This is used by services that must send HTTP SOAP requests to other Web services. Specifies the URL to the Global Services Ode BPEL Web application, for example: TCGS_ODE_URL = This is used by services that must send HTTP SOAP requests to BPEL processes. Specifies the base URL for the secured enterprise application (Global Services). For example: host and port are the application server host and the port number used to connect to the Global Services application, and TcGS is the context-root for the application. Specifies the Global Services user the proxy client uses to execute calls to the server. Specifies the password associated with the Global Services proxy user. D-8 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

357 Web tier context parameters Global Services context parameters Parameter global.services.proxy.client.ips TcGSSOAJNDI TcGSEntJNDI Description Provides a comma-separated list of authorized client IP addresses or host names. The IP addresses can contain digit-matching wildcards as follows:? matches any single digit * matches zero or more digits For example: * matches all IP addresses from through and: ?? matches the addresses from through The wildcards match digits only. Therefore, an expression like *.* is valid. However, an expression like * is not. Also, because the * character matches zero or more digits, the expression * matches the following addresses: through through Specifies the Teamcenter services-oriented architecture (SOA) connector EJB JNDI name. Specifies the Teamcenter Enterprise connector EJB JNDI name. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide D-9

358

359 Appendix E Glossary PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide

360

361 Appendix E Glossary A architecture Set of decisions, patterns, and principles for a product suite. The architecture provides a framework for application development within that product suite and is independent of specific functions. assigned FSC FMS server cache assigned as the volume or cache server for an FMS client cache. Each FMS client cache requires an assigned FSC to provide it with access to files. An assigned FSC is typically the FSC nearest to the client host. In small deployments, an assigned FSC can also serve as the parent FSC. B build platform Platform required to build a customization. Compare with certified platform and supported platform. C certified platform Platform the base product is certified to operate on. Compare with supported platform. client tier Teamcenter architectural tier that comprises the Teamcenter clients, Teamcenter integrations with third-party applications, and the third-party applications associated with the integrations. connector See Global Services connector. connector to Teamcenter Enterprise JavaBean that connects Global Services with Teamcenter. The optional connector to Teamcenter is provided as a part of the Global Services connectors and supports both two-tier and four-tier deployment configurations. connector to Teamcenter Enterprise Enterprise JavaBean that connects Global Services with Teamcenter Enterprise. The optional connector to Teamcenter Enterprise is provided as a part of the Global Services connectors. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide E-1

362 Appendix E Glossary corporate server Host computer at the center of a Teamcenter network. This host contains the Teamcenter application root directory, Teamcenter data directory, licensing, File Management System (FMS), and volumes. For installations that include the Web tier (four-tier architecture), the corporate server also contains the Teamcenter server manager. Multiple application clients can map to or mount the corporate server. D distribution server See rich client distribution server. distribution server instance See rich client distribution server instance. E em-planner interface Interface between Teamcenter manufacturing process management and Tecnomatix em-planner that allows data exchange. enterprise tier Teamcenter architectural tier that comprises a configurable pool of Teamcenter C++ server processes and a server manager. Larger sites can distribute the pool of server processes across multiple hosts. Smaller sites can run the pool of servers on the same host as the Web tier. environment variables script Teamcenter script (tc_profilevars) that sets variables for the Teamcenter environment. This script sets all Teamcenter environment variables except TC_ROOT and TC_DATA. ERP Connect Toolkit Teamcenter toolkit that can be configured to create an interface between Teamcenter and ERP systems. ERP Connect to SAP Teamcenter integration that allows the controlled, auditable transfer of product information from Teamcenter to SAP. F facility Physical location in an enterprise (for example, manufacturing plant or design center). One facility can comprise multiple sites. Compare with site. FCC See FMS client cache (FCC). FCC configuration file File that configures an individual FMS client cache (fcc.xml). The FCC configuration file defines such values as the parent FMS server cache location and the location and size of the client caches. Values defined in the FCC configuration file can override default values defined in the FSC configuration file. E-2 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

363 Glossary File Management System (FMS) System that manages uploading and downloading file data between clients and volumes in both two-tier and four-tier architecture deployments. FMS provides volume servers for file management, a shared server-level performance cache for shared data access between multiple users, a client-based private user cache for rich clients, and a transient datastore mechanism for transporting reports, PLM XML, and other nonvolume data between the enterprise and client tiers. FMS file caching enables placing the data close to the user, while maintaining a central file volume and database store. FMS See File Management System (FMS). FMS client cache (FCC) FMS process that runs on a client host, uploading files to an FMS server cache process, requesting files from an FMS server cache process, and caching files on the client host. The FCC process manages two caches of whole files: a write cache containing files uploaded to a Teamcenter volume and a read cache containing files downloaded from a Teamcenter volume. It also manages one segment file cache for Teamcenter lifecycle visualization. Each Teamcenter rich client host requires a local FMS client cache. FMS master configuration file File that configures FMS (fmsmaster.xml). The FMS master configuration file describes the FMS network and defines groups of server caches. It can also define default values for server caches and client caches, such as maximum sizes. Values defined in the server cache configuration file and in the client cache configuration file can override the default values defined in the master configuration file. FMS master host Host that contains the FMS master configuration file (fmsmaster.xml). This file is optionally mounted at each FSC server. FMS server cache (FSC) FMS process that runs on a server host and performs as a volume server (when running on a host where a volume is located or directly mounted) or a cache server (when running on a host where a volume is not located or directly mounted) and a configuration server. As a volume or cache server, the FSC checks all file access requests for a ticket that Teamcenter generates to authorize file access. As a cache server, it manages two segment file caches, one for downloading files and one for uploading files. As a configuration server, it provides FMS configuration information to file client caches and other FSCs. As a transient server, it delivers PLM XML and other transient files to clients. A minimum of one FSC must be deployed in any Teamcenter installation. Multiple FSCs can be deployed, with each FSC performing one designated purpose as either a volume, a cache, or a configuration server. four-tier architecture Teamcenter architecture that includes four tiers: resource tier, client tier, Web tier, and enterprise tier. Contrast with two-tier architecture. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide E-3

364 Appendix E Glossary four-tier deployment Deployment of the Teamcenter four-tier architecture. The Web tier, enterprise tier, resource tier, and client tier can each be hosted on the same or separate computers. FSC See FMS server cache (FSC). FSC configuration file File that configures an individual FMS server cache (fsc.xml). The FSC configuration file defines such values as the address of the master FSC, the maximum sizes of the segment file caches, and the upload time-out value. It can also define default values for FCCs and other FSCs. FSC group Group of server caches defined in the FMS master configuration file. G Global Services connector Global Services component that accesses information from a data source. Each connector accesses information from a particular type of data source. For example, Global Services provides a connector for communicating with JDBC-compliant databases. Global Services offers optional connectors. One implementation of a connector can communicate with multiple data sources by using different connector configuration files. Global Services connectors are Enterprise JavaBeans. Enterprise customizers can create connectors to data sources using the Global Services connector APIs. Global Services Foundation Web application that enables your enterprise to access information stored in virtually any type of electronic data source that manages your enterprise data. Running on a standard commercial Web application server, the server components of Global Services Foundation enable communication among the data sources and between users and the data sources. All components of Global Services Foundation use standard Web technology: Extensible Markup Language (XML), Extensible Stylesheet Language (XSL), and the Java programming language. Users access Global Services Foundation from a commercial Web browser using the standard technologies of Web browsers, primarily support for HyperText Markup Language (HTML) forms and small Java applets. group preference Teamcenter preference applying to an entire group. H heterogeneous network environment Teamcenter network environment consisting of hosts that do not all run the same platform, for example, a corporate server running on a UNIX host, a Web application server running on a Linux host, and workstations running on Microsoft Windows. Contrast with homogeneous network environment. E-4 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

365 Glossary homogeneous network environment Teamcenter network environment in which all hosts run the same platform, for example, a corporate server, Web tier, and Teamcenter clients all running on Microsoft Windows or all running on SUSE Linux. Contrast with heterogeneous network environment. I I-deas Siemens PLM Software s integrated CAD/CAM/CAE solution that is used to design, analyze, test, and manufacture products. IDSM server Integrated Distributed Services Manager, a network node that runs a daemon process to handle the transfer of data objects among sites in a Multi-Site Collaboration network. One IDSM server node must be designated for each Teamcenter database from which objects are published; each server node can act for one database only. J JT cache Data Integration Services Adapter cache of JT files managed by the JT cache service and accessible to Teamcenter lifecycle visualization users. See also world access cache and limited access cache. JT cache populator Stand-alone Data Integration Services Adapter utility that prepopulates the JT cache with JT part and assembly files. L Lifecycle Visualization Visualization components available in the rich client, the thin client, and as a stand-alone application. A scalable solution for the viewing and analysis of 2D and 3D product data, Lifecycle Visualization is available in a number of configurations to meet the requirements of different organizations. limited access cache Data Integration Services Adapter cache of JT files that are accessible only to privileged users. The limited access cache is managed by the JT cache service. Permission checks are performed when a user accesses a file from the limited access cache. Compare with world access cache. local server Set of processes required to serve a single rich client installed on the same host computer as the rich client. Teamcenter Integration for NX/NX Integration configuration requires a local server. M manifest file File that records and maintains information about the rich client image files, including a list of the files and a version for each file. The Over-the-Web Installer consults the manifest file to determine which files to download. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide E-5

366 Appendix E Glossary master FSC FMS server cache that reads the master configuration file directly from the FMS master host. An FSC is configured either to read the master configuration file directly from the master host or to download it from another FSC with access to it. Mentor Graphics Integration Teamcenter integration that allows users to store and manage Mentor Graphics Design Manager objects in Teamcenter. Multi-Site Collaboration Teamcenter capability that allows the exchange of data objects among several Teamcenter databases. Transfer of objects among databases is controlled by daemon processes running on designated servers. Objects are replicated by exporting them from their original database and importing them into the requesting database. Configuration of Multi-Site Collaboration is optional. Multi-Site Collaboration network Network of independent Teamcenter sites that are within the same enterprise and share data using Multi-Site Collaboration. My Teamcenter In the Teamcenter rich client and thin client, application that is the main access point for managing product information. My Teamcenter provides the functionality for creating objects in the Teamcenter database, querying the database for objects, checking in and checking out objects, and managing tasks. Users can also open objects, automatically launching the related application. Each user has a personal My Teamcenter window that displays product information as graphical objects. Although users share product information across the enterprise, they organize this information individually in personal workspaces. N naming service Service that maintains a list of names and the objects associated with them. For the Teamcenter rich client, the naming service maintains a list of servers and the objects and methods used by those services. The naming service is an integral part of the server directory. NS See naming service. NX Integration Integration between Teamcenter and NX. NX Integration users have full access to the Teamcenter user interface from NX, and they can also access NX from the Teamcenter user interface. Teamcenter Integration for NX and NX Integration have the identical user interface in NX. The difference between the two products is the level of Teamcenter functionality available. Teamcenter Integration for NX excludes certain Teamcenter functionality, such as workflow and product structure editing. E-6 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

367 Glossary O object chooser Displays objects appropriate for linking with another Teamcenter product. In determining the objects to display, the object chooser considers the security rights of the person accessing the Teamcenter product. See also remote workflow. object directory services server Multi-Site Collaboration network node that runs a daemon process to handle publication of data objects within a Multi-Site Collaboration environment. One ODS server node must be designated for each object directory services site and each server node can act only for one object directory services site. object directory services site Site with the database that maintains a record of each object in a Multi-Site Collaboration network. At least one Teamcenter database on a Multi-Site Collaboration network must be designated as an ODS site. This site is used to store publication records for the data objects. object launcher Launches another Teamcenter product from a linked object. Each Teamcenter product has an object launcher. See also remote workflow. ODBC driver Teamcenter integration that allows ODBC-compliant applications such as Actuate Report Writer, Crystal Reports, Microsoft Excel, and Access to extract data from a Teamcenter database for building reports. ODS server See object directory services server. ODS site See object directory services site. Oracle home Directory in which Oracle software is installed on the Oracle server node. Oracle server Single installation of Oracle able to service queries from several Teamcenter workstations. The ORACLE_SERVER environment variable defines this Oracle service node. For large-scale installations, the Oracle server is typically a dedicated high performance workstation that is optimized specifically for running Oracle software. Oracle system identifier (SID) Alphanumeric word used to identify a collection of processes and associated memory structures as belonging to a particular Oracle database instance. The ORACLE_SID environment variable defines the Teamcenter-Oracle system identifier. Over-the-Web Installer Installation program that downloads the rich client software from a distribution server instance to the user s workstation over the Web. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide E-7

368 Appendix E Glossary P persistent object manager (POM) Interface between Teamcenter objects and the Relational Database Management System (RDBMS). The persistent object manager provides definition of classes by inheritance from other classes and definition of attributes, manipulation of in-memory objects and support for their saving and retrieval to and from the underlying RDBMS, support for applications accessing the same data concurrently, protection against the deletion of data used by more than one application, and support for the access control lists attributed to objects. POM See persistent object manager (POM). preference Configuration variable stored in a Teamcenter database and read when a Teamcenter session is initiated. Preferences allow administrators and users to configure many aspects of a session, such as user logon names and the columns displayed by default in a properties table. published object Object available to other sites in a Multi-Site Collaboration network. Publishing an object creates a record in the ODS site database that can be read and searched by other sites. Until an object is published, it can be seen only by the owning site. Q QPL See quick part locator. QPL server Quick part locator server. It provides a qpl daemon that can be used with DesignContext in the rich client. The qpl daemon coexists with all Teamcenter daemons. Without this daemon DesignContext does not work. quick part locator Component of Repeatable Digital Validation (RDV) that creates and queries tables in a Teamcenter database. The quick part locator enables rapid lookup of components in an assembly. The tables cache precomputed results of location, attributes, and spatial relationship of all components in a product assembly. The quick part locator provides one of the search engines used by DesignContext. R RDV See Repeatable Digital Validation. remote workflow Teamcenter component that enables users to create links between Teamcenter objects and objects in other Teamcenter products, such as Teamcenter portfolio, program and project management. Users can then launch the linked Teamcenter product from within either the rich client or the thin client. E-8 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

369 Glossary Repeatable Digital Validation Combination of software and processes that enables on-demand digital mockups for use throughout the product development lifecycle. Repeatable Digital Validation services are required for using QPL-based DesignContext. resource tier Teamcenter architectural tier comprising the database server, database, file servers, and volumes. rich client Java-based user interface to Teamcenter installed on user workstations. The rich client accesses Teamcenter databases using a remote or local server. Compare to thin client. rich client distribution server Software that manages the connection between distribution server instances, the Web server, and the user s workstation when a rich client is deployed over the Web. The Over-the-Web Installer contacts the distribution server for the rich client files to download to the user s workstation. rich client distribution server instance Rich client software to be installed on user s workstations over the Web. Administrators create one instance for each server. role preference Teamcenter preference applying to an entire role. S Security Services Services that eliminate prompts for logon credentials when users switch Teamcenter products within a user session. Authentication is performed by an external identity service provider, such as lightweight directory access protocol (LDAP), instead of the Teamcenter product. At a site that deploys multiple Teamcenter products and Security Services, users log on once to access all participating Teamcenter products. server manager Process that manages a pool of Teamcenter server processes in a deployment of the four-tier architecture. The server manager starts and times out a configurable number of server processes to communicate with the Teamcenter database. A server assigner process assigns available server processes to user sessions. The server manager communicates with the Web tier application using either TCP or multicast protocol. server pool Pool of Teamcenter server processes running in the enterprise tier. A small deployment may have only one pool of server processes. For larger deployments, the pool of server processes is distributed as subpools across multiple hosts, with a server manager for each subpool. Server pools are applicable for deployments of the Teamcenter four-tier architecture only. site Individual installation of Teamcenter comprising a single Teamcenter database, all users accessing that database, and additional resources such as hardware, PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide E-9

370 Appendix E Glossary networking capabilities, and third-party software applications (tools) required to implement Teamcenter at that site. site ID Unique identifier of a Teamcenter site. The site ID is used to generate internal identifiers for Teamcenter objects that must be unique throughout an enterprise. Once established, site IDs should not be modified. site name Unique name of a Teamcenter site stored in the database as a user-defined character string. site preference Teamcenter preference that applies to the entire site. Solid Edge Manager Teamcenter integration that enables users to use Teamcenter to manage files from within Solid Edge. STEP Translator Teamcenter application that enables users to import product information into a Teamcenter database and to export Teamcenter data via STEP-compliant physical files. supported platform Platform configuration supported by GTAC. system administrator Teamcenter user who is a member of the system administration group. T Teamcenter Application Registry Independent Web-based service that allows a Teamcenter product to look up other available Teamcenter products for launching a linked object. Administrators can register and unregister installed instances of a Teamcenter product in the registry. Teamcenter application root directory Directory location of the Teamcenter shared binary executables. The TC_ROOT environment variable defines this location. Generally, the contents of this directory change only with a new version of Teamcenter. Teamcenter data directory Directory location of the Teamcenter shared data subdirectories and files. The TC_DATA environment variable defines this location. Each data directory is associated with a single database instance. Teamcenter Engineering Visualization Optional Teamcenter rich client component that provides enterprise-wide product visualization capabilities and is embedded in the rich client interface. Four Teamcenter Engineering Visualization products provide different visualization capabilities. Teamcenter Engineering Visualization Base provides basic 2D and 3D viewing. Teamcenter Engineering Visualization Standard, Teamcenter Engineering Visualization Base, and Teamcenter Engineering Professional provide increasing functionality. E-10 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

371 Glossary Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM) Tool with a wizard-style interface that installs Teamcenter servers and two-tier and four-tier rich clients. TEM also performs maintenance operations, such as upgrading servers, applying maintenance packs, and installing patches. Teamcenter installers launch TEM using the tem.bat command (on Windows systems) or the tem.sh command (on UNIX or Linux systems). Teamcenter file structure File structure of an installed Teamcenter node; it separates homogeneously shared binary executables from heterogeneously shared data. Teamcenter Integration for NX NX-based entry-level set of Teamcenter data management functions, such as vaulting, checking in, checking out, revision management, attribute synchronization, and searching CAD data. Teamcenter Integration for NX manages NX files and their data without exposing the user to full Teamcenter functionality. Teamcenter Integration for NX users have only limited access to the Teamcenter user interface. Teamcenter Integration for NX and NX Integration have the identical user interface in NX. The difference between the two products is the level of Teamcenter functionality available. Teamcenter Integration for NX excludes certain Teamcenter functionality, such as workflow and product structure editing. Teamcenter Integration for NX I-deas Product that integrates Teamcenter and I-deas to provide a single data management environment for users. Teamcenter Integration for NX I-deas users author their data in I-deas and manage the data in Teamcenter. Teamcenter Integration for NX I-deas includes the My Teamcenter user interface and the I-deas Data Services (IDS) and Team Data Sharing (TDS) modules. See also I-deas. Teamcenter Integration for NX I-deas host Teamcenter host that functions as the gateway through which the Migration Wizard initiates communications with the TDS server for data migration processing. Teamcenter manufacturing process management Teamcenter manufacturing process design and management system. Teamcenter manufacturing process management comprises several user applications, for example, Plant Designer, Manufacturing Process Planner, Part Planner, Report Generator, and Resource Manager. TEM See Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM). tessellation Process that translates a CAD file to a visualization file. thin client Teamcenter user interface that provides a streamlined browser-based view of product information stored in a Teamcenter database. The thin client is configured in the Web tier, which creates and serves its Web pages to the client. Compare to rich client. transient volume Operating system directory controlled by Teamcenter and used to store temporary data for transport of reports, PLM XML, and other nonvolume data between the Web tier and client tier in a deployment of the Teamcenter four-tier architecture. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide E-11

372 Appendix E Glossary two-tier architecture Teamcenter architecture that includes a resource tier and a client tier. The resource tier comprises the database server and database. The client tier comprises the Teamcenter rich client, third-party applications that integrate with the rich client, and a local server. This architecture supports only the Teamcenter rich client. Contrast with four-tier architecture. two-tier deployment Deployment of the Teamcenter two-tier architecture. In a typical deployment of the two-tier architecture, the rich client and its local server are installed on a user s workstation as are third-party applications that integrate with the rich client. The database server and the Teamcenter corporate server are installed on one or more separate computers. U user preference Teamcenter preference applying to a specific user. V visualization Ability to display a realistic, real time, graphical visualization of geometric data. volume Operating system directory controlled by Teamcenter and used to store the files managed by Teamcenter. When a user performs an action that causes Teamcenter to create a file, the file is created in the Teamcenter volume. Users cannot directly access the files in Teamcenter volumes; they must do so via a Teamcenter session. W Web Application Manager Graphical installation utility that generates supporting Web files (WAR and EAR format) for a named Web application. Web Application Manager also installs the rich client distribution server and creates distribution server instances. Web tier Teamcenter architectural tier that comprises a Java application running in a Java 2 Enterprise Edition (J2EE) application server. The Web tier is responsible for communication between the client tier and enterprise tier. world All users regardless of group or role. world access cache Data Integration Services Adapter cache of JT files that are accessible to all users. The world access cache is managed by the JT cache service. No permission checks are performed when a user accesses a file from the world access cache. Compare with limited access cache. E-12 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

373 Glossary X XML object list Data Integration Services Adapter file that is formatted in XML and provides a list of the parts and assemblies to be populated into the JT cache. PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide E-13

374

375 Index Numerics/Symbols 4D Planning C-4 4D Planning solution for Rich Client... C-17 4th Generation Design C-4 C-5 4D Planning solution for Rich Client 4-Tier C-17 4th Generation Design for Rich Client 4-Tier C-18 Rich client solutions C-17 C-18 4th Generation Design Change Management Integration C-5 4th Generation Design for Rich Client 4-Tier C-18 4th Generation Design Issue Management C-5 A Action manager daemon Action Manager Service C-3 Adding features additional_applications directory..... B-2 advanced_installations directory..... B-2 Aerospace and Defense Aerospace and Defense Change Management C-5 Aerospace and Defense Foundation.. C-5 Aerospace and Defense Foundation Training C-5 Rich client C-22 AI SOA client C-14 AIX Configuration parameters Daemon startup scripts Kernel parameters Shell limits AIX platforms Platform support System requirements Apache HTTP Server Apache Tomcat Apple Macintosh platforms Platform support System requirements Application servers HTTPServerTable , 8-30 Teamcenter application server Web tier ApplicationInstance ApplicationInstance context parameter D-7 As-Built and As-Maintained Alignment C-12 As-Built Management C-12 As-Maintained Management C-12 ASP.NET State Service C-4 AutoCAD integration, GM Overlay.... C-5 Automatic logon, four-tier Automotive Edition C-5 Autonomy IDOL server C-3 Autonomy Intelligent Data Operating Layer (IDOL) C-3 B Backing up installations Backing up Teamcenter data Backup Oracle databases Base Install Features C-2 Behavior Modeling Common Client.... C-6, C-17 Best installation practices Bounding box generation from JT..... C-8 Bounding box generation from NX.... C-8 Brand Management C-6 Business Modeler IDE Client C-1 Installing , 10-5 Mapping Designer C-15 Solution C-1 Start Business Modeler IDE 2-tier C-2 Business Modeler IDE 4-tier C-2 PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide Index-1

376 Index Business Modeler IDE Standalone.... C-2 C CAD-BOM Alignment C-6 Calibration and Configuration Data Management C-14 Catia Non BOM C-15 cc_integration directory B-2 Certification database , 3-1 Change and Schedule Management Interface C-11 Change Management C-10 Change Management and Schedule Manager Interface C-19 Character set, ISO Character sets ISO UTF CIFS volume data access Classification L10N C-11 ClearCase C-14 Client tier Four-tier Two-tier Client, Business Modeler IDE 2-tier... C-2 Client, Business Modeler IDE 4-tier... C-2 Client, Business Modeler IDE Standalone C-2 Clients FCC Four-tier clients Rich client installation Thin client Two-tier clients Commands CREATE DB create_database dasdrop db2admin db2idrop db2licm db2set db2stop db2swtch insweb , 19-4, Composite host ID Configuration Databases Heterogeneous environment Multi-Site Collaboration Multi-Site Collaboration daemons Oracle Net Teamcenter manufacturing process management Configure Resource Browser and NC Package Browser C-13 Connecting Connectivity Sample database Connector support files Consumer Packaged Goods Brand Management C-6 CPG Materials C-7 Packaging and Artwork C-7 Content and Document Management.. C-7 Content Management C-7 Content Management Base feature.. C-7 Content Management DITA feature.. C-7 Content Management S1000D 4.0 feature C-7 Content Management S1000D feature C-7 Content Management DITA C-7 Content Management S1000D C-7 Content Management S1000D C-7 Context parameters ApplicationInstance , D-7 global.services.proxy.client.ips..... D-9 global.services.proxy.password..... D-8 global.services.proxy.user D-8 LogFileLocation , D-7 SSOAppID , D-7 TcGSBOSJNDI , D-7 TcGSDORJNDI , D-8 TcGSEntJNDI D-9 TcGSJDBCJNDI , D-8 TcGSMessageServerJNDI , D-8 TcGSNotifierReactorJNDI , D-8 TcGSSOAJNDI D-9 Contract Data Management C-10 CORP item creation fails A-5 Corporate server Features C-1 Installing Windows, UTF-8 issues Corrupted database, recovery A-14 CPG Materials C-7 Custom distributions Compact deployable media Silent installation Customer-specific patches Customization for em-server Integration C-13 Customization for Process Simulate Integration C-13 customscripts.log file Index-2 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

377 Index D dasdrop command Dashboard C-15 Database administration server (DAS) Database Configuration Assistant , 4-14 Database Configuration for DPV..... C-13 Database daemons Installation C-3 Starting manually Database Daemons C-3 Action Manager Service C-3 Subscription Manager Service C-3 Task Manager Service C-4 Teamcenter Shared Metadata Cache Service C-4 Tesselation Manager Service C-4 Database services C-3 Databases Adding data directory to installation Adding database to installation Data imports Multiple database access Four-tier rich clients Overview RDV Recovering from a corrupted database A-14 Sample Site planning Teamcenter Templates , Unpopulating in IBM DB A-15 Unpopulating in Oracle A-15 DB2, see IBM DB2 DB2 support db2admin command db2das1 account db2dasgp group db2ese.lic file db2fenc1 account db2fengp group db2idrop command db2insgp group db2inst1 account db2licm command db2set command db2stop command db2swtch command dbscripts directory dbshut utility Destination directories Directories WEB_ROOT Web_tier , 8-8 Dispatcher C-1 Dispatcher Client C-11 Dispatcher Client for Rich Client.... C-9 Dispatcher Server C-10 Dispatcher Client for Rich Client..... C-9 Dispatcher Server C-10 Installation C-1 dist_server.jar file Distributed services manager, see IDSM server and IDSM proxy server Distribution media B-1 Distribution server Adding Web components Changing contents Installation Starting Stopping Distribution server instance Installation , 8-27 Web deployment Documentation distribution image.... B-1 Download URL, IBM DB DPV GM Customization C-5 ds_manifest.mf file E ebop reports Customization C-13 ECAD Part Library Management..... C-14 EDA Dataset types C-14 Server support C-14 EDA for Business Modeler IDE C-14 EDA Server Support C-14 Embedded Software Solutions Embedded Software Design Data Management C-14 Embedded viewer C-11 Embedded visualization for rich client C-11 EMPS - Foundation C-14 encrypt argument, install utility encryptpwf argument, install utility Enterprise Knowledge Foundation features C-9 Enterprise tier Environment settings, non-english locales Non-UTF-8 environments Linux PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide Index-3

378 Index Environment settings, non-english locales Non-UTF-8 environments UNIX Environment settings, non-english locales Non-UTF-8 environments Linux Environment settings, non-english locales Non-UTF-8 environments UNIX Environment variables ORACLE_HOME PATH SPLM_LICENSE_SERVER TC_DATA , 6-9, TC_ROOT , 5-5, 6-7 TCP_NODELAY TNS_ADMIN ERP Connect Toolkit C-15 Error during JBoss startup A-10 Error logs A-1 Error messages A-2 Errors During feature installation Pool ID not available A-7 Premature end of file SERVER_HOST parameter A-7 ESS Base C-14 ESS Processor C-14 ESS Software C-14 Export Oracle databases F Failed to start new thread error A-10 FCC FCC for rich client C-17 Features 4D Planning C-4 4th Generation Design C-5 4th Generation Design C-5 4th Generation Design Change Management Integration.... C-5 4th Generation Design Issue Management C-5 Manufacturing support for 4th Generation Design C-13 Teamcenter Integration for NX-4th Generation Design C-4 4th Generation Design Change Management Integration C-5 4th Generation Design Issue Management C-5 Aerospace and Defense Change Management C-5 Aerospace and Defense Foundation.. C-5 Aerospace and Defense Foundation Training C-5 As-Built and As-Maintained Alignment C-12 As-Built Management C-12 As-Maintained Management C-12 ASP.NET State Service C-4 Automotive C-5 Base Install C-2 Behavior Modeling Common Client.. C-6 Bounding box generation from JT... C-8 Bounding box generation from NX... C-8 Brand Management C-6 Business Modeler IDE C-1 Business Modeler IDE 2-tier C-2 Business Modeler IDE 4-tier C-2 Business Modeler IDE Standalone... C-2 CAD-BOM Alignment C-6 Calibration and Configuration Data Management C-14 Catia Non BOM C-15 Change and Schedule Management Interface C-11 Change Management C-10 Classification L10N C-11 Configure AutoCAD Integration for GM Overlay C-5 Configure Resource Browser and NC Package Browser C-13 Content and Document Management C-7 Content Management Base C-7 Content Management DITA C-7 Content Management S1000D C-7 Content Management S1000D C-7 Contract Data Management C-10 Corporate server C-1 CPG Materials C-7 Customization for em-server Integration C-13 Customization for Process Simulate Integration C-13 Dashboard C-15 Database Configuration for DPV.... C-13 Database Daemons C-3 Action Manager Service C-3 Subscription Manager Service... C-3 Task Manager Service C-4 Teamcenter Shared Metadata Cache Service C-4 Tesselation Manager Service.... C-4 Index-4 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

379 Index Dispatcher C-10 Dispatcher Client C-11 Dispatcher Client for Rich Client.... C-9 Dispatcher Server C-1 ebop reports Customization C-13 ECAD Part Library Management... C-14 EDA for Business Modeler IDE..... C-14 EDA Server Support C-14 Embedded Software Design Data Management C-14 EMPS - Foundation C-14 Enterprise Knowledge Foundation... C-9 ERP Connect C-15 ESS Base C-14 ESS Processor C-14 ESS Software C-14 Extensions C-4 Extensions for Office C-16 File Management C-4 Finish Management C-10 Finished Product Management..... C-7 Finished Product Management to CPG Materials Bridge C-7 FMS Server Cache C-1, C-4 Full Text Search Engine C-3 Global Services C-1, C-14 Global Services Framework... C-1, C-14 Global Services Monitoring GUI for Rich Client C-15 Global Services Preferences... C-1, C-14 GM Customization for DPV C-5 GM Overlay C-5 GM PAD/TWP Customization C-5 Hierarchical Storage Management (HSM) C-4 Install Libraries for AI SOA Client.. C-14 Issue Management C-11 J2EE Based Server Manager... C-1 C-2 Lifecycle Visualization C-11 Maintenance, Repair, and Overhaul C-11 Manufacturing Process Management C-13 Manufacturing support for 4th Generation Design C-13 Mapping Designer C-15 Materials Management C-10 MATLAB Integration Connector.... C-6 Mechatronics Process Management C-14 Microsoft Office Client for Office C-9 Extensions for Office C-16 Microsoft Office client C-9 MTM Data Card C-13 Multisite Collaboration IDSM Service C-1, C-15 Multisite Collaboration ODS Service C-1, C-15.NET Based Server Manager C-2 NX Integration C-8 NX Manager for Rich Client C-8 NX UG Integration C-1 Online Help C-3 Packaging and Artwork C-7 Packaging and Artwork to Finished Product Management Bridge C-7 PAD/TWP Customization C-13 Penetration Request Management... C-11 Platform Extensability C-14 Product Master Manager C-6 QPL for Repeatable Digital Validation C-9 Remote Workflow C-9 Render Document for Rich Client... C-10 Requirements Management C-16 Rich Client (Lite Edition) C-2 Rich Client 2-tier C-2 Rich Client 4-tier C-2 Rich Client, Dispatcher Client C-9 Sample Files C-3 SCM ClearCase for Foundation..... C-14 Server Enhancements C-2 Service Event Management C-12 Service Planning C-12 Service Planning and Service Processing Alignment C-12 Service Request Processing C-13 Service Scheduler C-13 Simulation Process Management.... C-4 Spatial Search C-8 Specification Manager C-7 SRM Integration C-15 Stock Material C-10 Substance Compliance C-16 Supplier Relationship Management C-15 Systems Engineering C-16 Systems Engineering and Requirements Management C-16 Teamcenter Automotive Edition.... C-5 Teamcenter Behavior Modeling Framework C-6 Teamcenter Client for Microsoft Office C-9 Teamcenter Extensions for Microsoft Office C-16 PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide Index-5

380 Index Teamcenter for Reporting and Analytics C-15 Teamcenter Foundation C-1 C-2 Teamcenter Manufacturing C-13 Teamcenter MATLAB Integration... C-6 Teamcenter Rich Client (Shared Disk Deployment) C-2 Teamcenter Rich Client 2-tier C-1 Teamcenter Rich Client 4-tier C-1 Teamcenter Security Services C-3 Teamcenter Visualization (Embedded) for Rich Client C-11 Teamcenter Visualization (Stand-alone) for Rich Client C-11 Teamcenter Web Tier C-4 Tecnomatix C-13 Trueshape generation from JT..... C-8 Vendor Management C-15 Web Tier for.net C-4 Weld Management C-4 Wire Harness Configuration C-14 Wire Harness Configuration in GM Overlay C-5 Work Instructions C-13 Work Package Management C-11 Workflow to Scheduling Integration C-15 File Management features C-4 File Management System Installation C-1, C-4 Installation overview Volume server C-1 Files db2ese.lic INSTALL_TCWEB.TZ jakarta-regexp-1.3.jar A-4 mti.jar mtiems.jar Finish Management C-10 Finish Management for Rich Client 4-Tier C-20 Finished Product Management C-7 Finished Product Management to CPG Materials Bridge C-7 FMS FCC FSC Master configuration file See File Management System FMS Client Cache C-17 FMS server cache C-1 Fms_BootStrap_Urls preference Four-tier architecture Installation overview Overview Troubleshooting deployment A-6 FSC Installation overview Transient server Full Text Search Engine C-3 G Genius4000 data migration getcid utility Global Services Features C-1 Global Services Axis2 Services Global Services CPM Connector for Substance Compliance Global Services Data Exchange Global Services EPSync Reactor Global Services Framework..... C-1, C-14 Global Services installation Global Services Java memory error.... A-10 Global Services Monitoring GUI for Rich Client C-15 Global Services MS Messaging Global Services Ode BPEL web application Global Services Preferences..... C-1, C-14 Global Services Security Proxy Global Services solutions Axis2 Services EPSync Reactor Global Services BPEL Framework Global Services Security Proxy Global Services user interface JMS messaging Teamcenter 10.1 Global Services Framework CPM Connector for Substance Compliance Teamcenter 10.1 Global Services Framework - Data Exchange Teamcenter 10.1 Global Services Framework - Teamcenter Sourcing Teamcenter 2007 or later Teamcenter Enterprise Global Services Teamcenter Enterprise Connector Global Services Teamcenter SOA Connector Global Services Teamcenter Sourcing Global Services User Interface global.services.proxy.client.ips context parameter D-9 global.services.proxy.password context parameter D-8 Index-6 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

381 Index global.services.proxy.user context parameter D-8 GM Customization for DPV C-5 GM Overlay C-5 CORP item creation fails A-5 GM Overlay, AutoCAD integration.... C-5 GM Overlay, Wire Harness Configuration C-5 GM PAD/TWP Customization C-5 Groups db2dasgp db2fengp db2insgp H Hebrew language Heterogeneous environment Heterogeneous network environment Hewlett-Packard HP-UX platforms System requirements Hewlett-Packard HP-UX platforms Platform support Hewlett-Packard HP-UX, Java configuration Hierarchical Storage Management (HSM) C-4 Homogeneous network environment HP-UX Kernel parameter requirements HP-UX platforms Platform support System requirements HP-UX, kernel parameters A-9 HSM C-4 HTML pages I IBM AIX platforms Platform support System requirements IBM DB2 Certified versions Download URL Installation Linux UNIX License Requirements Software image Unpopulating database A-15 Users and groups UNIX, Linux IBM DB2 support ICD files, copying Global Services Teamcenter Web tier IDOL C-3 IDOL server, Autonomy C-3 IDSM proxy server IDSM server IDSM Service C-15 IDSM_permitted_sites preference images directory Imports infodba , 2-19 Install images for connectors Install Libraries for AI SOA Client.... C-14 INSTALL_TCWEB.EXE file Installation Best practices Compact distribution Creating a configuration Custom distribution Distribution server Distribution server instance IBM DB2 Linux UNIX IPv6 networks , 8-6, 8-18 Modifying a configuration Oracle , 4-10 Over-the-Web , 8-18 Quick preconfigured Rich client instance Silent Silent distribution Using TEM , 8-18 Virus scanning , 6-7 Web Application Manager installed.html file installed_programs.dat file installfailed.html file Installing Business Modeler IDE , 10-5 Templates installing.html file insweb command , 8-18, 8-28, 8-40, 19-4, Integrations Microsoft Office C-16 Internationalization webstrings.xml file IPv6 addresses Thin Client IPv6 issues , 8-6, 8-18 ISO character set PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide Index-7

382 Index ISO mode ISO character set Issue Management C-11 J J2EE based server manager , 2-2, 6-7, 9-5 J2EE Based Server Manager..... C-1 C-2 jakarta-regexp-1.3.jar file A-4 Java Java out of memory error A-10 Java Runtime Environment java.lang.outofmemoryerror A-10 JBoss GA A-10 JBoss Cache TreeCache.. 8-6, 9-1, 16-9, D-6 K Kernel parameters , A-9 L launcherror.html file Launching Business Modeler IDE Libraries C-14 Licenses, IBM DB Linux Fully qualified domain names Fully-qualified domain names Length of host name , 6-5 Linux considerations Linux platforms Platform support System requirements Listener processes , 4-13 listener.ora file , 4-13 Localization Converting to Unicode , Hebrew language Rich client Thin client localization directory B-2 LogFileLocation LogFileLocation context parameter.... D-7 Logon, automatic M Macintosh platforms Platform support System requirements Maintenance packs Maintenance, Repair, and Overhaul... C-11 Features C-12 C-13 Rich client solutions C-18, C-21, C-23 C-24 Manifest file Manufacturing Process Management.. C-13 Manufacturing Resource Library Installation Manufacturing support for 4th Generation Design C-13 Mapping Designer C-15 Master configuration file Materials Management C-10, C-20 MATLAB Integration Connector C-6, C-17 Mechatronics Process Management features C-14 Media, distribution B-1 Memory management Microsoft Office client C-9 Microsoft Office extensions C-16 Microsoft Windows platforms Platform support System requirements Migration, Genius4000 data Mixed-language display Thin client MRO As-Built and As-Maintained Alignment C-12 As-Built and As-Maintained Alignment for Service Manager C-23 C-24 As-Built Manager C-12, C-18 As-Maintained Management.. C-12, C-18 Features C-12 C-13 Installation C-12 C-13 Over-the-Web installation C-18, C-21, C-23 C-24 Rich client solutions C-18, C-21, C-23 C-24 Service Event Management C-12 Service Planning C-12, C-21 Service Planning and Service Processing Alignment C-12 Service Processing Extensions for Service Manager C-23 Service Request Manager C-24 Service Request Processing C-13 Service Scheduler C-13 Service Scheduling C-24 MRO As-Built and As-Maintained Alignment C-12 MRO As-Built Management C-12 MRO As-Maintained Management.... C-12 mti.jar file Index-8 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

383 Index mtiems.jar file MTM Data Card C-13 Multi-Site Collaboration Configuring daemons IDSM service C-1 Installation C-1 Local disk installation ODS service C-1 Postinstallation tasks Proxy server C-1 Wide area networks Multi-Site configuration A-2 Multiple database access Four-tier rich clients Overview Multiple EAR file support N native2ascii utility NET based server manager NET Based Server Manager NET Based Server Manager C-2.NET State Service C-4 NET Web tier C-4 ASP.NET State Service C-4.NET Web tier C-4 ASP.NET State Service C-4 Server manager Windows Networks Client installation Heterogeneous network environment Homogeneous network environment Site planning NFS volume data access Not enough storage is available to process this command error A-10 NX NX Integration C-8 NX Library Configure with shared MACH directory NX Manager for Rich Client C-8 NX UG Integration C-1 O Object directory services, see ODS server and ODS proxy server ODS proxy server ODS server ODS Service C-15 ODS_permitted_sites preference ODS_searchable_sites preference ODS_site preference Online help Distribution image B-3 Installation , C-3 Installation alternatives Over-the-Web access Rich client tchelp.jar file , 6-11, 8-4, C-3 Troubleshooting A-3 Online Help C-3 Operating system accounts , 2-19 Operating system support Operating systems supported Oracle Data imports Database Configuration Assistant , 4-14 Database creation Database export Database planning Database upgrades Installation , 4-10 Kernel parameters Listener processes , 4-13 Net configuration oerr utility A-11 Required version Semaphore resources Shared memory resources Site planning Software distribution image B-2 Uninstallation Unpopulating database A-15 Oracle Net Assistant ORACLE_HOME environment variable oratab utility otw.html file otw_installer.jar file Over-the-Web Installer , 8-22, 8-29, 8-35, 19-4, 19-6 Over-the-Web rich client P Packaging and Artwork C-7 Packaging and Artwork to Finished Product Management Bridge C-7 PAD/TWP Customization C-13 Parameters global.services.proxy.service.url... D-8 PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide Index-9

384 Index Kernel A-9 Web tier D-1 Password, valid characters Patches Patching Customer-specific patches Patching rich client Customer-specific patches Described Silently Using Over-the-Web Installer Patching Teamcenter lifecycle visualization Patching the server Patching thin client PATH environment variable Penetration Request Management.... C-11 Platform support Database servers POM transmit schema files Pool manager, starting portal directory B-2 portalhelppage property A-3 Postinstallation tasks Postupgrade tasks Preferences Fms_BootStrap_Urls IDSM_permitted_sites ODS_permitted_sites ODS_searchable_sites ODS_site TC_publishable_classes TC_transfer_area WEB_core_help_server , A-3 WEB_default_site_deployed_app_ name A-3 WEB_help_server , A-3 Prerequisite software Prerequisites Character set GM Overlay Problem Reports (PRs) Product Master Management CAD-BOM Alignment C-6 Product Master Manager C-6 Product Master Manager C-6 Programs Web Application Manager , Properties, portalhelppage A-3 Proxy WAR file (WebLogic) , 8-12 Q QPL for Repeatable Digital Validation.. C-9 QPL server Quick preconfigured installation R rc.ugs file rc.ugs.actionmgrd script rc.ugs.subscriptionmgrd script rc.ugs.task_monitor script RDV Database instance QPL server README file Red Hat Linux Fully qualified domain names Fully-qualified domain names Length of host name , 6-5 Red Hat Linux platforms Platform support System requirements Remote Method Invocation , 8-39 Remote workflow Site planning Remote Workflow C-9 Installation C-9 Removing features Render Formats Prerequisites Translators Render Document for Rich Client..... C-10 Render Manager Installation C-10 Required features C-10 Repeatable Digital Validation C-9 Requirements Database Database, IBM DB IBM DB Java Operating systems Requirements Management C-16 Resource Manager, Genius4000 data migration Resource tier Four-tier Two-tier Reverse proxy configuration SiteMinder WebSEAL Rich client Deployment over the Web Index-10 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

385 Index Description Four-tier C-1 C-2 Installing patches Language display configuration Localization , Online help , A-3 Overview Two-tier C-1 C-2 Rich Client (Lite Edition) C-2 Rich Client (Shared Disk Deployment).. C-2 Rich client distribution server, see Distribution server Rich client distribution server instance, see Distribution server instance Rich client instance Deployment Installation Rich client instance, four-tier Rich client solutions 4D Planning solution for Rich Client 4-Tier C-17 4th Generation Design for Rich Client 4-Tier C-18 Behavior Modeling Common Client.. C-17 Change Management and Schedule Manager Interface C-19 Finish Management for Rich Client 4-Tier C-20 Materials Management C-20 MATLAB Integration Connector.... C-17 Teamcenter MATLAB Integration... C-24 Rich client solutions, patching RMI registry Port number Starting Stopping root_post_tasks_<id>.ksh script root_post_tasks_<id>.ksh script rpcbind error A-2 S Sample database Sample files C-3 Sample Files C-3 SCM ClearCase for Foundation C-14 Scripts root_post_tasks_<id>.ksh , 9-4 Security Services Semaphore resources Server Installing patches Server Enhancements Features C-2 Server manager J2EE C-2 J2EE based , 2-2, 6-7 J2EE based, starting J2EE based, troubleshooting A-7.NET C-2.NET based , 2-2 Server manager, starting Server, patching SERVER_HOST parameter , A-7 serverpool.properties file , A-7 Service Event Management C-12 Service Planning C-12 Service Planning and Service Processing Alignment C-12 Service Request Processing C-13 Service Scheduler C-13 Services Action Manager C-3 ASP.NET State Service C-4 IDSM Service C-15 ODS Service C-15 Subscription Manager C-3 Task Manager C-4 Teamcenter Shared Metadata Cache Service C-4 Tesselation Manager C-4 Shared Disk Deployment, rich client... C-2 Shared memory resources Silent installation With compact distribution , 18-6 Silent patching Simulation Process Management..... C-4 Site planning SiteMinder Software distribution image B-1 Software requirements Application servers Java Solutions Business Modeler IDE C-1 Corporate Server C-1 Dispatcher (Dispatcher Server)..... C-1 Global Services C-1 Multisite Collaboration Proxy Server C-1 Rich Client 2-tier C-1 Rich Client 4-tier C-1 Volume Server C-1 Spatial Search C-8 Specification Manager C-7 Specifying a specific bind address when a host has multiple IP addresses A-6 PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide Index-11

386 Index SPLM_LICENSE_SERVER environment variable SRM Integration C-15 SSOAppID SSOAppID context parameter D-7 Stand-alone application viewer C-11 start_rmi file start_server file Starting Business Modeler IDE Startup error with JBoss installed on Solaris A-10 Stock Material C-10 stop_server file Subscription manager daemon Subscription Manager Service C-3 Substance Compliance C-16 Sun Java System Sun Solaris platforms Platform support System requirements Support files mtiems.jar Teamcenter Enterprise connector SUSE Linux Fully qualified domain names Fully-qualified domain names Length of host name , 6-5 SUSE Linux platforms Platform support System requirements Systems Engineering C-16 Systems Engineering and Requirements Management Requirements Management C-16 Systems Engineering C-16 T Task Manager Service C-4 Task monitor daemon TC_auto_login preference TC_DATA environment variable , 6-9, TC_publishable_classes preference TC_ROOT environment variable , 5-5, 6-7 TC_transfer_area preference TCCS C-17 Stand-alone uninstallation TcGSBOSJNDI TcGSBOSJNDI context parameter D-7 D-8 TcGSDORJNDI TcGSEntJNDI context parameter..... D-9 TcGSJDBCJNDI TcGSJDBCJNDIl context parameter... D-8 TcGSMessageServerJNDI TcGSMessageServerJNDI context parameter D-8 TcGSNotifierReactorJNDI TcGSNotifierReactorJNDI context parameter D-8 TcGSSOAJNDI context parameter.... D-9 TCP_NODELAY environment variable Teamcenter Uninstallation Teamcenter administrator password Teamcenter application server Teamcenter Automotive Edition C-5 Teamcenter Automotive Edition GM Overlay C-5 Teamcenter Behavior Modeling Framework C-6 Teamcenter client communication system C-17 Teamcenter client communication system (TCCS) Teamcenter Client for Microsoft Office.. C-9 Teamcenter database Teamcenter engineering process management URLs, migrating to Teamcenter Teamcenter Enterprise connector, required files Teamcenter Environment Manager , 19-4 Installation log files A-1 Removing features Uninstalling Teamcenter Environment Manager (TEM) Install the Business Modeler IDE Teamcenter Extensions for Microsoft Office C-16 Teamcenter for Reporting and Analytics C-15 Teamcenter Foundation C-1 C-2 Teamcenter Integration for NX-4th Generation Design C-4 Teamcenter Integration for NX/NX Integration Overview Teamcenter Integration for NX/NX Integration Configuration C-8 Teamcenter Integration for NX/NX Integration Configuration C-1 Teamcenter lifecycle visualization Embedded viewer C-11 Index-12 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J

387 Index Installation Stand-alone application viewer..... C-11 Teamcenter Linking See also Remote workflow Teamcenter maintenance, repair, and overhaul C-11 Teamcenter manufacturing process management Configure Resource Browser and NC Package Browser C-13 MTM Data Card C-13 Teamcenter MATLAB Integration.... C-6, C-24 Teamcenter Rich Client (Shared Disk Deployment) C-2 Teamcenter Security Services C-3 Teamcenter Shared Metadata Cache Service C-4 Teamcenter visualization for rich client C-11 Teamcenter Web Tier C-4 Tecnomatix C-13 Templates Installing Updating Templates, database , 4-15 Terminating Teamcenter sessions Tesselation Manager Service C-4 Thin client Description FCC Fms_BootStrap_Urls preference Hebrew language Installation Installation overview Installing patches Language display configuration Localization , Localized text Migrating legacy URLs Online help A-3 Upgrading legacy URLs Thin client solutions, patching TNS_ADMIN environment variable tnslsnr process , 4-13 tnsnames.ora file , 4-13 Tomcat Translation service C-11 Translation Services for Rich Client... C-9 TreeCache initialization failure A-6 TreeCache parameters , 9-1, 16-9, D-6 Troubleshooting Client credential too weak error.... A-2 Four-tier deployment A-6 No administrator privileges error... A-2 Online help A-3 Oracle A-11 Server installation A-1 Server manager A-7 Trueshape generation from JT C-8 Tutorials Two-tier architecture Deployment Installation overview Overview U Unicode , Uninstallation Oracle TCCS Teamcenter Unpopulation of IBM DB2 database... A-15 Unpopulation of Oracle database..... A-15 Update a template Upgrade Oracle databases URLs, Teamcenter engineering process management User accounts , 2-19 Users db2das db2fenc db2inst UTF-8 Incorrect data display on Windows Possible data corruption UTF-8 character set UTF-8 mode Utilities install encrypt argument encryptpwf argument native2ascii Teamcenter Environment Manager , 19-4 V Vendor Management C-15 Virus scanners , 6-7 Visualization Embedded viewer C-11 Stand-alone application viewer..... C-11 Volume Server C-1 PLM00011 J Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide Index-13

388 Index Volumes W Web Application Manager Installation Launching Patching Web servers Deploying Web components Deployment Supported servers Web tier connection problems A-3, A-7 Features C-4 Generating application , 8-8 J2EE Legacy thin client URLs Multiple applications Proxy WAR file (WebLogic) , 8-12 Shared application server instance Web Tier for.net C-4 Web tier initialization failure when using Windows Network Load Balancer.... A-6 Web tier installation problems A-4 Web tier requirements WEB_core_help_server preference.... A-3 WEB_core_help_server preference WEB_default_site_deployed_app_name preference A-3 WEB_help_server preference , A-3 WEB_ROOT directory Web_tier directory , 8-8, , 8-28, 8-40 webapp_root directory , 8-35, 8-39 WebSEAL WebSphere webstrings.xml file Welcome window Weld Management C-4 Windows UTF-8 display incorrect Windows platforms Platform support System requirements Wire Harness Configuration C-14 Wiring Harness Design Tools Integration C-14 Work Instructions C-13 Work Package Management C-11 Workflow to Scheduling Integration... C-15 Index-14 Installation on UNIX and Linux Servers Guide PLM00011 J